外研版全册 教材梳理

初三一轮复习八下Module1-2
Module1重点短语:
收拾2.占用（时间或空间）3.a bit +adj. / a bit of +n. 一点儿… (区别于a little +adj. / n. ) 4.集邮（2）5.拉小提琴/弹钢琴/打鼓/吹笛子6. 踢足球/打网球/打排球7.听音乐8. 一直, 总是9.对…感兴趣/显示出/变得感兴趣 10.下一次11. 在…末尾 12. 需要做某事 13.. 开始做某事14 多久一次(询问频率) 15.种菜 16.照顾, 照看 17. 例如 18. 成长 19.发展兴趣 20. 出版; 出现; 结果是21. 结果22.喜欢做某事 23.在将来24..尽力做某事/尝试做某事25. 在某人业余时间26.给某人带来成功{ 注意词性success n. successful adj.successfully adv. succeed (in doing sth.) v. } 27.在…中受欢迎 28. 给某人写信 29. 遍及全世界 30考虑某事 31.查明有关某事 32.穿着…衣服 33.在过去 34.不仅…而且…
Module2重点短语：
1. 一些私人问题 2. 在几个月后3. 有些亲密的朋友4. 顺便说一下5. 可能下周的某个时间6. 与…不同7. 把你的回答录音 8.想念我的父母9. 祝音乐会好运10. 带你所有的朋友到北京电台来参观bring all your friends for a visit to Radio Beijing 11. 给我一个重要的礼物12.在一个初中13.遥远14.害怕跟任何人交朋友15.跟任何人谈论我的问题16. 担心17. 坐在桌子边18,和往常 一样19.在那时20.回头21. 没有说话 22.一种明朗而 又友好的东西的触动the touch of something bright and friendly 23.和其他学生交谈 24.一天天地 25.那个带来幸运微笑的男孩26.朝某人微笑27.没有关系
Part2: Module1-2基础知识集锦：
Module1 1. make sb interested 结构: make sb adj.（补充：使役动词let/have/make sb do sth.）
(1).interest (n.) 兴趣 have/show interest in / (v.) 使(人) 发生兴趣,主语为事物
(2) (adj.) interesting & interested be interested in “对…感兴趣”
2. listen to sb. do听某人做了某事（着重全过程）/ doing sth.（着重正在做某事）
相同用法的感官动词还有： hear/ watch/notice/find/see等。
3. What’s happening on Friday 周五将要发生什么事？
①.sth happen to sb. “某人发生某事” A traffic accident happened to him yesterday .
②.sb.+ happen+ to do sth. “某人碰巧做某事” I happened to meet a friend yesterday.
4. 辨析：such as 例如，一般列举同类人或事物中的几个例子，as后面不可有逗号。
for example一般只举同类中的一个为例，作插入语，可位于句首,句中或句末。
5. as well as 既…又…, 不仅..而且，用于肯定句中，起连接作用。
as well as 连接并列主语时，谓语动词与第一个主语的人称和数保持一致。
1) I as well as they am (be) ready to help you.
2) Tom and his parents go to the park once a week. (同义句)
Tom as well as his parents goes to the park once a week.
6. as a result 结果，因此 (as a result of sth 因为… 的原因)
1) He got up late, so he was late for school.=He got up late, as a result, he was late for school.
7. 表示“花费”的四个词及用法：
1). sb. spend (money/time) on sth.//(in) doing sth. 花费（金钱/时间）做某事
2). It takes/took sb time …to do sth. 花费（时间）做某事
3) sb. pay money for sth. 花费（金钱）做某事 4). sth. cost sb (money)花费（金钱）做某事
写过去式及分词：spend spent spent take took taken pay paid paid cost cost cost
8. tidy up “收拾”，如果宾语是名词，可置于tidy与up中间或后面；如果宾语是代词，须置于中间。相同用法的短语还有：pick up; look up; wake up等。
Module2 1. No one---- “ 没有人，无人” (否定含义)= nobody, 做主语时，谓语只用单数形式。No one knows (know) who I am. No one was (be) in the room when I entered.
None 可以指人也可以指物，表示三者或三者以上中“没有任何人或物”常与of 短语连用。作主语时谓语动词用单数或复数皆可，但of 后为不可数名词时，谓语动词只能用单.They were all very tired, but none of them would stop to rest.A.both B.allC.none D. neither
2. lonely adj.孤独的，寂寞的 alone adj. 单独一个人的adv.单独地
1）The old man lives alone, but he doesn’t feel lonely. 那个老人独自住着但是不感到孤独
2）-- Do you feel lonely_ when you are alone at home -- No, I always have lots of thing to do.
3. be afraid to do sth. “不敢做某事” （强调动作） be afraid that +宾语从句
be afraid of (doing) sth. “担心/害怕（做）某事” （强调出现某种后果）
1）The boy was afraid of speaking in public. 那个男孩害怕在大庭广众前讲话。
2）I am afraid that I can’t finish the work on time. 我恐怕不能按时完成工作。
5. hear sb. doing sth. 听见某人正在做某事 hear sb. do sth.听见某人做了或经常做某事
1）Every time I heard the other students talking and laughing.
2）--- Do you often hear Wei Hua read English in his room
-- Listen! Now we can hear him reading English in his room.
拓展： laugh n. v. 笑，大笑 laugh at …嘲笑… smile n. v. 微笑 smile at … 对…微笑
6. remember to do sth 记着要去做某事 remember doing sth 记着做过了某事
forget to do sth . 忘记要去做某事 forget doing sth 忘记做过了某事
7. What do you think of the film == How do you like the film 你认为这部电影怎么样？
8. worry about == be worried about 担心…， 为…而担心
1）I didn’t want my parents to worry about me.
9. 宾语从句注意事项: (1) 引导词的正确使用 （ that， if/whether， wh-疑问词）
(2) 在宾语从句中,一定要用陈述语序.
(3) 宾语从句中如果主句用一般过去时，从句根据需要用表示过去的一种时态，但客观真理除外（从句用一般现在时）。(4) 人称变化遵循：“一随主，二随宾，三不变”的原则。
一单项选择
( )1.–What happened ___Sarah –She fell down and hurt her leg. A. to B. with C. in D. on
( )2. Jack is good at playing ____ guitar but he is weak in playing ____ soccer.
His sister Lucy likes playing ____ chess. A. the; /; / B. the; the; / C. the; /; the D. /; the; /
( )3. I think _____is relaxing to go on a vacation. A. that B. this C. that D. it
( )4.My father is a pianist so I often hear him__ the piano A. to play B.play C. playing D. plays
( )5. My brother is very______ in this______ book. A. interesting; interested
　　B. interested; interest C. interest; interested D. interested; interesting
( )6. His smile made me_________. A. to feel happy and warm
　　B. feel warmly and happily C. felt happy and warm D. feel happy and warm
( )7.She_the piano for six years，but she doesn’t play now.A.have playedB.playedC.has played
( ) 8. We ____ the museum yesterday. A.visited B.visit C.have visited
( ) 9.I ___stamps since I was ten years old. A.collectedB.have collected C.am Dcollecting
( ) 10. I _____ to school yesterday because I was ill. A.wentB.haven’t gone C.didn’t go
( )11.I asked him __ he wants to go to the cinema with us. A.what B. if C.whether D. B and C
( ) 12. Look at my running nose. I think I feel like _______ a bad cold.
A. catch B. to catch C. caught D. catching
( ) 13.--- I am going to enter the English speech competition . ----______________.
A. Congratulations B. Good luck C. Sorry D. OK, thanks
( ) 14. Can you tell me ______ A. where is the supermarket B. how do you get there
C. where do you come from D. when the meeting will begin
( ) 15. ----____________ will your father come back --- In a couple of months.
A. How soon B. How often C. How long
( ) 16. I asked him ________ , but he didn’t answer me.
A.Why did he smile B. why he smiles C. why he smiled D. he why smiled
( ) 17. She told me that I posted the letter last week. But I didn’t remember ____ it.
A. post B. posting C. to post D. posted
( ) 18. I asked him ___ she would come or not. A. if B. that C. what D. Whether
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. No one ____(like) playing chess in our class. 2. Don’t be afraid _______(make) mistakes.
3. Alice saw the rabbit ____________(go) down the hole under the hedge.
4. It’s raining outside. Remember ___________(take) an umbrella.
5. It is fine today. Why not ________(go) out for a walk.
三、翻译句子
1.我很孤独,害怕和别人交朋友。 (be afraid to do ). _____________________________
2. 每当我听到其他同学在说着、笑着，我都感觉心都要碎了。(hear sb. doing)
____________________________________________________________________
3. 我问他为什么笑，但是他已经不记得朝我笑了。(remember doing … smile at …)
____________________________________________________________________
4.我不想让我的父母担心我。________________________________________________________.
Module3重点短语:
1. 谢谢你带我们参观北京电台 2. 不客气Don’t mention it. / You’re welcome. / That’s all right. 3. 喜欢带游客到处转4. 小心红色信号灯 5. 这边走6. 收集最新消息7. 需要说好英语8. 坚持学习9. 决定听什么和看谁10. 想当一名体育播音员 11. 准备天气预报12. 进两个球 13. 讨厌输球 14. 低头看着我 15. 记得紧靠收音机坐着16. 亲自和我交流17. 在一个小电台找份工作18. 了解网络电台 19. 给听众播放我最喜欢的音乐 20. 关闭 21. 准备每周节目 22. 通过观察窗外的情况做这件事 23. 跟我来24. 在另一个房间25. 告诉我你早饭吃的什么 26. 以同一个问题开始工作
Module4重点短语：
1.借给我他的CD 刻录机 2. 让我们看看说明书3. 打开刻录机 4. 回放5. 等三十秒6. 通过邮件 7. 把刻录机连接到电脑上8. 选择复制键9. 挽救你的生命10. 令人惊奇的建议11. 咬到他的手 12. 几天以前13. 从箱子里爬出来14. 藏在盘子底下 15. 捡起它 16. 落在冰箱里 17. 保持冷静18. 开始疼痛19. 给他对症下药 20. 出院
Part2: Module3-4基础知识集锦： Module3
1. would like to do sth. “愿意做某事” I would like to speak a few words. 我想讲几句话。
would like sth. 愿意要某东西, 如: Would you like something to eat. feel like+_____
2. Thank you for (doing) sth. “因为…而感谢你” , Thank you for your invitation.
Thank you for inviting me. 感谢你邀请我。
3. take / show sb. around +地点 带某人参观某地
4. look out 意为当心，小心 其后接宾语时, 加介词for （look out for + sth）
Look out for the car. It’s dangerous to play football on the road.
牢固记住: look组成的常见短语: look for 寻找 look at 看 look after照看 look up 查阅
look down on轻视, 看不起 look forward to 期待 look through 浏览
5.keep 的用法：(1) keep doing sth 继续做某事，不停地做某事
They kept talking on the phone for half an hour.
(2) keep 常用语“keep +宾语+宾语补足语”复合结构中。宾语补足语可以由doing, 形容词充当。如：保持健康：keep healthy/fit, stay healthy/fit
6. decide 用法：
(1) decide to do sth 决定做某事 decide not to do sth决定不做某事
(2) decide +that 从句 she has decided that she will be a doctor.
(3) decide +(when/where/ how..) We decide what to listen to and who to see.
I can’t decide which one I should choose.=I can’t decide which one to choose.
7. explain v. 解释;讲解 ( n. explanation)
①explain sth to sb向…解释 e.g. Mr. white often explains questions to me carefully.
②explain that/why/what从句 e.g. He explained that he had never taken his dad’s money.
8. It seemed that they were speaking to me in person.
1）seem 后面可以加形容词，to do, that 从句
2）It seems that… “ 看起来似乎…” 可与 “主语+ seem +to do”互相转化。① It seems that Tony is unhappy today. = Tony seems to be unhappy today. = Tom seems unhappy today.② It seems that she knows what I will say. = She seems to know what I will say.
9. voice： 嗓音；多指的是人的说话声或唱歌声。
sound：声音；指人们听到的“声音” 可以指人和动物发出的声音，也可以指物体碰撞发出的声音或自然界的任何声音。
noise: 噪音,指人们不愿意听到的不悦耳的噪音，及嘈杂声、吵闹声。
10. to do不定式与doing作宾语
(1) 后跟to do不定式作宾语的动词： want, would like, hope, agree, decide...
(2)后跟doing作宾语的动词：巧妙记忆：
完成\练习\持续\忙 (finish, practice, keep, be busy )喜欢\介意\别放弃(enjoy, mind, give up)
(3) 后跟两者作宾语的动词：remember, forget, stop, try…
Module4
1. 把某物借给某人lend sth. to sb.=lend sb sth
辨析：borrow 和lend borrow：v. 借进 (borrow…from…) lend：v. 借出 (lend…to…)
2. If you want to send your recording by email, connect the recorder to your computer.
(1) send 发送;送给 把某物送给某人send sb. sth.=send sth to sb.
(2) connect在句中表示“连接、接通”， 短语：connect… to/with …
3. If the red light doesn’t come on, wait for 30 seconds.
(1) come on 在这里表示“打开、开动”
They heard a strange sound, and lights came on.他们听到一个奇怪的声音，接着灯亮了。
(2) come on 还以表示“鼓励、劝说、催促”等。
4. If you want to turn on the recorder, press the blue button. turn on 打开，反义短语turn off
其他关于turn的短语：turn up调大（高）； turn down调小（低）；拒绝
turn ove r翻转; 调转；返回； turn back往回走
5祈使句：
(1) 祈使句是简单句里一种特殊的句子形式，表示命令、请求等。
这类句子最显著的特点是省略主语，且动词在任何情况下都用原型。
注意：祈使句要与动词作主语的情况进行区分. 动词作主语时要用V-ing形式.
(2) 祈使句的否定形式是直接在动词前加Don’t。
大多数祈使句的反意疑问句是will you；Let’s…, shall we. Let us…, will you
6. bite 过去式bit,过去分词bitten bite “叮、咬”，根据咬的部位不同，要接不同的介词。
动词+宾语+介词 (in / on) +身体部位，类似的动词有hit,
7. suggest doing sth 建议做某事 ；advise sb. to do sth建议某人做某事。
8. if条件状语从句:
(1) 注意“主将从现”原则，即：当主句是一般现在时；祈使句；含情态动词，或当主句的谓语动词是hope, wish, want等动词时, 从句要用一般现在时表将来。
(2) 注意：要会区分宾语从句中的if 以及条件句中的if： 宾语从句中的if意思为“是否”，相当于whether；条件状语从句里的if 意思为 “如果”。
一、单项选择
1.You’d better_the riders when you drivea.A.look out forB.look downC.look upDlook through
2Remember_the red light when you goacross the streetAwatchingB.watchC.watchesDto watch
3. It seemed that they ______ to me in person.
A. are speaking B. were speaking C. speaking D. spoken
4. If you don’t have money, you should ______ your parents ______more.
A. ask; to B. ask; with C. ask; for D. ask; of
5. Let’s begin our great concert ______ dance music.A. use B. with C. of D. in
6. Most of my classmates enjoy _______ Jay Chou’s pop music.
A. listen B. listening C. listen to D. listening to
7.I asked _ for breakfast.A.what did he have B.what does he have C.what he hasD.what he had
8. The doctors were busy helping the patient. They even didn’t have time to stop_______..
A. having a rest B. to have a rest C. had a rest D. for have a rest
9. Listen! She has a nice ___, and she sings very well. A. sound B. noise C. voice D. shout
10. He practises _______English every day. A. saying B. speaking C. talking D. telling
11. I ___ my pen everywhere, and didn’t find it. A. looked downB. looked after C. looked forD. looked
12.Our teacheoften advise us __ computer games a lot.A. to playB. playingC. not to play D. not playing
13. Don’t forget ____ the lights when you leave.A. turning on B. turn off C. to turn off D. to turning off
14.Can you tell me _ English well A.how to learn B.what to learn C how can I learn D.what can I learn
15. The meeting didn’t start______ everyone was there. A. because B. until C. why D. if
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. Keep _________(study) English if you want to work on Radio Beijing.
2. People from all over the world make friends by ___________(write) letters.
3. If it ______(be) sunny tomorrow, I ___________(walk) to school.
4. We ________(not have) our sports meeting if the weather _______(not be ) fine.
5. If you __________(not know) the answer, please ________(ask) Mary.
6. Don’t talk! The students _________(have) a test.
7. ________(read) English books is good for us.
8. I don’t know which sweater _________(buy).
9. If there _______(be) fewer trees, there _________( be) more pollution.
10. I’m not sure if he ____ (come) tomorrow. If he __ (come), I ___ ( tell) you.
三、翻译句子
1. 如果你想成为一名记者，你需要英语说得很好。(want to be…; need to )
2. 他们还没有决定去哪里。(decide where …)
3. 这孩子不停的问我问题。( keep asking…)
4. 我记得今天早上我给老师打过电话了。(remember making a telephone call to…)
5. 我问莉莉昨天早饭吃了什么？(have for ) 6. 似乎要下雨了。(It seems that…)
Module5重点短语:
1. 告诉我关于音乐会的事2. 一起演奏一些音乐3. 独奏一段爱尔兰舞曲4. 在.. 快结束时 5. 幸好是你不是我6. 在后台演奏7.在我们最后的排练中8. 把你打败9. 独奏 10. 警告她关于她的功课 11. 花太多时间和乐队在一起12. 惩罚她并且把她送去一所不同的学校 13. 以她为荣 be proud of her =take pride in her 14. 把她送走y 15. 拒绝演奏 16. 那多可惜啊！ 17. 有另一次机会 18.留住我的好朋友19. 带来一个新的电脑游戏 20. 警告我不要用他的电脑玩游戏 21. 用它来工作22. 出故障23. 把它复制到电脑上24. 把它从电脑上卸载下来25. 十分确信26. 感觉糟糕极了27. 主动提出赔偿 28.犯了两个错误29. 告诉他真相30. 生你的气31. 在家周围做些事情32. 帮他做他的工作 33. 真的抱歉34.在电脑上留下了病毒35. 为……而付钱Module6重点短语：
1 醒着的2太困了3亲密的朋友 4关于交朋友5就这些吗？ 6采访的尾声7鼓掌欢呼 8在朋友中间9担心她10.照顾她 11.谈论她的朋友 12.小提琴拉得十分好 13. 我今天的文化播报14.在这部电影中演得很好 15.使角色真实可信 16.关于17.环绕着加勒比海诸岛航行18.试图找到一些丢失的黄金19.遇到一些坏人20.不得不和他们斗争21.有很多打斗镜头22.看起来十分危险 23.反映现实生活24.在我看来25.太多的打斗26.除此以外 27.上映、出版28.建议你去看29.上演一周 30.一个奇幻惊险电影31.既很受欢迎也很出名
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦：
1. warn 警告，用法：1) warn sb of/about sth 2) warn sb (not) to do sth 3) warn + that 从句 use…for…表示用...做，介词for后用动名词形式。
拓展：be used for doing / to do 被用来干…… get used to doing … 习惯于干某事
2. too much修饰不可数名词 ，too many修饰可数名词，两者意思为:太多。
much too 意思为太... 修饰形容词、副词。
3.such +（a/an) +（形容词）+ 名词, so +形容词或者副词
拓展：so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
4.decide 决定 1). decide (not ) to do 2). decide +(when/where/ how…)从句
5. take off : 1）脱下 2）（飞机）起飞 3）请假，休息 4) 拔掉，卸载
6.offer提出;提供1). offer sb. sth. =offer sth. to sb.给某人提供某物2).offer to do sth.主动提出做某事
7. at least 至少， 反义短语 at most 至多
8. after all 毕竟 He is good enough. After all, he is only a child.
9. make sure 弄清楚，查明 1). make sure of / about 2). make sure that 从句
拓展：be sure of/about sth 对某事有把握 be sure to do sth 务必做某事 be sure that 确定…..
10. go wrong 出毛病，出故障， go 为“变得，变成” 类似短语： go bad, go white
11. Rather you than me! 翻译：幸好是你不是我.
prefer to do sth. rather than do sth.=would rather do than do sth. 宁愿做…而不愿做…
12. beat & win 翻译下列句子总结beat和win的用法：
小结：beat通常用于游戏或比赛中击败对手，其宾语多是与之比赛、战斗的运动员或球队。 win 常跟类似a game，a war a prize等之类的名词连用，不可接表示人的名词作宾语。另外beat 还有“连续不断敲打”的意思
【M6知识点集锦】
1.awake adj. 醒着的（表示状态，不用进行时） be awake
wake v. 醒来 (woke, woken) wake up 叫醒，唤醒 代词放中间 wake him up
2.sleepy adj. 困乏的，打盹的 feel sleepy asleep adj. 入睡的 be asleep / fall asleep
sleep v. (slept, slept ) go to sleep 睡觉
3. among 在…中 （指三者或三者以上之间） between 在…中间 （指两者之间）
1). The teacher sits among the students.2). The girl sits between the twins.
4. look after 照顾，照看 = take care of 照顾，看管
look after…well === take good care of …好好照顾
1). He looked after his cat well. 同义句 He takes good care of his cat.
5. explain 解释 explanation n. explain to sb. sth 向某人解释… explain + that 从句
6. at the end of 在…末尾 at the end of April 在4月底， at the end of the street
in the end 最后,终于 == at last / finally
7. worry vt(及物动词) 使烦恼，使忧虑 不及物动词 常与about 连用
worry的形容词有两种形式: worrying和worried be worried about
8. be on 上映，上演 The film has been on for 20 minutes.
9. both 词组：both …and == not only…but also
both..and谓语动词 用复数 Both you and he are going to Shanghai tomorrow.
not only…but also 就近原则 Not only you but also he is going to Shanghia tomorrow否定：neither .做主语谓语动词用单数。
neither …nor 两者之中一个也不 ：连接主语谓语动词采用就近原则：
Neither he nor I am (be) wrong. Neither you nor he has (have) made some mistakes.
就进原则的其他短语：either…or not only… but also there be
10. make make sb +动词原形 ，make sb+形容词 make sb+ 名词
① Our teacher often makes us do (do) a lot of homework. .
② Our hard work can make our country beautiful (beautiful).
(3) The teacher made me monitor. 老师让我当班长
11. although (尽管) 与 but although不能与but同时出现在一个句子中.
Although in my opinion there is too much fighting, it’s an enjoyable film.
In my opinion there is too much fighting, but it’s an enjoyable film.
12. except 除…之外 (同类之间的比较)
I go to school every day except Sunday. (言外之意：周日不上学)
except for 表示"除..外" (指不同类比较).
Your composition is quite good except for some spelling mistakes.
你的作文除了几处拼写错误之外，非常好。 （对作文是肯定的）
13. advise 与suggest 建议…
1). 建议某人做某事：advise sb to do sth. 2). 建议做某事：suggest doing sth.
Ex ① Our teacher often advises us to practise (practise)our handwriting.
② The teacher suggested practising (practise) our handwriting
1.He lives in a poor place, so he has no _ to hear popular music.A.adviceB.text C.chanceD. information
( )2. I am busy. Can you help me ________ the housework A. forB. with C. in D. onto
( )3. All the people in the office believe Jack, because he is always a(n) ____ man.
A. friendly B. lonely C. poor D. honest
( )4. She is _______ good girl and we all like to play with her. A. so B. so a C. such D. such a
( )5. My father often warns me ______ with that bad boy.
A. not to play B. not playing C. don’t play C. not play
( )6. If there _______ no red light, you can press the blue button.A. are B. is C. will be D. were
( )7. It takes _______ practice to become a good swimmer.A. a lot ofB. manyC. a fewD. a little
( )8. Please _____ the computer games. I don’t want my computer to get a virus.
A. take on B. take off C. turn up D. turn down
( )9. The rich man gave me much money yesterday, but I _______ it.
A. received B. accepted C. borrowed D. refused
( )10. Finally I realized _____I was wrong, so I said sorry to him. A. who B. if C. that D. which
( )11. I don’t like playing with Jane. I’d rather _______ in the park alone.
A. playing B. play C. to play D. played
( )12. — Sally doesn’t feel well today, so she can’t see the film with us. — _______
A. What a shame! B. Why not C. That is great. D. Don’t mention it.
( )13. Who can tell me what happened _____ the story
A. to the end B. by the end of C. at the end of D. in the end
( )14. — I want to be a zookeeper in the future. — _________ I’m afraid of animals.
A. Sounds nice. B. That’s lovely! C. Look out! D. Rather you than me.
( )15. The boy won first place in the race. His parents ______ him.
A. are interested in B. are worried about C. are proud of D. are busy with
( )16. All the children like Mr White very much because he often makes them_____.
A. laughed B. laugh C. laughing D. to laugh
( )17. My teacher said ______ I was hard-working. A. when B. who C. which D. that
( )18. Did you have anyone _____ the trees？ ---- Yes. I had them ______.
A. to water, water B. to water, watered C. water, to be watered D. water, watered
( )19. It’s a good habit______ breakfast every day. A. had B. have C. has D. to have
( )20. He is creative enough _____ so many nice toys for his daughter.
A. buying B. making C. to buy D. to make
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。
1. He is hungry. He would like something ______________(eat)
2.There are twelve ____________ (month) in a year.
3. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
4. As he _________(read) the newspaper, his mother came in.
5. Don’t forget _________(water) my flowers while I’m away.
6. If the photo isn’t good, __________ (not/save).
7. Please teach me how___________ ( play ) the computer games.
8. Will you please ____________( not talk ) in class any more
9. They keep __________ (watch ) the beautiful scenery out of the window.
10. Do you think English is as __________ ( important ) as maths
11. Jim, ____________ ( not swim ) here. It’s dangerous.
三、拓展训练
1.他们饰演的角色真实可信。 They __________the character ___________.
2.他们与一些坏人面对面的相遇，不得不与他们交战。
They come ______ ______ _______with some terrible men and have to ________them.
3在我看来，尽管作文中的错误太多，但这还是一篇不错的文章。
______ _____ _______，It’s an excellent composition, __________ there is ______ ______ mistakes.
4.他们绕着加勒比海诸岛环行。 They ______ ______the Caribbean islands.
5. She is very happy，because she is always __________ _______(在朋友中间)。
四、拓展训练 （C层选做）
Shyness means feeling frightened when you’re around other people. Some children are born shy. Some become very shy later because of their life experience. In fact , everybody gets a little shy sometimes. It’s just how much they feel shy.
①Most people have red faces and talk in broken sentences when they are shy. But some become so shy that they won’t go to a restaurant because they are too nervous to order and pay for their food. Some are afraid of meeting new people, so they seldom go outside. This kind of shyness can be bad for a person.
②如果害羞并没有让你不能去做你想做的事, being shy isn’t a big problem. Some experts say shy people are good at working because they think __③__ and __③__ less. But remember not to let good opportunities (机会) pass you by just because of it. If you have to sing a song at a birthday party or give some performances in front of others, just do it. There’s nothing for you to be afraid of.
1.将①句翻译成中文。_____________________________________________________________
2.将②句翻译成英文。_____________________________________________________________
3.在③空格处填上适当的词。 __________　__________
4.You have nothing to be frightened.(同义句)_____________________________________
5. Find out the main idea of the message.________________________________________________
初三一轮复习八下Module7-10
Module7重点短语:
1、欢迎到北海公园 2.几乎不能听到街上的车辆3.甚至能听到鸟在唱歌4. 想保护全国公园的环境5. 沿湖边走一走6. 爬上白塔7.音乐会你打算怎么办？ 8. 从上面能看到公园的全貌9.我的手和胳膊疼10.与乐队去其他人一起表演 11. 告诉她真相12. 练习的太多 13. 告诉她不要担心14. 告诉我照顾好自己15. 叫我休息，尽快好起来16. 去国家公园放松放松17.度假18.以怪石著称19.看上去像20.很少有人21.在一个小湖边露营22.在深夜 23.好象24.问他们是什么声响25.出了帐篷看看怎么回事26.告诉我们悄悄的出去27.指着森林 28.跳到树上29.通过云端30.从树上揪下一片叶子31.摘树叶是不对的. 32.中国的第二大淡水湖
Module8重点短语：
1、五.一节计划 2、和他们呆在一起3、在青岛度过几天 4、呆在那儿直到5月5号5、在五.一节6、离五.一最近的星期一7、休一天的假 8、在一个不同的日期 9、在九月份的第一个星期一 10、做特别的事情 11、去野营 12、在好的地方野餐13、假期的结束14、开始变得更加凉爽15、回到学校去 16、五一节一结束就 17、在暑假开始以前18、玩得开心点19.全世界的人们 20.庆祝新年21.依靠;根据 22.开始干某事 23.时代广场 24.等待25.听音乐、唱老歌、玩儿26.临近12点 27.倒数 28.一…就29.唱起一首名为《友谊地久天长》的古老歌曲30.相聚31.到户外走一走32.下决心33.写下来列个单子 34.帮..克服困难35.许诺要实现这些决心 36.向..告别Part2: Module7-8基础知识集锦：
Module7 1. I can hardly hear the traffic in the streets and no one is shouting.
hardly表示否定，意为：几乎不I haven’t seen him for years but he has hardly changed at all.
表示否定的副词还有：seldom , rarely ,never（ 注，含有这些副词的句子表示否定）
2. It’s so quiet. 这里如此安静。 She is such a pretty girl. 她是如此漂亮的女孩。
such是形容词修饰名词或名词词组，such +（a/an) +（形容词）+名词。
so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so +形容词或者副词。so 还可以与表示数量的形容词many, few, much, little连用后加名词。so many books, so much water, so few people, so little money
拓展： so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
He works so hard that he can get good grade. 他学习如此努力，他肯定能得到好的成绩。
He is such a clever boy that he can work out the difficult problem.
他是如此聪明的一个男孩，他能解决这个难题。
3.We are spending some time off in Hunan Province.
(1) spend 此处为“度过”， 例:Will you spend a long time next time
(2) spend “花费” 总结take, cost, pay，spend的用法区别
4. I heard a loud noise, as if someone was singing. 我听到好大的噪音，好像有人在唱歌. as if 意为“好像，似乎”，后加句子。如：You look as if you’ve had a good time.
5. hope与wish：两个都可以表示“希望”，动词用法如下：
(1). hope的用法：①.hope for+名词； ②. hope to do sth； ③. hope +that 从句
Ex：I hope that I can see you one day.(同义句转化) I hope to see you one day.
(2).wish的用法：①.wish to do sth； ②. wish sb to do sth； ③.wish + that从句
【拓展】： 课文原句Wish you were here! 译为：如果你们在这就好了。此句只是表示一种主观的愿望，与事实不符，所以从句用过去时态表示虚拟。例：我希望我可以飞。 I wish I could fly.
6. We are going to the second largest fresh water lake in China. “the +序数词+形容词或副词最高级+单数名词”，表示“第几最…” Ex: Wang Lin is the second tallest boy in our class.
Module8 1. depend on 依靠，依赖，取决于 independent adj. 独立的
It can depend on the seasons, the moon or the sun.
2. count down 倒数，倒计时 Just before 12 o’clock,everyone counts down from 10: 10,9,8…
3. get together聚会 get常见短语：get back归还get to到达get there 到那里 get home 到家
get along/on well with和……相处融洽 get on/ off 上/下车
4. help out帮助…克服困难 help sb out 帮助某人解决难题 I will help more at home.
1）help的具体用法：help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事 help sb. with sth.在某方面帮助某人
help oneself to...随便吃(喝/用)些……
2）名词help的相关短语： ask for help求助 without one’s help没有某人的帮助
with one’s help = with the help of sb在某人的帮助下
5. promise v. 保证;发誓
1）promise to do sth. 承诺做某事 promise not to do sth.承诺不做某事 promise（sb.）that...允诺……
2）promise作名词时的相关短语： break a promise违背诺言 give a promise给予保证
keep a promise遵守诺言 make a promise to sb.(对某人)作出允诺
6. 时间状语从句：通常由以下连词连接：when ,while, after, before, as soon as ,since, till /until
1). 由when, while引导的时间状语从句；它们都表示当…时候，但有不同：when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词，又可以是瞬间动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”：
While引导的从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的.
2).由before和after引导的时间状语从句.before ,after可以作介词，后加动词ing或者名词，代词
3). 由till或until引导的时间状语从句。till和until做连词时一般情况下两者可以互换，直到…才：如果主句中的谓语动词是瞬时动词时，必须用否定形式；如果主句中的谓语动词是延续性动词 ( http: / / baike. / view / 238104.htm" \t "_blank )时，用肯定形式。例如：I didn't go to bed until（till）my father came back.直到我父亲回来我才上床睡觉。 Please wait until I arrive.在我到达之前请等我。 I worked until he came back.我工作到他回来为止。
4). 由since引导的时间状语从句。一般情况下，从句谓语动词用一般过去时，而主句的谓语动词用现在完成时。但在It is ＋时间＋since从句的句型中，主句多用一般现在时。
5). 由as soon as表示“一……就”。例如： I will go there as soon as I finish my breakfast.。
注意：时间状语从句和if 条件句有共同的特征：主句如果表示一般将来时态，从句需要用一般现在时态来表示.
一、单项选择
1. Can you _____ at 2:30 p.m, mum A. wake me upB. wake up me C. awake me upD. awake up me
2. The physics teacher told the boys and girls that light _______faster than sound.
A. travel B. travels C. traveled D. was travelling
3. This song is very beautiful _______its lyrics(歌词)A. except B. except for C. besides D. beside
4. Mr. Chen is ___, so don’t make any noise.A. sleepy B. going to sleep C. sleeping D. falling sleep
5. What he said _______the English teacher___.
A. make, angry B. makes, angrily C. makes, angry D. made, to be angry
6. There is a boy ____ Tom in our class. I saw him____on the playground just now.
A. calling, playing B. called; played C. called; playing D. calling; played
7. I felt ________ tried because I had ________ homework.
A. too much; much too B. very much; too much C. too much; very much D. much too; too much
8. — Who do you usually spend your holiday ___ — Of course my family.A. for B. aboutC. withD. /
9 teacher made a _ of books for us to read during the summer holidays. A.noteB. showC.menu D. list
10 Shehas been in Beijing for two years and she has _Chinese friends here.
AlittleB.a littleC.fewD.a few
11. I ____you to have a wonderful with your classmates on the camp.A. hope B. wishC. ask D. think
12. Try to guess its meaning when you meet a new word. Don’t ____ the dictionary all the time.
A. work on B. wait for C. depend on D. take up
13. When I got home, I found my brother _____ model planes. A. makes B. madeC. makeD. making
14. Mr Smith asked _off because he didn’t feel well.A.three dayB. three daysC. three days’D. three-day
15. On the first day the teacher let us _resolutions for the new term.A.makeB.to makeC.writeD.to write
16. I won’t spend __ much time __video games.A. such; playing B. such; play C. so; playingD. so; play
17. ---Hurry up! The bus is coming. --- Wait a minute. Don’t cross the street ___ the traffic lights are green.A. until B. after C. while D. since
18. They were celebrating the New Year _______ it rained hard.A. till B. when C. as soon as D. if
19._________fine weather! Let’s go for a picnic on _________fine day.
A. What a, such a B. What, such a C. How, so D. How, so a
20.Changjiang River is ____________river in China.
A. the first longest B. the one long C. the one longest D. the first longe
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. I remember ________ (turn off ) the light in my bedroom, but now it’s still on.
2. Mother promised _________________( buy ) a new bike for me.
3. If he __________(not be) early, __________(not wait) for him.
4. We must clean and tidy the room when we finish _________(paint).
5. It’s hard work to get everything ready on time ________(print).
6. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
7. Certainly I posted your letter—I remember _________(post) it.
8. She ________(fall) in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
9. They ________(listen) to the teacher attentively （专心地） when the bell _______(ring).
10. We couldn’t decide whether ________(buy) the red one or the blue one.
三、翻译句子
1. 超市在饭店的对面。(opposite)_________________________________________________.
2. 黄河是中国最长的河之一。(one of )_________________________________________.
3. 国家美术馆是一个有许多著名绘画作品的博物馆。(with)
the National Galley______________________________________________________.
4. 昨天我们在公园里玩得多开心啊！(have fun)__________________________________________.
5. 他还对许多其它的事情感兴趣。（also, be interested in ）
__________________________________________________________________________
Module9重点短语:
1.不错2.擅长于3.出现，发生4.期待5.错过了最后的排练6.目的是 7.独自8.一个借口9.避免和某人的矛盾10.尽力去做某事11.她真勇敢. 12.一个善解人意的想法13.演奏这首音乐14.请老师重写最后的舞曲15.我打赌16.真正的英雄17. 中国最著名的英雄18 献身于19.成为一名医生20. 照顾,照看21.受伤的士兵22. 在战争中 23. 发明新的治疗方式 24. 开办医院25. 给当地人民和士兵提供治疗26. 不停下来休息 27做手术28. 尽管 29. 在手术中30在最后31.使他成为英雄Module10重点短语：
1.航班号2. 它在那儿3. 想同你一起去4. 我也是5. 乘火车去巴黎6. 所有其它的动物7.去参加一个大型户外流行音乐会8．担心.. 9.飞机会出故障10 别傻了。11. 同你们所有人呆在这儿12. 前往伦敦航班的乘客13 保持联系14. 一路平安15.飞往16. 因公出差17. 不得不独自呆在家里18. 和…一样简单19. 一个14岁的女孩20. 对做饭知之甚少21. 用…填满22. 知道做什么23. 怎样照顾我们自己24. 一些重要的事情25. 把汤熬糊26. 基本的生活技能 27. 尤其重要28. 得到足够的锻炼 29. 学会做饭30．有写作业的时间 31. 上大学32. 做一些简单的饭菜33. 在他看来34. 太多依赖父母 35.打扫房间36. 穿着得体 37.一个完美的假日38.不得不单独待在家里39 你的父母在身边 40．我的很多同学 41比如做饭和洗衣服Part2: Module9-10基础知识集锦
1.语法聚焦：状语从句
（一）because 引导的原因状语从句与so 引导的结果状语从句可以互换：
注：because从句如果放于句首应该与主句以逗号隔开，放于句末则不用。此外，because和 so 不能同时出现在同一个句子中。
（二）so that 引导的目的状语从句与so引导的结果状语从句区别：
注：so that引导的目的状语从句中时态表示未来、可能性，常用could，will, would, can 等词，而 so 引导的结果状语从句常表示动作已经发生。
（三）so…that...与such…that….引导的结果状语从句的区别：
1). so + adj./adv. + that…. 2). such + (a/an)+adj. +n. +that
★so that 常可以用too…to或enough to 同义句转化。
2). such 是形容词，修饰名词或名词词组，so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many，few，much， little连用，形成固定搭配。
Ex:用so/such 填空： ①_____ much/little money; ②______ nice a flower;
③_____ a fool; ④_______a nice flower; ⑤______ many/ few flowers;
⑥_____a lot of people ⑦______ bad weather; ⑧_______nice flowers
2. on one’s own “独自，自己，单独地”，相当于by oneself
拓展： owner n.“主人，拥有者” own adj.自己的 own v.“拥有”
3.avoid 作动词，意为“避免、躲开”，后接v-doing形式、名词、代词作宾语。
4. It was very brave of her. brave adj.勇敢的 bravely adv. 勇敢地
★ It is + adj. + for (of) sb. to do sth. 当形容词修饰人的性格特征的时用of; 如：kind；clever；
generous(慷慨的); brave; gentle（温柔的）; honest; friendly; stupid； 当形容词修饰物的特征时用for, 如：easy，interesting, difficult, hard,
5. 用real/really填空：________good; a _______hero; _______ famous
6. one of + the 形容词的最高级+名词复数最…之一
7. give one’s life to sth. / doing sth. 献身，捐躯 注意: to 为介词，后跟动名词
【拓展】：look forward to doing 期待做某事 be/ get used to doing 习惯于做某事
8.hard adj.困难的----同义词 difficult adv.努力地---- work hard / study hard
hardly adv.几乎不(表否定)【拓展】：never，seldom, few, little, rarely, no, nothing, nobody…
Ex:1). He can _________(hard) swim. 2). He studies _________(hard) than last year.
3). It’s very __________(hard) for us to translate the text.
9. in spite of 尽管，后跟名词，代词，动名词ing ; although（though）后加句子
都不与but 连用 Ex: 1) Although she cut her hand,she went on studying. 同义句转化
=>She went on studying in spite of cutting her hand.
10. end v. 结束，终止 n. ending结局; 结尾
in the end 最后，终于 == at last / finally; at the end of .. 在…末尾
Ex: 1) At the end of the road, there is a hosptal.2) In the end/ At last / Finally， he went to the college.
11. have to 不得不 have to do sth 否定形式：don’t have to do
12 . invent 动词：发明，创造; n. 发明者_________; n. 发明，创造___________
【M10基础知识】1.would 用法 1). 表示想象,推测或可能，would do
2). would like to do sth. == I want to do sth. 想做…
2. so +助动词+ 主语 表示：..也是, 助动词根据前文变化，如do/does/did /am/is /are , can /could。
Tom likes playing table tennis. So he does.(确实如此).
I can play the violin. So can she. (她也会)
There is nothing wrong with it.== Nothing is wrong with it. ==Nothing goes wrong with it.
go wrong with 出故障， go 根据人称，时态而变化
1). Something _________________(出故障) with our TV yesterday.
2). Something is wrong with your watch. 同义句= Something _____ _______ _______ your watch.
4. stay in touch (with) == keep in touch (with) 和…保持联系 lose touch with 和..失去联系
5. take…to ==go to…by…. 乘…去… I will ______ ______ plane ______ Paris.
== I will ______ ______Paris ______plane. == I will ______ ______Paris.
6. as …as 像…一样 中间是形容词或副词的原级。 not so (as) ….as 表示不如、不及
Tom 跑的跟Jim 一样快。 Tom runs Jim.
Tom不如Jim 跑的快。 Tom run Jim.
7. I can fill an empty stomach with tomato
拓展：be full of …装满了… The bottle is full of water
一、单项选择:
( ) 1. We should go by bus_____ get there earlier.A. as soon as B. where C. in order to D. as
( ) 2. My brother left school in 2005, and since then he _____in Beijing.
A. lives B. lived C. will live D. has lived
( )3. Jane, please turn off the lights _____you leave the classroom.
A. after B. before C. until D. but
( )4. Betty put on her raincoat _______she wouldn’t get wet.
A.in order to B. so as not C. so that D. just as
( )5. It was really selfless _______ Bethune to help Chinese people. A. for B. to C. in D. of
( )6. Why did he perform operations ____soldiers A. on B.for C.to D.with
( )7. We will send the presents to Daming _______we receive them.
A.until B.as soon as C.before D.since
( )8. He has lived in England for a year, ________his English is still poor.
A.although B.but C.because D.so
( )9. He tried to ____meeting me in the street because he didn’t pay my money back.
A.avoid B.hide C.enjoy D.look forward to
( ) 10. -That’s my flight! Goodbye, everyone! -Byebye! _______.
A. So do I B. Stay in touch C. There it is D. Thanks
( ) 11. All living things __the sun for their growth.A. depend ofB. fill with C. full of D. depend on
( )12. Tom has visited Beijing. ____________. I like it very much.
A. So I do. B. So have I C. So do I D. So I have
( )13. The trip cost __ that they all went.A. such little B. so little C. so muchD. such much
( )14. He runs ______ to catch up with Tom.A. enough fast B. fast very C. too fast D. fast enough
( )15. Is there _____ in today’s newspaper --No, there isn’t.
A. anything new B. new anything C. something new D. new something
( )16. ---“Do you think the chicken tastes _______ ” ---“She cooked it ____, I think”
A. good, good B. well, well C. well, good D. good, well
二、根据单词的适当形式填空
1. He gave his life to _________(save) the poor children.
2._________(protect) our world is our duty.3. I’ll go to the movies if it_______(not rain).
4. I remember____________(give) the pen back to you. Why do you ask me again？
5. Tom went to school without ____________(have) breakfast.
6. You’d better go ____________(immediate).7. Something ____________(go) wrong with it just now.
8.I _________ (do) my homework while my parents____________(watch) TV at 8 o’clock last night
9. They started as soon as they _________________ (receive)my telephone.
10. He ________________ (leave) as soon as he _________________ (drink)up his coffee.
11. Can Jim write as (careful) as Kate 12. There is much more _____ (learn) than cooking.
13. He worked hard enough (catch) up with others.初三一轮复习八下Module9-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M9-10中出现的avoid等单词、so that等短语，并灵活运用状语从句。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.了解不同领域的英雄人物，激发努力学习的高昂斗志；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M9-10词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M9-10重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择:
( ) 1. We should go by bus_____ get there earlier.
A. as soon as B. where C. in order to D. as
( ) 2. My brother left school in 2005, and since then he _____in Beijing.
A. lives B. lived C. will live D. has lived
( )3. Jane, please turn off the lights _____you leave the classroom.
A. after B. before C. until D. but
( )4. Betty put on her raincoat _______she wouldn’t get wet.
A.in order to B. so as not C. so that D. just as
( )5. It was really selfless __________ Bethune to help Chinese people.
A. for B. to C. in D. of
( )6. Why did he perform operations ____soldiers A. on B.for C.to D.with
( )7. We will send the presents to Daming _______we receive them.
A.until B.as soon as C.before D.since
( )8. He has lived in England for a year, ________his English is still poor.
A.although B.but C.because D.so
( )9. He tried to ____meeting me in the street because he didn’t pay my money back.
A.avoid B.hide C.enjoy D.look forward to
( ) 10. -That’s my flight! Goodbye, everyone! -Byebye! _______.
A. So do I B. Stay in touch C. There it is D. Thanks
( ) 11. All living things _____ the sun for their growth.
A. depend of B. fill with C. full of D. depend on
( )12. Tom has visited Beijing. ____________. I like it very much.
A. So I do. B. So have I C. So do I D. So I have
( )13. The trip cost _________ that they all went.
A. such little B. so little C. so much D. such much
( )14. He runs ________ to catch up with Tom.
A. enough fast B. fast very C. too fast D. fast enough
( )15. Is there _____ in today’s newspaper --No, there isn’t.
A. anything new B. new anything C. something new D. new something
( )16. ---“Do you think the chicken tastes _______ ” ---“She cooked it ____, I think”
A. good, good B. well, well C. well, good D. good, well
二、根据单词的适当形式填空
1. He gave his life to _________(save) the poor children.
2._________(protect) our world is our duty.
3. I’ll go to the movies if it_______(not rain).
4. I remember____________(give) the pen back to you. Why do you ask me again？
5. Tom went to school without ____________(have) breakfast.
6. You’d better go ____________(immediate).
7. Something ____________(go) wrong with it just now.
8.I _________ (do) my homework while my parents____________(watch) TV at 8 o’clock last night
9. They started as soon as they _________________ (receive)my telephone.
10. He ________________ (leave) as soon as he _________________ (drink)up his coffee.
11. Can Jim write as (careful) as Kate
12. There is much more _____ (learn) than cooking.
13. He worked hard enough (catch) up with others.
拓展训练：（C层选做）
Each morning, I walked past a security guard(保安). He 1_____ everyone that walked by him. I 2_____ how he knew so many people by their first names. The first few times I saw him. I didn’t say hello back to him 3_____ he greeted me. I was lost in my own world. On Monday he asked, “How was your 4_____ ” I told him about my visit to my sick, elderly mother. He told me how 5_____ he was for my mother’s sickness. As I walked away, I realized I did not even know his 6_____. The following day, I asked, “What’s your name ” He answered, “Gary.” I said, “I’m Deborah.” After that, we talked a couple of times a week. We 7_____ stories about our weekends, our dreams, and our families. Gary got offered a new job and moved 8_____. It has been years since I last spoke to him, yet the memory feels like yesterday.
I look back at what became a friendship of sharing stories from the heart. When you say 9_____ to a stranger(陌生人) you become a pebble(鹅卵石) thrown into a lake. With each ripple(涟漪) you create, you spread 10_____ that continues to give.
( ) 1. A. watched B. believed C. thanked D. greeted
( ) 2. A. complained B. admired C. expected D. forgot
( ) 3. .A. when B. until C. before D. and
( ) 4. A. visit B. weekend C. mother D. sickness
( ) 5. A. afraid B. glad C. sorry D. surprised
( ) 6. A. age B. job C. name D. family
( ) 7. A. wrote B. heard C. read D. shared
( ) 8. A. away B. over C. on D. in
( ) 9. A. yes B. hello C. no D. goodbye
( ) 10. A. news B. virus C. love D. sadness初三一轮复习八上Module3-4
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M3-4中出现的already等单词、get on (well) with等短语，并灵活运用现在完成时态。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3. 养成科学的英语学习策略；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M3-4词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M3-4重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一单项选择
1.---Is the man over there our maths teacher？
---No, it can’t be him. He has just _________ the supermarket
A. been to B. gone to C. be going to D. went to
2. “_____ does it take ” “It takes half an hour.”
A. How long B. How soon C. How far D. How often
3. Please remember _______ to Beijing ______ business ______ plane.
A. go ; on ; by B. to go ; by ; in C. to go ; on ; by D. go ; on ; in
4. ----Have you heard the news ______ --No, not ______.
A. already ; already B. yet ; already C. yet ; yet D. recently ; already
5.I have many pen pals, but ________ of them are foreigners.
A. none B. no one C. nobody D. one
6. So far many astronauts ________ the moon.
A. visit B. visited C. have visited D. has visited
7. –Do you know that we won the football match –Yes. We ________ news.
A. hear B. to hear C. have just heard D. just have heard
8. –How much does this DVD ________ –It’s $198.
A. cost B. pay C. spent D. pay for
9. The cake is delicious, I want _______one.
A. the other B. another C. others D. the others
10.--Tom prefers __________to ______________.
-Let’s ask him to join our dancing club!
A. singing; dancing B.dancing; singing C.to sing; dance D. to sing; to dance
11. The old man lives in the forest________, but he doesn't feel_________.
A. alone; alone B. lonely; lonely C. alone; lonely D. lonely; alone
12. He can’t read the book ___________he is blind(瞎的)。
A. because B. because of C. so D. or
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. Some ___________(light) is harmful to our health.
2.How large is the universe No one________________(know).
3.There are______________(million) of stars in the sky.
4. We _ just _ (finish) our homework. We ____ (do) it just now.
5. ___________(watch) English is a good way ______________(speak) English
6.--- Jim, ________ you _________ (write) a letter to your father
--- Yes, I have. I ____________ (write )it yesterday.
7. A dog___________(call) Wangwang died last night．
8. --- Jim, ________ you _________ (write) a letter to your father
--- Yes, I have. I ____________ (write )it yesterday.
9. My grandpa ____________(die) 3 years ago. That means he _____________(die) for 3 years.
10. _________you __________(see) this film before –Yes. I ________(see) it a week ago.
11. Emma is busy _________(sweep) the floor. She has no time ________(answer) your question.
12. We _ just _ (finish) our homework. We ____ (do) it just now.
三、选做题 根据汉语翻译句子
1 很难弄清楚宇宙到底有多大．
It is ______ _______ understand how _________ ______ ________ _______.
2. 科学家认为地球上的生命已有数百万年．
Scientists think that _______ ______ ______ life on Earth for _______ _____ years.
3. 来自星星上的光花了很长时间才到我们这儿来．
The light from stars ________ _________ a long time ________ ________ us .
4. 我们还没有在其他星球上发现生命．
We ________ ________ life on other planets ________.
5. 我宁愿学英语也不去打篮球。（prefer to ….rather than…….）初三一轮复习九下Module5—6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M5-6中出现的rule等15个单词、keep to等8个短语，并能灵活运用情态动词与时态。
2.自主学习，小组合作，超越自我，掌握用画知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.热爱生命，培养积极乐观的生活态度；激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
使用说明：1、20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方。
2、20分钟独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module5-6重点短语集锦：
Module5重点短语:
1.担心be worried about=worry about 2.要吃些东西have something to eat 3.注意听,仔细听listen up
4.玩得高兴enjoy oneself 5.沿着…走walk/go along 6.独自离开go off on your own 7.迷路get lost
8.快要饿死了be starving 9.去攀岩go rock climbing 10.个人安全personal safety
11.越过小溪cross the stream(区别 across) 12.领路lead the way 13.感到劳累feel tired 14.当心watch/look out=be care ful15.在第一天晚上on the first evening 16.入睡fall asleep 17.把食物挂到树上hang the food in the tree 18.捡垃圾pick up the rubbish 19. 整理,收拾tidy up 20.继续前行move on 21.在正午at midday 22.去散步go for a walk 23.看到…正在做…see…doing 24.记得干…remember doing 25.伸手去摸reach out 26.站直 stand still 27.转身turn around 28.每次every time
Module6重点短语：
1.让我们等等别人吧。Let’s wait for the others. 2.他们发生了什么事？What has happened to them 3.走得比我们慢 walk more slowly than us 4.等一下 wait a minute 5.腿受伤break his leg6.出事，发生事故have an accident 7.沿着城墙跑 run along the wall
8.摔倒在墙边trip and fall over the edge 9.打电话求助 call for help
10.躺在地上 lie on the ground 11.感觉有点冷 feel a bit cold
12.有腿伤 have/has got a wound in his leg 13.没什么严重的nothing serious
14.多亏了，由于thanks to 15.在19世纪 in the 19th century 16.保持安全stay/keep safe
17.在…方面的影响the effect on…. 18.注意饮食习惯watch your diet 19.增重put on weight 20.8小时睡眠eight hours’ sleep 21.拒绝吸烟和毒品say no to smoking and drugs
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦
1. fever n. 发烧 短语：发烧 have a fever 感冒：have a cold 头疼: have a headache Tom had a cold and fever. The doctor advised him to stay in bed.
2. wound n. 伤口( 一般指外伤) hurt 是一般用语，可以指肉体上的伤害，也指精神上的He has got a wound in his leg and he may have a fever, but it’s nothing serious.
3. miss 1). Vt. 思念 2). Vt. 错过 --missing adj. 丢失的== lost
1). He misses / missed his parents very much.
2). He got up late and missed the early bus.
3). Her necklace was missing. She looked for it everywhere, but she couldn’t find it.
4. trip 1). Vi. 绊倒 2). n. 旅行（短途）
1). He tripped over a stone. 2). Would you like a trip to the seaside
5. improve vt. 改进,提高 --improvement n. 改进，改善
1). Can you tell me how to improve my English
2). Thanks to improvement in both health care and personal safety, most people are living
healthier, longer lives.
6. require 1). vt. 需要 require doing==2).要求，命令 require sb. to do sth. 3).require that sb. should do
-- requirement n. 需要，需要的东西
1). In the past, people’s jobs require more physical effort.
These young seeds will require looking after carefully.
2). The monitor required me to hand it in at once.
7. weight n. 重量 put on your weight 增肥 lose your weight 减肥---weigh vt. 称..重量，权衡 1). He weighed the package by hand. 2). How much do you weigh 3). What is your weight
8. effect n. 影响 have an effect on… 对…有影响 vt. 产生；实现
1）His words still have an effect on students. 2) I will effect my purpose.
9. catch up with sb. 赶上某人 他跑得足够快能赶上Tom. He runs _____ ______to catch up with Tom.
10. happen to sb. 指偶然发生 take place 指按计划发生
11.had better do / had better not do 最好做 / 最好不做
你最好不要课堂上说话。 You_______ _________ __________ talk in class.
12. There he is, lying on the ground. 他在那儿，在地上躺着。
lying on the ground现在分词短语作状语, lie 躺，--- lay, lain // lying
【巩固提升】
一、用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. It is _________ (peace) in the evening in the countryside.
2. ________ (sudden), a car hit him.
3. The first rule of the camping is _____ (keep) a clean camp site.
4. We can enjoy ________ (we) on the Great Wall.
5. Why don’t you go rock _______ (climb)
6. Those flowers are ___________ (real) beautiful
7. He lives on the _____________ (five) floor in that building.
8. I will never forget ____________ (see) her dance for the first time.
9. Last night I saw John ___________ (talk) on the phone when I got up for a drink.
10. Children should be taughtabout ____________ (person) safety on the street.
11. Unluckily, they got ____________ (lose) on the way there.
12. —Mum, I’m ____________ (starve)! Is dinner ready yet —Sorry, my son. It’s nearly ready.
二、适当介词填空。
1. Later that day we stopped _________ a beautiful valley _______ a stream.
2. The next day we stopped _______ midday __________ something to eat.
3. Let’s tidy the site __________.4. The bear can smell the food ___________ a distance.
5. The baby bear ran ____________ me _____________ the woods.
单项选择。
1 . —Could you please come to the museum with me —Sorry ,I______.I have to study English. A.couldn’t B.mustn’t C. can’t D. needn’t
2.—Must I clean the room now No ,you _______. You can do it tomorrow.
A.mustn’t B. must C. needn’t D. need
3. She ____know the answer ,but I’m not sure. A. maybe B. may be C. may D. must
( )4.—Can I wear any clothes I like to school –No ,you can’t .You _____wear a uniform.
A. might B. must C.will D. would
( )5.—Look, Sue is over there.—That _____be her. She is in Canada now.
A. mustn’t B. can’t C. needn’t D. won’t
( ) 6.Susan stays alone in the classroom and looks sad. —________her
A.What happens to B . What has happened to
C. What is happening D. What was happening
( ) 7.It seems that it is going to rain. You’d better____the windows open when you leave the house. A. not leave B. leave C. not to leave D. to leave
( ) 8.Mark,please don’t play basketball on the road. It’s very dangerous.
—____. I’m going home at once.
A. Have a great time. B. Sorry, I won’t do that C. I’d like to. D. Thanks, I won’t do that
( ) 9.There, on the ground, _____an old man in dirty clothes.
A. lying B. lied C. lay D. laid
( ) 10.There is _____in today’s newspaper. It’s boring.
A. something new B. nothing new C. new something D. new nothing
( ) 11.When will your sister’s wedding____
A. take place B. be happened C. be taken place D. happen
四、翻译句子。
1.你最好不要告诉他这消息。(had better not do)______________________________________
2. 你怎么了？(happen) ______________________________________
3. 你能告诉我怎样提高我的数学吗 _________________________________________
4. 老师走进教室，手里拿着一本书。 ________________________________________
5. 她站在那里，微笑。 ________________________________________________
6. 我将尽我的最大努力赶上别人。I will ____ ____ ____ ____ catch up with others.
7. 过去人们因疾病和饥饿过着困难的生活。
The people in the past _______ ______ _______ ______ because of diseases and hunger.
8. 树木能够阻止土壤流失。Trees can __________ soil(土壤)__________running away.
9. 说到钱，它对我们生活很重要但不是万能的。____ ___ money, it is necessary for our life.
10. 他比起写更擅长画。 He _______ ________ ________drawing than writing.
11.注意听！我有重要的事情要告诉大家。
_______ _______! I have something important to tell everyone.
12.你最好沿着这条小道走，否则你可能会迷路。
You’d better_____ _____ the path, or you might lose your way.
13. 你不可以一个人离开，因为琳达会生气的。
You mustn’t _______ _______ on yourown because Linda will be angry.
14. 这不好说，我必须考虑一下。It’s difficult to say and I have to _______ _______ it.
15. 好了，请带路。 Come on. _______ _______ _______, please.
五、完形填空。
Marc sat next to me when we were in Hill Junior School. He had a serious 26 in communicating with people. One always had to guess what he was saying. 27 ，most of my classmates did not like to be with him because his hands and shirts were always 28 . I tried to let him know the importance of being clean by 29 him several times a day to wash his hands. But he just could not understand.
One day，our teacher Miss West walked up to Marc. 30 saying anything，she took Marc to the washroom. Slowly，Miss West washed his 31 and told him that he should keep himself clean. She did that every day for one month. 32 ，Marc understood.
Miss West’s love has given me a good example to follow when I 33 my job. I always remember to teach my students by showing them the right 34 to do things. And most important of all，I always remember to give them 5 to learn and to grow up.
( )26. A. question B. problem C. accident D. hobby
( )27. A. Instead B. However C. Besides D. Except
( )28. A. dirty B. clean C. new D. old
( )29. A. talking B. saying C. speaking D. telling
( )30. A. With B. Without C. After D. Above
( )31. A. face B. feet C. shirts D. hands
( )32. A. At last B. At first C. Such as D. So far
( )33. A. did B. am doing C. have done D. am going to do
( )34. A. ways B. answers C. time D. food
( )35. A. more advice B. 1ess advice C. more time D. 1ess time
选做题：用所给动词的适当形式填空。?
1. My brother isn't at home right now. He ___________ (go) to Beijing. He___________ (be) there many
times. He _________ (not be) back until next week.?
2. When I got home, my mother__________ (go) out for a walk.?
3. He____________ (finish) his composition just now.?
4. By the end of next month, all our lessons______________ (finish).?
5.________she _______ (do) morning exercises every day ?
6. In the past few years, another bridge _____________ (build) over the Changjiang River.?
7. She________ (watch) TV while she______________ (wash) her clothes.?
8. He said he_________ (give) her the present as soon as she __________ (come) back.?
9. Listen! Someone____________ (sing) in the next room.?
10. Our teacher told us the earth_________ (go) around the sun..?
PAGE三上Module 1—2 复习学案
组别______组号________姓名________等级________
【学习目标】：1、牢固记忆Module1-2中出现的单词，短语及重要知识点，并能灵活运用.
2、通过自主学习，合作探究,解决疑难，总结归纳出运用规律和方法。
3. 热爱自然，保护自然，激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识回顾】
Part1: Module1-2重点短语集锦：
Module1: 1. 开会have a meeting 2. 写下来write down 3. 写作文write a composition
4. 一个世界奇迹a wonder of the world 5.一个叫…的报刊a magazine called…
6. 没什么可见 There was nothing to see. 7. 5分钟之后到那里 get there in 5 minutes.
8. 仔细观察它们 look carefully over them 9. 太黑什么也看不见 too dark to see anything
10. 自然世界的奇观之一 one of the wonders of the natural world
11. 在…的底端 at the bottom of … 12. 在…的边缘 on the edge of 13.到达顶部 reach the top
14.向另一端望去 look across to the other side 15. 消失在远方 disappear into distance
Module2: 1. 凭我记忆 as far as I remember. 2. 考虑做某事 think about doing
3.不再有校刊了not have a school magazine any more= have a school magazine no more
4. 有点儿难度 a bit/ a little/ kind of difficult
5. 受他的思想的影响be influenced by his thoughts
6. 像孔子一样作为伟大的思想家出名 be known as a great thinker like Confucius
7. 同意某人 agree with sb. 8. 去寻宝 go looking for treasure
9.在山洞里迷了路 get lost in a cave .
10.决定去参加他自己的葬礼decide to go to his own funeral
11. 看见他很惊讶 be surprised to see him 12.很高兴看见他活着 pleased to see him alive
13. 惧怕他 be afraid of him
14与成长中的孩子有关 be/have to do with children growing up
15. 变得更加成熟稳重 become more serious
16. 因做坏事受惩罚 be punished for bad behaviour
17. 谈论自由、社会规则 talk about freedom, social rules
Part2: Module1-2重点句子集锦
1.我仔细地看了看，但是天太黑了，什么也看不到.
I look carefully over them, but it was too dark to see anything.
2.我在世界自然奇观之一大峡谷的边缘上.
I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon, one of the wonders of the natural world.
3.如果你把世界上三座最高的建筑物叠加起来放到底部，仍然够不到顶.
If you put the three tallest buildings in the world at the bottom of the canyon, they still won’t reach the top.
4. 我向左向右看了看，在两侧大峡谷消失在远方.
I looked to my left and to my right, and on both sides the canyon disappeared into distance.
5. 他是一个活泼聪明的男孩子，并且他发现自己经历了很多惊心动魄的冒险.
He is a lively and clever young boy, and he finds himself in many exciting adventures.
6. 每个人看到他都很吃惊，但看到他或者都很高兴.
Everyone is surprised to see him but they are also pleased to see him alive.
7.故事的主题与成长以及变得更加成熟有关.
The themes of the stories are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious.
8.它描述了在美国的小城镇里陌生人是如何被看待的.
It describes how strangers are seen in small towns of America.
9.马克吐温在1876年写了这部小说，但是它现在仍然被全世界的人们所阅读和喜爱着.
Mark Twain wrote the story in 1876, but it’s still read and loved by people all over the world.
10.它被认为是美国文学史上最伟大的著作之一.
Today it’s thought to be one of the greatest books in American literature.
Part3: Module1-2重要知识点集锦
1.被动语态谓语动词的基本结构：be done
2. happen: 发生，等于______________. (1) 某人发生某事 sth happened to sb.
(2) 碰巧做某事 __________________.
3.through/ across/ past: through指的是从___________穿过，across指的是从_________穿过，而past指的是从旁边经过.例：穿过大门___________________, 穿过马路____________________.
4.too…to..: 意为________________， 可以与______________句式进行同义句转化.
例：I was too tired to walk. _______________________________________________.
5 .I saw that the ground fell away and down to a river.(同义句-----改为简单句)
I saw the ground _________ __________ and down to a river.
在这个句子中，see为__________动词，用____________和_____________两种用法，类似的感官动词还有_______________________________等.
6.有关look的几个短语：寻找______________ 小心_____________ 看____________
浏览________________ 查找(单词、号码)_________________________
7. not …any more: 表示“ 不再…”.可与“ no more” 转换。no more 在句中放于 be / 助动词/情态动词之后、实义动词之前。
例：我不会再相信你了. I will _________ believe you ______ _________.
I will believe you _________ __________.
8. a bit 表示“ 一点儿” 修饰动词、形容词、比较级，可以与a little 互换。
a little= a bit of, 可直接修饰不可数名词.
例： 我想喝点儿果汁。I would like to drink juice.
9. be known as... 表示“作为......知名/闻名". 等于be famous as. 联系：be famous for
如：(1)Weifang is _________________for kites. (2) Langlang is ______________a pianist.
【能力训练】
( ) 1. ---How far do they live
---_________I know, they live in the same town.
A. As long as B.As far as C.As well as D.As often as
( )2. _______this kind of question often ______in your class, Ann
A.does; ask B. is ;asked C.has; asked D.are; asked
( )3. Accidents ______here sometimes.
A.happen B. is happened C.happened D.is happening
( )4. --I want to teach in Tibet when I graduate from the college.
--Me, too. Teachers _____very much there.
A.need B.are needing C.are needed D.needed
( )5. He promised that he will ________make his teacher angry ________.
A.not; at all B. not; more and more C. not; more or less D.not; any more
( )6 . Personal computers _______ in 1976. it has changed the whole world.
A. has been invented B. are invented C. were invented D. invented
( )7. We were all _________ with the ______trip.
A. pleased, pleasant B. pleasant, pleased C. pleasing, pleased D. pleasant, pleased
( )8. We will have a field trip this afternoon. The news makes everyone ________.
A. excited B.frighted C.happily D. luckily
( )9. --Sorry , I can't work out this problem.
--Try again, please. it’s only _______difficult.
A. a bit B. a lot C. very D. much too
( )10.--Who was Harry Potter written ____ -- J.K.Rowling.
A.with B.for C.by D.to
( )11.---Excuse me, Look at the sign NO PHOTOS! ---Sorry, I it.
A don’t see B didn’t see C haven’t seen D won’t see
( )12. ---Where is Peter ----He’s in his room. He a book.
A reads B read C is reading D was reading
( )13. ---Why couldn’t you the correct spelling of the word
---Err…I hadn’t got a Chinese-English dictionary at hand.
A look for B look down C look up D look at
（ ）14. I _________to tell you I _______my homework at home this morning.
A. forgot; forgot B. forget ; leave C. left; forgot D. forgot; left
（ ）15. Hurry up! The play for ten minutes.
A began B has been on C has begun D had begun
二、单词的适当形式填空:
1.Kobe is ______________(know) as a great basketball player.
2.Now the computers __________________(use) widely in daily life.
3. I ______________(write) to you if I have time.
4. My mother _________________(cook) in the kitchen when I came back.
5. I’d like a _____________(month) article called Times.
6. Let’s hope our troubles ___________________(disappear) soon.
7.When he arrived, it ______________ (rain) .
8. _______ anyone __________（watch）television yesterday evening
9. ---________ you _______ our school magazine
--- Yes, it looks great! I ________ it just now. ( read )
10. The man _________ (call ) peter has ever been to the Grand Canyon.
11. If you _________(see) him tomorrow, please ask him if he__________(go) to work on the farm with us.
12. A lot of water_____________(waste) every year. It’s a serious problem.
三、完形填空
Mr. White is a member of his office. He is __1____and can easily deal with all kinds of matters. So he is always paid more than his workmates. Of course he is often ____2_____and has no time to do the housework. His wife __3___him well and does all at home. ___4___their daughter was hurt in a traffic accident last month and had to be ___5___. Mrs.white had to look after her there and she can’t go home. Mr. White often eats something in the restaurant. As he ___6___did some cleaning, the room were all disorderly(凌乱不堪的).
Yesterday morning, before Mr. White got up, the telephone ___7____. He sat up to answer it. His friend told him to __7____an important telephone number down. But he could find neither a pen nor a piece of paper. He found there was much dust(灰尘) on the table and wrote the number on it. But soon he forgot it and went to work. Two hours later ___9___came back and looked for her daughter. her husband came in while she was cleaning the table. He couldn’t____10___the number on the table and called out angrily. “ who let you clean the table ”
（ ） 1. A.important B.strong C.good D.bad
（ ） 2. A.busy B.quiet C.lazy D.happy
（ ） 3. A.sees B.knows C.misses D.takes care of
（ ） 4. A.Well B.Once C.What’s more D.Bad luck
（ ） 5. A. in hospital B.outside C.in bed D.in times
（ ） 6. A. not B.never C.almost D.often
（ ） 7. A.shouted B.spoke C.rang D.called
（ ） 8. A.write B.remember C.understand D.use
（ ） 9. A.he B.his friend C. his wife D.his daughter
（ ） 10. A.find out B. listen to C. see D. write
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习八下Module9-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module9-10重点短语集锦：
Module9重点短语:
1.不错 Not bad 2.擅长于 be good at 3.出现，发生 come up 4.期待look forward to 5.错过了最后的排练 miss the final practice 6.目的是 so that 7.独自on one’s own 8.一个借口an excuse 9.避免和某人的矛盾 avoid problems with sb 10.尽力去做某事 try to do sth 11.她真勇敢. It was very brave of her12.一个善解人意的想法 a kind thought 13.演奏这首音乐 play the music14.请老师重写最后的舞曲ask their teacher to rewrite the final dance music 15.我打赌 I bet … 16.真正的英雄 a real hero17. one of China’s famous heroes 中国最著名的英雄18.give one’s life to 献身于19.成为一名医生 become a doctor 20. 照顾,照看 look after=take care of 21.受伤的士兵 injured soldiers 22. 在战争中 in the war 23.invent new treatments 发明新的治疗方式 24.open hospitals 开办医院25.give treatment to local people and soldiers 给当地人民和士兵提供治疗26.without stopping to rest 不停下来休息 27.perform operations 做手术28.in spite of 尽管 29.during an operation 在手术中30.in the end 在最后31.使他成为英雄 make him a hero
Module10重点短语：
1.航班号flight number 2. 它在那儿There it is 3. 想同你一起去would like to go with you 4. 我也是so would I 5. 乘火车去巴黎take the/a train to Paris 6. 所有其它的动物the other animals7.去参加一个大型户外流行音乐会go to a big outdoor pop concert 8．担心..be afraid that.. 9.飞机会出故障something would go wrong with the plane10 别傻了。 Don’t be silly. 11. 同你们所有人呆在这儿stay here with you all12. 前往伦敦航班的乘客passengers for flight to London13 保持联系stay in touch (with sb) 14. 一路平安Have a safe trip15.飞往fly to../take a/the plane to/go to..by plane 16. 因公出差 go away on business 17. 不得不独自呆在家里have to stay at home 18. 和…一样简单 as easy as 19. 一个14岁的女孩a 14-year–old girl =a girl of 14 years old 20. 对做饭知之甚少know little about cooking 21. 用…填满fill …with 22. 知道做什么 know what to do 23. 怎样照顾我们自己how to look after ourselves24. 一些重要的事情something important 25. 把汤熬糊 burn the soup26. 基本的生活技能basic life skills 27. 尤其重要especially important28. 得到足够的锻炼 get enough practice 29. 学会做饭 learn to cook
30．有写作业的时间 have time for their homework 31. 上大学go to college32. 做一些简单的饭菜 cook some simple dishes 33. 在他看来in his opinion 34. 太多依赖父母 depend too much on their parents 35.打扫房间tidy up your room36. 穿着得体dress oneself properly 37.一个完美的假日a perfect holiday
38.不得不单独待在家里have to stay at home alone 39 你的父母在身边 your parents are around 40．我的很多同学many of my classmates 41比如做饭和洗衣服such as cooking and washing clothes
Part2: Module9-10基础知识集锦
【M9基础知识】
1.语法聚焦：状语从句
（一）because 引导的原因状语从句与so 引导的结果状语从句可以互换：
注：because从句如果放于句首应该与主句以逗号隔开，放于句末则不用。此外，because和 so 不能同时出现在同一个句子中。
（二）so that 引导的目的状语从句与so引导的结果状语从句区别：
注：so that引导的目的状语从句中时态表示未来、可能性，常用could，will, would, can 等词，而 so 引导的结果状语从句常表示动作已经发生。
（三）so…that...与such…that….引导的结果状语从句的区别：
1). so + adj./adv. + that…. 2). such + (a/an)+adj. +n. +that
★so that 常可以用too…to或enough to 同义句转化。
2). such 是形容词，修饰名词或名词词组，so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many，few，much， little连用，形成固定搭配。
Ex:用so/such 填空： ①_____ much/little money; ②______ nice a flower;
③_____ a fool; ④_______a nice flower; ⑤______ many/ few flowers;
⑥_____a lot of people ⑦______ bad weather; ⑧_______nice flowers
2. on one’s own “独自，自己，单独地”，相当于by oneself
拓展： owner n.“主人，拥有者” own adj.自己的 own v.“拥有”
3.avoid 作动词，意为“避免、躲开”，后接v-doing形式、名词、代词作宾语。
4. It was very brave of her. brave adj.勇敢的 bravely adv. 勇敢地
★ It is + adj. + for (of) sb. to do sth. 当形容词修饰人的性格特征的时用of; 如：kind；clever；
generous(慷慨的); brave; gentle（温柔的）; honest; friendly; stupid； 当形容词修饰物的特征时用for,
如：easy，interesting, difficult, hard,
5. 用real/really填空：________good; a _______hero; _______ famous
6. one of + the 形容词的最高级+名词复数最…之一
7. give one’s life to sth. / doing sth. 献身，捐躯 注意: to 为介词，后跟动名词
【拓展】：look forward to doing 期待做某事 be/ get used to doing 习惯于做某事
8.hard adj.困难的----同义词 difficult adv.努力地---- work hard / study hard
hardly adv.几乎不(表否定)【拓展】：never，seldom, few, little, rarely, no, nothing, nobody…
Ex:1). He can _________(hard) swim. 2). He studies _________(hard) than last year.
3). It’s very __________(hard) for us to translate the text.
9. in spite of 尽管，后跟名词，代词，动名词ing ; although（though）后加句子
都不与but 连用 Ex: 1) Although she cut her hand,she went on studying. 同义句转化
=>She went on studying in spite of cutting her hand.
10. end v. 结束，终止 n. ending结局; 结尾
in the end 最后，终于 == at last / finally; at the end of .. 在…末尾
Ex: 1) At the end of the road, there is a hosptal.
2) In the end/ At last / Finally， he went to the college.
11. have to 不得不 have to do sth 否定形式：don’t have to do
12 . invent 动词：发明，创造; n. 发明者_________; n. 发明，创造___________
【M10基础知识】
1.would 用法 1). 表示想象,推测或可能，would do
2). would like to do sth. == I want to do sth. 想做…
2. so +助动词+ 主语 表示：..也是, 助动词根据前文变化，如do/does/did /am/is /are , can /could。
Tom likes playing table tennis. So he does.(确实如此).
I can play the violin. So can she. (她也会)
There is nothing wrong with it.== Nothing is wrong with it. ==Nothing goes wrong with it.
go wrong with 出故障， go 根据人称，时态而变化
1). Something _________________(出故障) with our TV yesterday.
2). Something is wrong with your watch. 同义句= Something _______ _______ ________ your watch.
4. stay in touch (with) == keep in touch (with) 和…保持联系 lose touch with 和..失去联系
5. take…to ==go to…by…. 乘…去… I will ______ ______ plane ______ Paris.
== I will ______ ______Paris ______plane. == I will ______ ______Paris.
6. as …as 像…一样 中间是形容词或副词的原级。 not so (as) ….as 表示不如、不及
Tom 跑的跟Jim 一样快。 Tom runs Jim.
Tom不如Jim 跑的快。 Tom run Jim.
7. I can fill an empty stomach with tomato
拓展：be full of …装满了… The bottle is full of water初三一轮复习七上Module7-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-10重点短语集锦：
Module 7
have Chinese 上语文课2.have an English lesson 上英语课3.What are your lessons today 你今天上什么课？4.at eight o’clock 在八点5.at half past ten 在十点半6.talk about one’s homework 谈论某人的作业7.What about you 你呢？/你怎么样啊？8.get up 起床9.have breakfast / lunch / dinner 吃早餐/午饭/晚饭10.go to school 上学11.have a break 休息12.talk with my friends 与我的朋友交谈/聊天13.have meat and rice 吃肉和米饭14.go home 回家15.get home到家16.finish school 放学17.study science / maths 学习科学/数学
Module 8
1.send him a card 送他一张卡片=send a card to him2.make him a cake 做一个蛋糕给他=make a cake for him3.give her a game 送一个游戏给她=give a game to her4.have a birthday party 举行生日晚会5.watch football 看足球比赛 =watch a football match6.go to one’s party 去某人的晚会7.a lot of 大量，很多 =lots of8.go to concerts 去听音乐会9.in / from the USA在/来自美国10.on television 通过电视11.CDs by Twins Twins的CD12.a box of chocolates 一盒巧克力13.a pair of trainers 一双软运动鞋14.a pair of jeans 一条牛仔裤15.in one’s home 在某人的家里16.at home 在家17.at once 马上，立即18.give flowers as presents 送花作为礼物
Module 9
Welcome to Beijing Zoo 欢迎到北京动物园 2.sixteen thousand 一万六千 3.in / from the Arctic 在/来自北极4.There she is. 她在那里。 5.in Europe / Africa / Asia 在欧洲/非洲/亚洲
be European / African / Asian是欧洲的/非洲的/亚洲的;是欧洲人/非洲人/亚洲人
7.European wolves欧洲的狼8.African monkeys 非洲的猴子9.in the wild 在野外in the forest 在森林in the jungle 在热带雨林in the desert 在沙漠in (the) grassland 在草原10.around the world 全世界，世界各地=all around the world=all over the world 11.for twelve hours 十二个小时 12.15 kilos of bamboo 15公斤竹子13.stay healthy 保持健康
Module 10
1.switch on the computer 开电脑 2.open a new document打开新文档 3.write a name for the document 为文档写个名字 4.download music from the Internet 从网上下载音乐 5.go online 上网6.make travel plans 做旅游计划 7.on the Internet 在互联网上 8.at the weekend 周末9.visit a website 浏览网页，访问网站 10.use my laptop for my lessons 用笔记本电脑备课//use the Internet to do their homework 用互联网来做作业 11.connect to the Internet 连接到互联网//connect the monitor to the computer 把显示器连接到主机 12.save a document 保存文档 13.print a document 打印文档 14.check the timetable 核对时间表 15.at work 在工作(at school 在学校at home 在家at break 休息时)
Part2: Module7-10基础知识集锦：
1.时间表达法在英语中表达时间可用直接表达法和间接表达法。
1).直接表达法 ①表达整点时间可用“基数词+o'clock”。其中o'clock 没有复数形式，也可省略。 one o'clock 1点钟 seven o'clock 七点钟
②表达非整点时间可用“钟点+分钟”两个基数词连用，译为“几点几分”; eight five 8点5分
2).间接表达法 ①如果分钟数不超过30，可用“分钟+past+钟点”表达。其中past是介词，意为“超过”。 ten past six 6点10分 eighteen past eight 8点18分
②如果分钟数超过30，可用“（60-原分钟数）+ to +(原钟点数+1)”表达。其中to是介词，意为“差”，表示“还差多少分钟到下一个整点”。two to two1点50 fifteen to seven 6点45分
Ps:当分钟数是15时，可用a quarter 代替，意为“一刻钟”。当分钟数是30时，可用half代替，意为“半点”。 【注意】如果表示时间的名词被this, that, tomorrow 或 yesterday修饰，它们的前面不需要用任何介词。
【拓展】at 还可以用at night(在晚上)，at last(最后), at weekends(在周末), at noon(在中午)
2.have 1) v. 吃 have breakfast/have lunch/have supper
2)“have+ a + 动词意义的名词” 表示短暂的动作。have a look/have a drink/have a walk
3.频度副词1).常见的频度副词有以下这些：always（总是）usually（通常）often（常常，经常） sometimes（有时候） never（从不, 是用来表示动作频率的，但程度上有别。一般说来可按频率大小排列：always＞usually＞often＞sometimes＞seldom（很少）＞hardly (几乎不)＞never（从不）
2).频度副词的位置：在be动词之后，第一个助动词或情态动词之后， 在行为动词之前。
对这些频度副词提问时，用how often。
【拓展】 sometime,sometimes,some time与some times
1).sometime是时间副词，指不确定的将来或过去某一点时间（某时候或任何时候），不指一段时间。2).sometimes是频度副词，指“有时”、“不时”的意思（=at times）。3).some time是名词词组，指一段时间（一些时间或若干时间）。4).some times指“几次”。
4. a pair of一对，一双 a pair of jeans //a pair of glasses注：This pair of shoes___is__ ( be) cheap.
5. thousand 意为“一千”，用法如下： 1.当前面有数词以及many，several等词修饰时，用单数形式，后面直接跟复数名词。如： two hundred students 200名学生 several thousand workers 几千工人2.当这词前面没有数词而后面有of 时，则一定要用复数形式，表示“数以千计，成千上万”，笼统的数目概念。如： thousands of dollars 数千美元 //hundred（百), million（百万）
6序数词：　序数词是指表示顺序的数词。(根据课本P127)
总结：①序数词一般由基数词在词尾加th构成。
②以ty结尾的基数词变为序数词时，要先把y变为ie，再加th。
③20以上的十位或百位的基数词，只将其个位上的基数词变为序数词就可以了。
注意：序数词前常用定冠词the或形容词性物主代词。
注：由基数词变序数词口诀：一，二，三，要全变，其余把th加后边．八减t，九去e，字母f代ve，ty变成tie。注释：one→first, two→second, three→third four→fourth six →sixth eight→eighth, nine→ninth, twelve→twelfth, twenty→twentieth
7. 常用方位介词的用法
1).on 表示“在……的上面”，通常只一个物体在另一个物体的上面，两者之间有接触。
2).in 表示“在……的里面”3).Under 表示“在……的下面”
4).behind 表示“在……的后面”5.next to 表示“紧挨着，在……的旁边”
8.send 发送 He sends me an email every day.他每天给我发封电子邮件。
Send for the doctor, please.请派人去请医生来。
My boss sends me to meet the foreigner. 我的老板派我去见外宾。
“send for”意思为________________send sb. to do sth.意思为______________________
【复习提升】
一、单项选择
( )1. There are five _________ story books on the bookshelf.
A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of
( )2. I met her ____a cold winter morning. A. on B. in C. at D. of
( )3. This pair of trainers _______to Mary. A. belong B. belongs C. is belong D. are belong
( )4. They have supper ____ half past six. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )5. He was born _______ March 4, 1997. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )6. The glasses _____ broken by Tom yesterday. A.was B. were C. is D. are
( )7. He lives on _____floor. A. the third B.three C.thirds D. a thrid
( )8. ____visitors come to China every year.
A. Thousands of B. Ten thousands C. Ten thousand of D. Thousand of
( )9. Don’t drop it. Please try _____ time. A. the second B. second C. two D. a second
( )10. Would you like some coffee or tea ---- _______. Water is ok.
A. Both B. Either C. Neither D. All
( )11. Do you know _____man in blue --Yes, he’s a professor( 教授) of____university.
A. the , an B. a, a C. /, the D. the, a
( )12. It’s ___nice day, isnt’ it --Yes, what ____fine weather! A. a, a B .the, the C. a, / D. the, /
( )13. How many students are there in the classroom --______. They are all in the lab.
A. Some B. All C. Neither D. None
( )14. What do you like, tea or coffee -- _________. I don’t mind.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. All
( )15. How many ____are there in your family A. bus B. car C. bike D. people
( )16. It’s a fine day today. How about _____ ---Sounds great.
A. go hiking B. go to hike C. going hiking D. to go to hike
( )17. Would you like to play basketball with us this afternoon
-- __________, but I have a lot of homework to do.
A. I’d love to B. I’m afraid not C. Sounds good. D. No problem
( )18. How far is your home from here --It’s about two______drive. A. hour’s B. hours C. hours’ D. hour
( )19. He is ____ unusual boy. A. a B.an C. /
( )20. He will go to America ____ next month.A. sometimes B. some times C. sometime D. some time
二、.单词适当形式填空
1. This pair of glasses ______________(belong) to Tom. And those glasses___________(be)John’s.
2. Today is my friend Jim’s __________(twelve) birthday and it is my mother’s __________(forty) birthday.
3. There _______(be) a pen and some books on the desk.
4. There are two _________(wolf) , three_________(mouse) and two__________(tomato) in the picture.
5. The pen is my friend’s. And _________(her) is on her desk. ______(my) is in my pencil box.
6. The rain______________(last) for two days. 7. Don’t make the childrn __________(talk) there.
8. Has he finished ____________(draw) the horse
9. There are some _______________(different) between Lucy and Liy, although they are twins.
10. Do the ___________(India) speak English as their first language
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
The story happened during the Second World War. A 70-year-old man lived in a small town of Germany. His
three sons all worked in the same factory where he 1 (work). After the war had begun, all his sons 2
(make) to join the army and they all died in the fights.
The old man was very sad. In the days that 3 (follow), he didn’t have enough food and was often hungry. And nobody helped him and he didn’t know how to go on 4 (live). It was becoming colder and colder. 5 (find) a way out, he had to beg from door to door. He had been to a lot of places and knew a lot.
Once he came to a village, but the villagers were all poor and couldn’t give him anything. He was too hungry 6 (go) to another village. Suddenly he saw a policeman 7 (stand) in the street and an idea came to his mind. He then shouted out, “Hitler is a pig!”
As he hoped, the old man was now enjoying some bread and a cup of hot tea 8 (give) by the policeman. “Don’t say so in our village, sir!” the policeman said after a while, “I’m sorry, sir, ” said the old man, “I 9 (not say )that again. I didn’t know it 10 (be) Hitler’s hometown.” “No, no, sir,” the policeman said in a hurry, “It’s a pig’s hometown.”初三一轮复习八上Module3-4
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module3重点短语:
你在干什么？What are you up to 2. 宇宙空间站模型 the model of the space station
3 太空旅行space travel 4. 往返go there and back 5. 出差go...on business
6. 给某人看某物show sth to sb 7. 带回某物 bring sth back 8. 最新消息the latest news
9数百万millions of 10. 绕太阳转go around the sun 11. 其他七颗行星seven other planets
12.太阳系the solar system 13.一个有空气的环境an environment with air
14.在太空中in space 15.在宇宙中in the universe
16.送给某人某物send sth. to sb./send sb. Sth 17.……中一个也没有none of
Module4重点短语：
1.校长 head teacher 2.到达 arrive in/at 3.下个月next month 4. 与某人相处融洽get on well with 5. 相同的事情 the same things 7.一门外国语言 a foreign language 8. 听说hear about/hear of
9. 事实上 in fact 10. 希望小学Hope School 11.希望工程 Project Hope
12. 全中国all over around China 13.告诉我更多tell me more 14. 一个八岁大的孩子an eight-year-old boy 15. 辍学退学 drop out of school 16.停止干某事stop doing
17. 照顾照料look after/take care of 18.受教育get an education 19.在…的帮助下 with the help of 20.筹钱raise money 21.付钱pay for 22. 在农村 in the countryside 23.在国内外in China and abroad 24. 因为，由于because of 25.在过去的15年里in the last/past 15 years
Part2: Module3-4基础知识集锦
Module3 1.现在完成时态的意义：（1）表示过去发生的动作对现在造成的影响
例如： I have seen the film, so I don’t want to see it again.
因为我看过这部电影，所以我不想再看了。
（2）表示到目前为止曾经干过或没干过的事情。例如：
I have never visited the USA.我从未参观过美国。
Have you ever been to Shanghai 你曾去过上海吗？
（3）表示刚刚做完某事或已经做完某事。
I have just heard the news.我刚刚听到这个消息。
(4) 现在完成时常见的标志词：already; yet; just; never; ever; before
(5)现在完成时态的结构：have/ has+ done
2. already & yet的用法区别： (1）already 和yet通常用在现在完成时态中。
(2）already 用于肯定句；否定句和一般疑问句中用yet, 表示“还，仍然”。
3. just & just now用法区别： 时间副词just用于现在完成时，表示刚刚做完某事；just now意思为刚才，用于一般过去时。
4. alone & lonely用法区别： With so many stars in the universe, are we alone, or is there life out there in space 宇宙中有这么多恒星，我们是孤独的吗？太空中还有其他的生命吗？
（1）He is alone at home. 他独自在家
（2）He lives alone, but he doesn't feel lonely.她独自住着，但并不感到孤独。
注意：alone表“单独、独自一人”，不含感彩；lonely指人孤独寂寞，有浓厚的伤感色彩。
5. prefer“更喜爱”
（1）Which do you prefer, tea or coffee 茶和咖啡你更喜欢什么？
（2）I prefer reading books to watching TV. 比起看电视来，我更喜欢读书。
（3）I prefer to stay at home rather than go to the cinema. 我宁愿呆在家里，而不愿去看电影。
思考：总结短语：与……相比，更喜欢…… prefer...to.....
与……相比, 更喜欢做……prefer doing... to doing..
与……相比, 更喜欢做…… prefer to do... rather than do …
6. no one & none of
（1）No one likes a person with bad manners. 没有人喜欢不讲礼貌的人。
（2）None of us have /has heard of the news. 我们中没有人听说过这个消息。
（3）--How many students are there in the classroom？ 教室里有多少个学生？
--None. 一个也没有。
（4）---Who is in the classroom 谁在教室里？ ---No one.没有人。
思考：（1）no one 只指人，不指物，不能和of短语连用.
（2）none既可指人，又可指物，常和of短语连用。None 的反义词是all.
Module4
1.have been to 和have gone to的区别:
have been to 表示“去过某地”// have gone to 表示“到某地去了”
2. since和for的现在完成时：
表示行为或者状态从过去一直持续到现在时，需要用现在完成时表达，并且要加上for 或since引导的表示一段时间的时间状语。
注意：（1）since和for引导表示一段时间的时间状语，但是有区别的：for后接一段时间，而since后面接时间点或者一个句子，句子的时态是一般过去时。
（2）针对since和for引导的时间提问时，用到的特殊疑问词是How long。
（3）现在完成时常用的时间状语：since+时间点/句子；for+一段时间；so far；in the last/past few years; recently
3. 瞬间动词（也叫点动词或终止性动词）不能与表示一段时间的时间状语（如for短语、since短语）连用，若要和一段时间连用，就要进行非延续性动词和延续性动词的转化。牢记：
常见的瞬间动词可以转换成延续动词的词有如下一些：
die—be dead leave/go—be away (from) come/go back—be back buy—have borrow—keep make friends—be friends open—be open fall asleep—be asleep marry—be married begin/start—be on finish—be over get ready—be ready
lose—be missing put on—have on arrive/get to/reach/come—be in/be at/stay
join (the party)—be a (party) member/ be in (the party)
注意：如果出现时间段时，同时又要保留非延续性动词，则可以用“It is + 时间 + since + 句子 （V用过去式）” 句型改写。
4.现在完成时与一般过去时的区别
现在完成时与一般过去时都表示在过去的动作，但现在完成时强调这一动作与现在的关系，
如对现在产生的结果、影响等。而一般过去时表示过去的事实，不表示和现在的关系。所以，表
示过去固定的时间的状语只能与一般过去时连用，而不能与现在完成时连用。比较：
I have already finished my homework. I finished it an hour ago.
5. hear about/ hear of/ hear from
Hear about / hear of 听说 hear from 收到某人的来信
翻译：1）我从来没有听说过他。I have never heard of him.
2）上周，我收到了他的来信。Last week, I heard from him.
6. because/because of 因为
两者意思都是“因为”，但是有区别的，because of后面跟名词或者代词，而because后面则是跟一个句子,在一些句子中，两者是可以互换的。
7. stop to do\stop doing
1）停止做某事stop doing sth 2)停下来做某事stop to do sth初三一轮复习七下Module7-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M7-10中出现的journey等单词、be born等短语，并灵活运用一般过去时。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过对英美国家旅游和交通的了解，培养跨文化交际意识；享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M7-10词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M7-10重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
1. What time _________ you _________ home last Friday
A. did , get to B. did , get C. do, got D. are ,getting
2. Who cooked supper today I ___________. A. did B. does C. was D. is
3. Do you think everyone enjoys _________ soccer
A. play B. do C. playing D. plays
4. Did Tom help his parents do the housework at home ___________________.
A. Yes , he does B. No , he wasn’t C. Yes , he was D. No ,he didn’t
5. Did you _________ a movie yesterday evening
A. watched B. see C. read D. look at
6. Tom _______ watch TV after supper __________ last night
A. wasn’t , on B. didn’t , on C. doesn’t , / D. didn’t , /
7. He _________ but could not ________anything .
A. listen , hear B. heard , listen C. listened , hear D. listened , heard
8. --______________ --He went to the library .
A. Where did he go B. Where did he live C. How was he D. Did he go to the library
9. John didn’t go to school ________he was ill .
A. because B. so C. but D. and
10. Betty is really _________ . She is never angry with others .
A. tall B. clever C. lucky D. friendly
11. What ______ you do this Sunday if it ______
A. do…will rain B. will…rain C. do…rains D. will…rains
12. Don’t ______ his mistake, you’d better help him.
A. laugh B. laugh to C. laugh at D. laugh with
13. I met a friend of mine when I _____ in the park.
A. walk B. walked C. was walking D. walks
14. ______ you help your mother clean the house last night
A. Do B. Does C. Are D. Did
15. She ______ the basketball last Sunday.
A. play B. playing C. played D. plays
16. She______ on the light at 6 o’clock yesterday.
A. turns B. turning C. turn D. turned
17. I came quite early, so I______ at the head of the queue.
A. is B. am C. was D. were
18. Whose parent ______go to America tomorrow
A. is B. will C. can D. don’t
19. The old woman looks worried. She is ______ something.
A. looking at B. finding C. waiting for D. looking for
20. ______day we have today!
A. What fine B. What a fine C. How fine D. How fine a
二、单词的适当形式填空
1 He writes ________(careful) of us three. 2 ________ (million) of students are studying Chinese.
3 Going by bus is the _____(good) way to go to work.
4 It’s the best way for us __________(ride) a bike to school.
5 She is ____(tall) than any other girl in his class.
6．Tom is one of the _______ ( interesting) _________ (boy) in the class.
7. They started＿＿＿(play) basketball right now.
8. ______he_______(play) games every Saturday evening 9. Look! They__________ (lie)in the sun.
10. It took us an hour __________ ( play)games on our computer every day .
11. A panda__________ (have) four legs.　　　 12. His parents usually__________ (go)to work by bus.
13. Would you like__________ (stay)with us 　 14.__________(print)the document for me, please.
15. He decided＿＿＿＿＿(work) hard for the test just now.　
16.My aunt__________ (have)a party yesterday.　
三、拓展训练（C层选做）阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。
Last month, Tony _____________ (have) a very busy weekend .On Saturday morning, He ___________(clean) his room. In the afternoon, he __________ (do) his homework . It _______(be) very easy , so it ____________(take) him only half an hour ,In the evening ,he ____________ (visit) his friends ,He ____________(have) a good supper that evening .On Sunday morning ,he ___________(get) up very late .Then he __________(read) a book about Chinese history .In the afternoon ,he ___________(go) to see an interesting movie .


17
1、害羞时，大多数人脸发红，说话吞吞吐吐(结巴)
2、If shyness doesn’t stop you from doing what you want to do.
keep the things that you want to do
prevent
3、more, talk
4、There’s nothing for you be afraid of
5、首句
初三一轮复习七下Module4-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M4-6中出现的life等单词、no one等短语，并灵活运用形容词、副词的比较级。。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过对美好未来的憧憬，培养乐观向上的精神；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M4-6词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M4-6重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15______ long. And it’s a ______ river.
A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old
C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million ____in Hong Kong.
A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a _______ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ____ the east coast ______ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think _____ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu ______ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. is C. has D. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. with B. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ______ a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that city A. it B. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister____the song together now A. sing B. singing C. are singing D. is singing
( )18.Football is than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __________, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__________the same mistake again. A. make B. is make C. makes D. is made
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher__________ (clear). 2. About 200 people __________ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s ________________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother _______ (write) a letter to my sister and I _________ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.初三一轮复习八上Module1—2
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M1-2中出现的send等单词、enjoy yourself等短语，并灵活运用四种基本时态。
2.自主学习，小组合作，解决疑难，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.回忆过去，憧憬未来；激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
使用说明：1、20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方。
2、20分钟独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module1-2重点短语集锦：
Module1重点短语:
1.welcome back欢迎回来 2.a new term一个新学期 3. give sb advice给某人建议 4.write down写下
5.speak English in class在课堂上说英语 6. a pen friend一个笔友 7. check your vocabulary notebook查看你的词汇笔记本 8.read a newspaper in English读英文报纸 9. 尽力做某事try to do10. each other彼此11. do some concerts开音乐会12. help sb with帮助某人做某事13.how to learn English怎样学英语14.find out找出15.real English纯正英语16. ask for advice寻求建议17.improve your English提高你的英语水平18.three basic questions三个基本问题19. all the time一直20.take a long time花费很长时间21.the meaning of the new words新单词的意思22.enjoy oneself过的快乐23.a foreign teacher一个外教24.start a conversation开始一段谈话25. take a deep breath深呼吸26.everything you see你看到的每件事27.a great way to learn English一个学英语很棒的方法28.the best piece of advice最好的一条建议29.make a list of制作一个清单30.get better变得更好31.remember to do sth.记得做某事32.forget to do sth.忘记做某事 33. be good at 擅长 34. look for 寻找 35. make friends交朋友 36.show sb around 带领某人参观
Module2重点短语：
1.把某物发送给某人(两种)send sb. sth./send sth. to sb. 2.环游全世界travel around the world
3.邀请某人去干某事invite sb. to do sth. 4.和某人待在一起stay with sb.5. ……的价格the price of
6.你猜怎么着？Guess what 7.飞机起飞take off 8. 一等奖 the first prize 9.你觉得怎么样？What do you reckon 10. 参加一项比赛enter a competition 11.一张去美国的飞机票a ticket to the USA 12.一次美妙的经历 a fantastic experience 13.全中国 all over China 14.西餐western food 15.开音乐会give concerts 16.卖光sell out 17.在…的末尾. at the end of 18.在她旁边的座位上in the seat beside her 19.梦想成真come true 20.你梦寐以求的假期the holiday of your dreams 21.在一个音乐会上 in a concerts 22.石头动物 stone animals 23.看京剧see Beijing Opera 24.吃烤鸭 eat roast duck 25.故宫the Palace Museum 26.为父母做饭 cook dinner for your parents 27.从那以后 since then 28.主题公园 theme park 29.land in London 在伦敦降落
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦
Module1
1. Why don’t you write it down？= Why not write it down？ Why not + 动词原形。
2. How/What about+名词/代词/动名词？What about listening to the radio？
3. It’s a good idea to do sth .干什么事情是个好主意。
4. help sb with sth 在某一方面帮助某人 help sb( to) do sth 帮助某人干某事
5. try to do sth.尽力干某事 try not to do sth 尽力不干某事
6. advice 不可数名词 a piece of advice two pieces of advice
give sb advice 给某人建议 ask for advice 征求建议 advise sb. to do sth. 建议某人干某事
7.remember to do sth.记住去做…事(还没做) remember doing sth. 记得做过…事(已做过)
forget to do sth.忘记该做某事(还未做) forget doing sth. 忘记做过某事(已做)
8. enjoy v. 享受:
①喜欢做某事：enjoy doing sth; ②过得愉快:enjoy oneself
Module2
1. take off 起飞(与land降落相对)；脱下（衣服，鞋子等）
He took off form Nanjing Airport and landed in Beijing.昨天他从南京机场起飞抵达北京。
He took off his old T-shirt. 他脱下他的旧T恤衫。
2. kind n.种类 adj.善良的；友好的；和蔼的
a kind of…一种 all kinds of…各种各样的 kind of 有点；稍微
3. sell out卖光；售完 sell sth. to sb. = sell sb. sth 把某物卖给某人
4. more than = over 超过；多余no more than =only仅仅，不过 not more than 不多于；不超过
5. million前由具体的数字时，只能用单数，如400 million 四亿
如果million前无具体数字，常用millions of, 表示“数以百万的”
类似用法的词：hundred, thousand, billion.
6.look,sound, smell, taste, feel这五个动词称为感官系动词，后面接形容词作表语，说明主语所处的状态。其意思分别为"看/听/闻/尝/摸起来…"。
7. have\has been to；have \has gone to
have\has been to意为“曾经去过”，并且已经回来了，强调去过或没去过，着重指到目前为止的一个结果；have \has gone to意为“到…去了”，还没有回来着重指谈论的对象不在说话人所在地。
8. in the end/ at the end of
at the end表示“在…的末尾；在…的尽头”， 既可指时间或空间，也可指某项活动及事情的末尾，后常与of连用；in the end表示“最后，终于”，与finally和at last相似，后无介词。
9. another/ the other. the other和another均表示“另一个”，其中the other表示两个中的另一个，表示特指；another表示三个或三个以上中的另一个，表示泛指。
Part3：我的困难疑惑：
【巩固提升】
I. 单项选择
( )1. ---Sorry, sir, I must leave for the airport. The plane will _____ off at 7:30.---OK. You can go first.
A. take B. set C. put D. get
( )2. ---_____ to Ji’nan ---Yes. And she’ll be back next week.
A. Has she been B. Did she go C. Has she gone D. Is she going
( )3. ---_____ to the United States ---No, never, but I went to Canada a few days ago.
A. Have you been B. Have you gone C. Did you go D. Will you go
( )4. The English song sounds _____. I like it very much.
A. well B. bad C. badly D. beautiful
( )5. In our city, _______ middle school students want to work as a teacher in the future.
A. thousand B. thousand of C. thousands of D. two thousand of
( ) 6. We usually enjoy _______ in summer holidays.
A. ourselves B. myself C. me D. mine
( ) 7. It’s too early. Why ______ a rest with us
A. not have B. not having C. not to have D. didn’t have
( ) 8. -_______ you _______ your composition yet
A .Do；write B. Have；write C. Have; wrote D. Have; written
( ) 9. ---- ____ Tom ____ his homework ---- Yes, he did.
A. Did; finish B. Have; finished C. Has; finished D. is; finishing
( ) 10. Oh, the sweater is a little big for me. Show me ____ one, please.
A. another B. others C. other D. the others
( ) 11. Mr Smith is a good driver. He has had three years’____ in driving.
A. experiences B. experience C. advice D. messages
( ) 12. She’s ____ New York twice, but I’ve never ____ there
A. been to; gone to B. gone to; gone C. been to; been to D. been to; been
( ) 13. Mike sits ____ me in the classroom.
A. next B. close C. between D. besides
( ) 14. If you win the competition, you will get a ____ for it.
A. price B. prize C. dream D. passenger
( ) 15. ---- Why don’t we enter the competition ---- ____ !
A. No, thanks B. Enjoy yourself C. That’s right D. It sounds brilliant
II.用所给单词的适当形式填空。
1.It’s a good idea _______ （watch）English films.
2.---It’s Sunday tomorrow. What ______ we _____ (do) ---How about ________ (go) fishing
3.Sally ________(walk) to school this morning. She usually _______ (take) a bus to school.
4--Where is Tony, Daming ---Over there, he ________ (help) Miss Li _______ (hand) out learning papers.
5.You should ___________(not read) in the sun.
6.As we all know, light (travel) faster than sound.
7. (take) a bus is much faster than walking.
8.Quiet! The students (have) an English class.
9. ---_______ you ever ________ (see) the film ---Yes, I have. I ________ it last Sunday.
---_______you __________ (finish) your homework ---No, I ____________(do) it now.
11.—_______it already_______ (land) on Mars
12.I won’t go to Mount Emei because I _______(be) there twice.
13. Nie Er is one of the greatest Chinese________ (music).
14. He’s so _________ (fun) that he always makes us happy.
15.________she__________ (write) a letter to her grandma yet
16.My________（old）brother is ________(old) than I.
17. My grandma has___________ (die) for nearly 7 years.
18. I can’t fall asleep because it’s too________ (noise) here.
19. She__________never________ (speak) to a foreigners.
20. He spends a lot of time ________ (read) it every day.
III.完形填空
A 14-year-old boy from the USA was described as a hero yesterday after he saved the life of a woman in another country．
Dean Bluey from Dallas，Texas，was a school boy who has much 31 in computer．One day，he 32 an email to a friend on the Internet．Suddenly he received a message saying “Help! Pain! Help!”．"The message was from Finland， 33 kilometers away from America．
“I didn't know 34 I should do，”Dean said to a reporter afterwards．“It was really difficult to tell if the message was real．”So Dean did nothing at first． 35 the message kept coming．
“By then it was easy to see that someone was in trouble,” Dean explained. He 36 and discovered that the sender was a student called Tarja, who was alone in a university library. She was ill. What was 37 , there was no phone around her. Her only way of communicating with the world was by email. Dean got in touch 38 the police immediately. And they realized that the situation was quite serious. They called the police in Finland. Then an ambulance rushed to the library. 39 , she was still alive and was sent to the hospital quickly.
“I'm glad she's OK,” Dean said. “It's hard to believe, but 40 saved her life.”
31．A．interest B．interested C．interesting D．interests
32．A．sent B．sends C．was sending D．is sending
33．A．thousand B．thousand of C．thousands D．thousands of
34．A．how B．what C．where D．when
35．A．So B．And C．But D．As
36．A．telephoned B．replied C．found D．talked
37．A．better B．worse C．harder D．easier
38．A．with B．on C．to D．at
39．A．Hardly B．Happily C．Luckily D．Carefully
40．A．a boy B．doctors C．the police D．email
选做题：句子翻译。
1.瞧!树下有一位老人正在观看孩子们玩游戏
__________________________________________________________________
2.我感到这个问题很难回答。
__________________________________________________________________
3.你最好不要单独去游泳。
__________________________________________________________________
4.当我们到达火车站时，火车已开走了。
__________________________________________________________________
5.她宁愿和我们一道去也不愿呆在家里。
__________________________________________________________________
PAGE初三一轮复习八上Module3-4
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M3-4中出现的win等单词、look out for 等短语，并灵活运用if条件从句。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过讨论爱好培养对他人不同爱好的尊重，建立良好的同学关系, 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M3-4词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M3-4重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择
1. You’d better _______ the riders when you drive a car.
A. look out for B. look down C. look up D. look through
2. Remember ______ the red light when you go across the street.
A. watching B. watch C. watches D. to watch
3. It seemed that they ______ to me in person.
A. are speaking B. were speaking C. speaking D. spoken
4. If you don’t have money, you should ______ your parents ______more.
A. ask; to B. ask; with C. ask; for D. ask; of
5. Let’s begin our great concert ______ dance music.
A. use B. with C. of D. in
6. Most of my classmates enjoy _______ Jay Chou’s pop music.
A. listen B. listening C. listen to D. listening to
7. I asked _______ for breakfast.
A. what did he have B. what does he have C. what he has D. what he had
8. The doctors were busy helping the patient. They even didn’t have time to stop_______..
A. having a rest B. to have a rest C. had a rest D. for have a rest
9. Listen! She has a nice ______, and she sings very well.
A. sound B. noise C. voice D. shout
10. He practises _______English every day.
A. saying B. speaking C. talking D. telling
11. I ______ my pen everywhere, and didn’t find it.
A. looked down B. looked after C. looked for D. looked
12. Our teachers often advise us _________ computer games a lot.
A. to play B. playing C. not to play D. not playing
13. Don’t forget _______ the lights when you leave.
A. turning on B. turn off C. to turn off D. to turning off
14. Can you tell me _________ English well
A. how to learn B. what to learn C. how can I learn D. what can I learn
15. The meeting didn’t start______ everyone was there.
A. because B. until C. why D. if
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. Keep _________(study) English if you want to work on Radio Beijing.
2. People from all over the world make friends by ___________(write) letters.
3. If it ______(be) sunny tomorrow, I ___________(walk) to school.
4. We ________(not have) our sports meeting if the weather _______(not be ) fine.
5. If you __________(not know) the answer, please ________(ask) Mary.
6. Don’t talk! The students _________(have) a test.
7. ________(read) English books is good for us.
8. I don’t know which sweater _________(buy).
9. If there _______(be) fewer trees, there _________( be) more pollution.
10. I’m not sure if he ____ (come) tomorrow. If he __ (come), I _______ ( tell) you.
三、翻译句子（C层选做）
1. 如果你想成为一名记者，你需要英语说得很好。(want to be…; need to )
2. 他们还没有决定去哪里。(decide where …)
3. 这孩子不停的问我问题。( keep asking…)
4. 我记得今天早上我给老师打过电话了。(remember making a telephone call to…)
5. 我问莉莉昨天早饭吃了什么？(have for )
6. 似乎要下雨了。(It seems that…)初三一轮复习七下Module7-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-10重点短语集锦：
Module7-8重点短语:
1.骑自行车 by bicycle / bike 2.乘地铁 by subway 3.乘公共汽车 by bus 4.坐出租车 by taxi
5.离…远；远离be far from 6.离…近 be close to 7.到达学校get to school 8.最长的旅行the longest journey
9.旅行时代 traveling times 10.从…到 from....to 11.客运码头 ferry terminal 12. 在公共汽车站 at the bus stop 13. 数百万的 millions of 14. 最安全的旅行方式 the safest way to travel
15.出生于 be born in 16..的名字 the name of…. 17.小学 primary school 18.我的过去生活 my past life
19.期待做某 look forward to doing 20.故居old family houses 21.有一天 one day
22.美国东海岸的一个小城镇a small town on the east coast of America
23.里面有鱼的池塘 a pond with fish in it 24.一个带有电视的起居室a living room with a TV 25.在我卧室的墙上on the wall of my bedroom 26.两个美国总统two presidents of America
Module9重点短语：
1. 从前once upon a time 2. 决定干decide to do sth. 3. 迷路be/get lost 4. 去乘go for a ride 5. 采花pick some flowers 6.捡起，拾起 pick up 7. 环顾四周look around 8. 急忙去hurry to 9.敲门 knock on the door 10. 推开门push the door 11. 向里看look inside 12. 指着point at 12.想坐下want to sit down
13. 成为碎片be in pieces 14.入睡，睡着be asleep 15. 开始，起初 at first
16. 走进卧室 walk into the bedroom 17.从床上跳下来jump out of bed 18.返回到森林return to the forest
Module10重点短语：
1、生活经历life experience 2、听收音机listen to the radio 3、教师节 Teachers’ Day 4、妇女节Women’s Day 5、圣诞节 Christmas 6、国庆节National Day 7、儿童节Children’s Day 8、新年New Year’s Day 9、劳动节Labour Day 10、春节Spring Festival 12、离开go away 13、在1992年in 1992 14、在……岁时at the age of 15、和某人结婚 marry sb. 16、搬到……move to 17、一个诗歌和戏剧作家 a writer of plays and poem 18、一些最著名的戏剧 some of the most famous plays 19、在2003年8月in August, 2003 20、在1876年4月9日On April 9th 1876 21、加入到一个戏剧公司join a theatre company 22、一个成功的演员 a successful actor 23、开始做某事start doing sth. 24、用许多其他语言in many other languages 25.、毕业finish school 26、骑自行车去学校 ride a bike to school27.决定成为一名演员decide to be an actor 28、世界上最著名的作家之一one of the most famous writers
Part2: Module7-10基础知识集锦：
Module7-8
1. ①far from 离……远 ②close to 离……近
2. the way to do…. 干……的方式/方法It’s the best way to get to school. 这是去学校最好的方法。
链接：on the/one’s way to school, on the / one’s way home
3. take 花费; 常用句型：It takes +sb+时间段+to do sth. 某人干某事用了多长时间。
spend+时间段+doing/on sth .I spend 2 hours on my homework./I spend 2 hours doing my homework.
4. 句型结构：one of+ 最高级 + 名词复数 “最…之一” ; 其谓语动词用单数
5. by+交通工具 ( 中间不加任何冠词)Tony goes to school by bus every day.
6. millions of 上百万/数以百万的 数词 +million +名词 7. more than=over “超过…”
8. 形容词&副词的最高级 (参考课本P149)
1) 三者或三者以上比较时用最高级。最高级表示“某人、某事在某个范围内最 ……"。最高级的
有些形容词或副词不符合规律，需特别记忆，如：
little ----less----least badly--- worse---worst ill---worse---worst
good/ well---better----best many/much----more---most
2) 形容词的最高级前面一般要加用定冠the ，而副词的最高级前的定冠词可以省略。
3) 当两个形容词最高级同时修饰一个名词时，后面一个形容词最高级前的定冠词the通常被省略。
4) 最高级没有比较的对象，通常跟上如果要标明比较的范围，一般接“in //of” 介词短语。
9. born: ①I was born in a small village. ②He was born on March 16th,1998.
10. strict (adj.) Our teacher is strict with us in our study.
11. “副词+动词过去分词”构成的复合形容词：well-behaved行为端正的；well-known众所周知
well-dressed穿着好的； newly-built新建的； poorly-dressed衣衫褴褛的
12. be like 问个性，意为：什么样子的人。
如：What's your sister like 你姐姐怎么样？/你姐姐是怎样一个人？ She is kind.她很善良。
look like 问外貌，长相， 意为：看起来什么样。如：What does your sister look like 你姐姐长什么样子？ She is tall. She has long black hair.她个子很高。她有一头黑黑的长发。
动词不定式在句中作后置定语：There were lots of things to do in Quincy.
14 .with 介词，意为“① 带有 ② 和…在一起” ③ 用：
①There was a big living room with a TV, a kitchen, a bathroom and three bedrooms.
②Tim with her friends is playing basketball on the playground.
③ Please click the new document with the mouse.
15. 一般过去式中，主语为单数时，be动词用was。主语为复数时，be动词用were.
否定句在be后加not,缩写为wasn’t、weren’t；一般疑问句把was和were提前。
16. it作形式主语:①It was great to play there. 在那里玩耍棒极了。
Module9-10
1.短语动词：英语中一些常用动词常可以与某些介词、副词或其他词构成意义不同的习语，称为短语动词。look around 环顾四周 knock on 敲 look into向里看 pick up捡起 hurry to 急忙到……去
2. decide v.决定 She decided to go for a ride in the forest.她决定到森林里去兜风。
总结：决定做某事decide to do sth..My brother decides to study hard.
3. hurry to + spl. = go to spl. in a hurry 急忙去某地
4. enter + sth 进入…… They entered/went into the building. (enter不与into连用)
5. return to spl. = come back to spl. 返回某地 （return不与back连用）
6. 讲故事的顺序：First… Next… Then… Finally…
7.marry vt (及物动词). 嫁给, 娶…; 和…结婚 vi (不及物动词) 结婚
归纳:1)be married与get married 意思一样, be married 表状态; get married 表动作.
2)be married to 表示:与某人结婚,后面跟介词to.
8.join 参加,加入 归纳:1) join指加入某一组织,成为其中一员, 如:join in the Party,join the league等,另外它的后面可接表示人的名词或代词, 表示加入到某人或某些人的行列中去. 2)join in 表示加入或参与某种活动, in之后可接名词或动词-ing形式, 表示参加某人的活动, 可以说: join sb. in doing sth..
3）take part in= join in 参加 take part in the singing group 参加歌咏小组；enter也有参加;加入的意思 如： enter the war 加入战争 enter the competition 参加比赛
9. successful adj. 成功的　
拓展:1) succeed v. 成功 He can succeed in the contest.他会在比赛中成功的!
2)success n. 成功或成功的人或事 She was a success as an actress.她是位成功的女演员。
Ⅲ. 语法突破
一般过去时态 （行为动词）(见课本P150-151)
与一般过去时连用的时间状语a minute ago, yesterday, last week, in those days, in 1990…
一般过去时谓语的两种形式
　 一般过去时的谓语动词主要有两种形式：be动词和行为动词。
一般动词过去式的构成是在动词后加ed , 我们把这类动词称为规则动词，其过去式的变化规则是：
①一般在动词词尾加ed如：walk------walked ②以字母e结尾的动词后加-d, 如live-----lived.
③以辅音字母加-y结尾的动词，变y为i, 再加ed, 如hurry—hurried
④以元音字母加一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节动词，先双写辅音字母，再加ed.
不规则动词变化（见课本P172）
行为动词一般过去时的否定形式是加助动词didn’t, 而且没有人称和数的变化。
行为动词一般过去时的一般疑问句是在句首加助动词did，谓语动词变成动词原形构成的。
一般过去时的特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+过去式的一般疑问句= 一般过去时的特殊疑问句初三一轮复习八下Module1-2
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module1-2重点短语集锦：
Module1重点短语:
tidy up 收拾2.take up占用（时间或空间）3.a bit +adj. / a bit of +n. 一点儿… (区别于a little +adj. / n. ) 4.a collection of stamps / collect stamps 集邮5.play the violin / the piano / the drum / the flute 拉小提琴/弹钢琴/打鼓/吹笛子6.play football / tennis / volleyball 踢足球/打网球/打排球7.listen to music 听音乐8.all the time 一直, 总是9.be / show/ become interested in sth. 对…感兴趣/显示出/变得感兴趣10.next time 下一次11.at the end of … 在…末尾12.need to do sth. 需要做某事13.start doing sth./ to do sth. 开始做某事14.how often 多久一次(询问频率)15.grow vegetables 种菜16.look after…照顾, 照看17.such as…= for example 例如18.grow as a person 成长19.develop one’s interests 发展兴趣 .come out 出版; 出现; 结果是21.as a result 结果22.like doing sth. / to do sth. 喜欢做某事23.in the future 在将来
24.try to do sth. / try doing sth. 尽力做某事/尝试做某事25.in one’s free/ spare time 在某人业余时间26.bring sb. great success 给某人带来成功{ 注意词性success n. successful adj.successfully adv. succeed (in doing sth.) v. } 27.be popular with …在…中受欢迎28.write to sb. 给某人写信29.all over the world 遍及全世界30.think about…考虑某事31.find out ( about )…查明有关某事32.dress in…穿着…衣服33.in the past在过去 34.not only…but also…不仅…而且…
Module2重点短语：
1. 一些私人问题 some personal questions 2. 在几个月后in a couple of months 3. 有些亲密的朋友some close friends 4. 顺便说一下 by the way 5. 可能下周的某个时间 maybe sometime next week 6. 与…不同be different from 7. 把你的回答录音record your answers 8.想念我的父母miss my parents
9. 祝音乐会好运 good luck with the concert 10. 带你所有的朋友到北京电台来参观bring all your friends for a visit to Radio Beijing 11. 给我一个重要的礼物give me an important gift 12.在一个初中at a junior school 13.遥远 far away 14.害怕跟任何人交朋友 be afraid to make friends with anyone 15.跟任何人谈论我的问题talk to anyone about my problem 16. 担心worry about 17. 坐在桌子边 sit at my desk 18,和往常 一样 as usual 19.在那时at that moment 20.回头turn back 21. 没有说话 without a word
22.一种明朗而 又友好的东西的触动the touch of something bright and friendly
23.和其他学生交谈 talk with the other students 24.一天天地 day by day 25.那个带来幸运微笑的男孩 the boy with the lucky smile 26.朝某人微笑smile at 27.没有关系 It doesn’t matter
Part2: Module1-2基础知识集锦：
Module1
1. make sb interested 结构: make sb adj. （补充：使役动词let/have/make sb do sth.）
(1).interest (n.) 兴趣 have/show interest in / (v.) 使(人) 发生兴趣,主语为事物
(2) (adj.) interesting & interested be interested in “对…感兴趣”
2. listen to sb. do听某人做了某事（着重全过程）/ doing sth.（着重正在做某事）
相同用法的感官动词还有： hear/ watch/notice/find/see等。
3. What’s happening on Friday 周五将要发生什么事？
①.sth happen to sb. “某人发生某事” A traffic accident happened to him yesterday .
②.sb.+ happen+ to do sth. “某人碰巧做某事” I happened to meet a friend yesterday.
4. 辨析：such as 例如，一般列举同类人或事物中的几个例子，as后面不可有逗号。
for example一般只举同类中的一个为例，作插入语，可位于句首,句中或句末。
5. as well as 既…又…, 不仅..而且，用于肯定句中，起连接作用。
as well as 连接并列主语时，谓语动词与第一个主语的人称和数保持一致。
1) I as well as they am (be) ready to help you.
2) Tom and his parents go to the park once a week. (同义句)
Tom as well as his parents goes to the park once a week.
6. as a result 结果，因此 (as a result of sth 因为… 的原因)
1) He got up late, so he was late for school.(同义句转化) He got up late, as a result, he was late for school.
7. 表示“花费”的四个词及用法：
1). sb. spend (money/time) on sth.//(in) doing sth. 花费（金钱/时间）做某事
2). It takes/took sb time …to do sth. 花费（时间）做某事
3) sb. pay money for sth. 花费（金钱）做某事 4). sth. cost sb (money)花费（金钱）做某事
写过去式及分词：spend spent spent take took taken pay paid paid cost cost cost
8. tidy up “收拾”，如果宾语是名词，可置于tidy与up中间或后面；如果宾语是代词，须置于中间。相同用法的短语还有：pick up; look up; wake up等。
Module2
1. No one---- “ 没有人，无人” (否定含义)= nobody, 做主语时，谓语只用单数形式。
No one knows (know) who I am. No one was (be) in the room when I entered.
None 可以指人也可以指物，表示三者或三者以上中“没有任何人或物”常与of 短语连用。作主语时谓语动词用单数或复数皆可，但of 后为不可数名词时，谓语动词只能用单数.
They were all very tired, but none of them would stop to take a rest.
A. both B. all C. none D. neither
2. lonely adj.孤独的，寂寞的 alone adv. 单独一个人的
1）The old man lives alone, but he doesn’t feel lonely. 那个老人独自住着，但是不感到孤独
2）-- Do you feel lonely_ when you are alone at home -- No, I always have lots of thing to do.
3. be afraid to do sth. “不敢做某事” （强调动作） be afraid that +宾语从句
be afraid of (doing) sth. “担心/害怕（做）某事” （强调出现某种后果）
1）The boy was afraid of speaking in public. 那个男孩害怕在大庭广众前讲话。
2）I am afraid that I can’t finish the work on time. 我恐怕不能按时完成工作。
4. make friends with sb. “和…交朋友“
5. hear sb. doing sth. 听见某人正在做某事 hear sb. do sth.听见某人做了或经常做某事
1）Every time I heard the other students talking and laughing.
2）--- Do you often hear Wei Hua read English in his room
-- Listen! Now we can hear him reading English in his room.
拓展： laugh n. v. 笑，大笑 laugh at …嘲笑… smile n. v. 微笑 smile at … 对…微笑
6. remember to do sth 记着要去做某事 remember doing sth 记着做过了某事
forget to do sth . 忘记要去做某事 forget doing sth 忘记做过了某事
7. What do you think of the film == How do you like the film 你认为这部电影怎么样？
8. worry about == be worried about 担心…， 为…而担心
1）I didn’t want my parents to worry about me.
9. 宾语从句注意事项: (1) 引导词的正确使用 （ that， if/whether， wh-疑问词）
(2) 在宾语从句中,一定要用陈述语序.
(3) 宾语从句中如果主句用一般过去时，从句根据需要用表示过去的一种时态，但客观真理除外（从句用一般现在时）。 (4) 人称变化遵循：“一随主，二随宾，三不变”的原则。初三一轮复习七年级下册Module11&Module12
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M11-12中出现的national等单词、on holiday等短语，并灵活运用一般过去时。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.珍惜时光,互爱互助，激情投入，全力以赴，享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
【使用说明】20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Ⅰ. Phrases (重点短语)：
民族英雄national hero 2.考虑think of 3.从事，致力于work on….4.开设一个博物馆open a museum
5.穿过go through 6.越过 go over 7.一个爱国主义故事a patriotic story8.几天前a few days ago 9.返回return to 10. 这位38岁的宇航员the 38-year-old astronaut11.第二天the next day 12.11年后11 years later 13.挥手（致意）wave to14.中国首位宇航员China’s first astronaut15.把人送入太空send a person into space
16.在地图上on the map 17.在假期on holiday18. 玩的开心have a good time 19.在飞机场at the airport
20.在那里待了两天spend two days there 21.电影明星们的家the homes of the movie stars 22.飞往fly to 23.乘出租车去宾馆take a taxi to hotel 24.去散步go for a walk 25.第二天the next day 26.在周四早上on Thursday morning 27.在泰晤士河上on the RiverThames 28.去购物do some shopping 29.听音乐会listen to the concert 30.照相take photos of 31.随这封电子邮件给你send them to you with this email 32.say hello to sb.和某人说打招呼
Ⅱ. Important points (重要的知识点):
1. over : go over 越过
【拓展】over, on 和above 的区别
(1)on 表示A在B的上面，表面相接触 There is a book on the desk.
(2)over 表示A在B 的正上方，表面不接触。也可表示A覆盖在B 上面，此时表面接触。
(3)above 表示A在B的上方，且在空间上有一定的距离。但不一定强调正上方，表面不接触。
【辨析】 1). The moon is now above the trees. 月亮正位于树梢上。
2). A plane flew above the house. 飞机在房屋上空飞。
3). There is a picture on the wall. 墙上有幅图片。
2. through : go through 穿过
through和across
(1)through 表示直穿过空间，透过平面，经过时间，侧重指从内部穿过的运动方向。
(2)across 意为“穿过，横穿“侧重指从表面穿过的运动方向。
We went across the river by boat.
I saw a ball fly through the window just now.
【拓展】cross=go across
3. a few days ago 几天前
few “一些”后跟可数名词复数，带a表肯定，不带a表否定“不多的，很少的”。
拓展little, a little 后跟不可数名词。
There are a few students in the classroom.教室里有一些学生。
There are few tables in the room.房间里没有几张桌子。
4. call 称为，叫做
﹡called可以放在名词后修饰名词，表示“被叫做……的”。注：be省略。
例：Do you know the boy called Mingming 你认识那个叫明明的男孩吗？
5. 38-year-old 38岁的
38-year-old 在句中作名词astronaut的定语。而38 years old只能在句中作表语。
她是个5岁的女孩 。She is a 5-year-old girl. = She is 5 years old .
6.“for +一段时间” 表示持续多长时间。
【拓展】提问“for +一段时间”用how long, 表示 “多长时间”。
提问表将来的“in+一段时间”用how soon,表示“多快，还要多久”。
how often 用来提问某动作或状态发生的频率
我在这里等了一个小时。I wait here for an hour.
句型：1.What do you think of… 用来询问对方对某人或某事的看法，相当于How do you like…？
例：你觉得这本书怎么样？
What do you think of the book =How do you like the book
询问某人从事何种职业句型小结：
翻译：你爸爸是干什么的？
（1）What’s your father
（2）What’s your father’s job
（3）What does your father do
9. have a great time 玩得高兴，过得愉快
拓展：（1）have a good/great time in doing sth. 做某事很愉快
（2）该词组中的great还可以用good, nice等词替换，同意词组有enjoy oneself, have fun.
10. take / spend 花费；度过
总结用法：相同点：take和spend既可以表示花费金钱，也可表示度过一段时间。
固定句型：＊Sth takes (sb) some time. 某事花费（某人）多少时间。
Eg. The journey takes about ten minutes.
＊It takes (sb.) some time/money to do sth. 做某事花费(某人)…时间/金钱
Eg. It took me two days to finish my homework.
＊Sb. spend money/ time on sth= Sb. spend money /time (in) doing sth.
I spent two days on/ in doing my homework.=It took me two days to finish my homework.
11. hope 希望
拓展：（1）hope +陈述句（宾语从句）：I hope everyone is very well. 我希望人人都好。
（2）hope to do 希望干某事：I hope to see my daughter soon.
（3）当你要表示“希望如此”时，就说“I hope so.”其否定形式用“I hope not.”。
hope 一般不用于进行时；也不接复合宾语，不能说hope sb. to do sth。
III. Grammar (语法):
.一般过去时的特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+过去式的一般疑问句= 一般过去时的特殊疑问句。
Eg. 1) When did he die 2)How long did the space flight last
(2)不规则动词的一般过去式：
我们所接触的行为动词多为规则动词，其一般过去式变化规则为________。但是有些动词不符
合以上规则，称为不规则动词。写出Ms8-12中出现的不规则动词的一般过去式：
1.be_________ 2.have ________3.swim_______4.buy_______5.leave_______6.spend_______
7.e_______9.meet_______10.take_______11.do_______12.read_______
13.get_______14.write_______15.go_______16.see_______Module 11--12 复习学案
组别______组号________姓名________等级________
【学习目标】1.理解构成新词的基本方法，能够灵活运用M11-12中population等重点单词，along
with等短语及知识点。
2.通过自主学习，小组合作，解决疑难，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.培养体谅，关爱的情感，激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识回顾】
Part1: Module11-12重点短语集锦：
Module11:
1.太多的人们too many people 2.太多的车辆，噪音，污染too much traffic, noise and pollution
3.足够的空间enough space
4.我们所处的位置正好适合谈论这个话题be in the right place to talk about it
5.日益增长的人口an increasing population
6.很多国家的环境问题an environmental problem in many countries
7.伴随着人口，烟雾以及交通问题along with the crowds, smoke and the transport problems
8.看一些事实look up some facts 9.和校长的见面an appointment with the head teacher
10.进行，举行，发生come up 11.幸亏，由于thanks to 12.真不敢相信I don’t believe it .
13.世界人口的百分之二十20 percent of the world’s population
14.一个位于镇中心的非常静谧的村庄a quiet country village in the center of the country
15.在那时at that time 16.在城镇的边缘on the edge of town
17.远处有一些田野和山丘with some field and the hills in the distance
18.离着大城市很近close to a big city 19.开始到达Arnwick begin to arrive in Arnwick
20.为了找到工作，过上好的生活to find jobs and have a better life
21.需要居住的地方…_ Need somewhere to live
22.决定在城市边缘建造公寓decide to build flats around the edge of the city
23.有一百多万人口have over a million people 24.关闭close down
25.增加了交通和污染add to the traffic and pollution 26.更少的私家车fewer private cars
27.管理一个大城市run a big city 28.阻止人们犯罪protect people from crime
29.更多的税来支付每样东西more taxes to pay for everything 30.事实上in fact
31.和…. 有着一样的问题 the same problems as…
Module12:
1.有点儿紧a bit tight=kind of…=a little… 3.热烈欢迎…. give a warm welcome to …
2.欢迎到我们学校的颁奖典礼welcome to our school prize-giving 4.作为一名学生as a pupil
5.很高兴颁奖be pleased to present the prizes 6.进行一次英语课程do an English course
7.每人100美元100 dollars each 8.在机场接你meet you at the airport
9.看Crazy Feet录制它的最新CD watch Crazy Feet record its latest CD
10.没有可穿的东西haven’t got anything to wear 11.别傻了Don’t be silly.
12.提供暑期英语课程provide summer English courses 13.与此同时at the same time
14.持续四周last for four weeks 15.在…的开始at the beginning of 16.多达15 up to 15
17.取得进步make progress 18.不仅是学习英语as well as learning English
19.体验生活experience life 20.参加（活动）take part in .. 21.和...建立友谊create friendship with..
22选择去…旅游choose to take trips to.. 23.旅游胜地place(s) of interest
24.填写我们的申请表fill in the application form 25.为..付钱pay for
Part2: Module11-12重点句子集锦
1.管理一个大城市是很困难的。It is hard to run a big city.
2.现在越来越多的家庭都拥有私家车。Nowadays more and more families have private cars.
3.这家商店三年前就倒闭了。The shop closed down three years ago.
4.需要有更多的学校和医院。There need to be more hospitals and schools.
5.那只会增加我们的困难。 That will only add to our difficulties.
6.经营一个城市阻止犯罪时很困难的It’s difficult to run a big city, and to protect people from crime.
7.这不是她的错。 It’s not her fault.
8.你的城镇有着和Arnwick 同样的问题么？ Does your town have the same problems as it
Part3: Module11-12重要知识点集锦
1. too many+可数n 太多 too much+不可数n :太多 much too+形容词
2. percent of... “百分之……的……”。
注：百分数的动词单复数主要由其所代替的名词决定。如果代替的是不可数名词或可数名词单数，谓语动词用单数；如果代替的是复数名词，则谓语动词也用复数形式。
3. population 集合名词，意思是“人口；人数”，注意以下几种用法：
（1）population作主语时，谓语动词多用单数形式。
（2）表示拥有多少人口时，可用 have a population of...结构。
（3）对人口进行提问，应用 What is the population （4）人口的多少用large, big或small修饰。
4.总结“花费”的单词 1) sb spend …on sth / sb spend… (in )doing…
2) sb pay …for… 3) sth cost sb… 4) It takes sb…to do…
5. 阻止某人做某事：protect…from + doing sth
6. with 用法总结 1）.与...一起,偕同,和... 2)带着...;有...的 T 3)以(手段、材料),用(工具)
4)伴随，随着 5)在...身边,在...身上
7. room有两层含义，一为“房间”，是可数名词；二表示人或物体所占的“空间或场所”、处事的“余地”等意思，是不可数名词，可用little，much，no等词修饰。
make room for给……让出地方； take up room占地方
8. 1) add用作及物动词，表示"加；增加",常与介词to连用,即" add ... to ...","把......加到......中去
2) add to（add 作不及物动词用）表示"增加；增添",其中to是介词,后接名词或代词
3) add up to 加起来等于，合计达，总计达，总共；
9. You are flying .. to Los Angeles! 有些表示位移的动词可以用进行时表将来。 这些词有：
fly, come, go, leave, start等。
10. up to 15...“（数目）多达…，一直到…” make progress（with）“（在…方面）取得进步”
注: progress是不可数名词。,可用much, (a) little, great, no等词修饰。
11. provide sb with sth=provide sth for sb 为某人提供某物
拓展：offer sb sth=offer sth to sb 提供给某人某物
【巩固提升】
【能力训练】
一、单项选择
( ) 1. It’s a good habit _____ breakfast every day. A. had B. have C. has D. to have
( ) 2. It was _____ hard work to teach the children about healthy food. A. a B./ C. an D. the
( ) 3. I have got a friend _____ sister is a doctor. A. who B. who’s C. which D. whose
( ) 4. The English teacher said angrily that children behaved very _____ in the class.
A. well B. good C. bad D. badly
( ) 5. ----Is your stomach ache getting _____ --- No, it’s worse. A. better B. bad C. less D. well
( ) 6. Which boy is _____, Jim or Mike A. taller B. the most tall C. the tallest D. the taller
( ) 7. Does your sister walk_____ up with you
A. fast enough to catch B. enough fast catching C. enough fast catch D. fast enough catching
( ) 8._____ friends you have, _____ you will be.
A. More, happier B. The more, The happier C. More, more happy D. The more, the more happy
( ) 9. I hope our life will be _____ in the future.
A. good and good B. well and well C. better and better D. good and well
( ) 10. Can you tell me _____about your friends
A. something different B. different anything C. different something D. nothing different
( ) 11.The people ___ searching the thief in the forest at the moment. A. is B. are C. was D. were
( ) 12.Several ______ volunteers in the city are getting ready for the 2008 Beijing Olympics.
A. hundreds B. hundreds of C. hundred D. hundred of
( ) 13.-- _____ the population of China ---______ over 1,300,000,000.
A. How many are, They are B. How’s, It’s C. What’s, It’s D.How much is , It’s
( ) 14.The population of India is larger than __of America. A. that B. ones C. those D. it
( ) 15.How much the jeans over there A. is B. are C. was D.am
( ) 16. ---Which is river in china ---The Changjiang River.
A. longer B. the longest C. longest D. the longer
( ) 17.The heavy snow stopped us from _____ to meet them at the station.
A. go B. to go C. going D. went
( ) 18.Uncle Li came in and he looked . A. worry B. worring C. worried D. worries
( ) 19.Ten hours a very long time. A. is B. are C. were D. was
( ) 20.Some of the money given to him. A. is B. are C. was D.were
二、完形填空(10’)
Do you hear of Taihu Lake The third largest freshwater lake in China once __1_____ its natural beauty and fish. But the lake ___2___ dirty and smell bad recently.
There was an outbreak of blue algae.(蓝藻). Much of the water was covered ___3_____ a thick green blanket, which __4___ a strong smell like bad meat. The algae blanket also left many people in Wuxi, Jiangsu Province, with no drinking water. “The tap-water(自来水) was black and smelly. Nobody used it,” says Gu Zhaodi, a resident(居民) of Wuxi.
Algae are our small plants ___5__ live in the water. They grow fast when the water is hot and rich in chemicals. Algae poison(使中毒) the lake and make the water smell bad. This is dangerous for fish and for people who drink the water.
There has been an algae outbreak in Taihu almost every summer in____6__ years. But this year the temperatures is higher and there has been little rain. This has made it __7__.
Experts say, “It is mostly because of man. If the water __8___ less, the algae could not grow.” People have built many small factories around the Taihui. They throw their chemical waste into it. Although Wuxi __9__ one of the richest citiest cities in China, the environment has been seriously destroyed. It’s time to clean up the lake, __10__ our lives will be in danger.
( ) 1. A.is famous for B. was famous for C. was famous at D. was known
( ) 2.A.became B. has turned C. has become D. has gone
( ) 3.A.off B. by C. on D. in
( ) 4.A.gave out B. went off C. gave away D. gave off
( ) 5.A.who B. whose C. that D. where
( ) 6.A.recently B. recent C. last D. next
( ) 7.A.badly B. more badly C. worse D. better
( ) 8.A. polluted B. polluting C. was polluted D. pollute
( ) 9.A. has become into B. grew into C. has grown into D. grew
( ) 10.A.then B. and C. unless D. or
三、阅读理解(30’)
Buying green
When you are in the supermarket with your parents shopping for an oven or a washing machine, keep your eyes open. There are labels (标签)that tell which machines save energy. They may be a little more expensive but they use less power.
Make yourself an expert
Learning about the environment is very important. There are good books that will help you. To get started, ask a teacher for some suggestions. You can also surf the Internet to find websites with information about the environment and climate change.
Open the window
A large part of the carbon dioxide(二氧化碳) comes from our homes. But there are easy ways of cutting the amount down. Open a window rather turning on the air-conditioner. If you have to use it, put the temperature setting 2 degrees higher in the summer and 2 degrees lower in the winter.
Save paper
When it’s time of your family to pay telephone or credit cards bills, help your parents to do it online. By not using paper, you are saving trees. It also helps cut the amount of fuel(燃料) used by the trucks and planes that transport paper bills. Be careful with the personal information and report problems at once. What’s more, paying online is convenient and quick.
Let the sun dry them
A recent study found that 60 percent of the energy used in cleaning a piece of clothing is spent in washing and drying. Over it’s lifetime, a T-shirt can send up to 4 kilograms of carbon dioxide into the air. Use the energy-saving machine you can find. Some new ones can use as little as a quarter of the energy of older machines. When they are clean, dry your clothes the natural way, by hanging them on a line rather than in a dryer.
根据短文内容，选择正确答案
( ) 1.If you want to buy a washing machine, you had better ______.
A. talk with the assistant. B. buy a cheap one
C. read labels that tell which machines save energy D. buy a expensive one
( ) 2.when it is in winter and it’s rather cold in the room, how should you put your air-conditioner
A. You should put the temperature setting two degrees higher.
B. You should put the temperature setting two degrees lower.
C. You should close your window D. You should keep your room warmer
( ) 3.which of the following statements is NOT right
A. Paying online is inconvenient B. Paying online is very quick
C. Paying online is convenient D. Paying online is saving paper
( ) 4.Usually we ____ on a piece of clothing in washing and drying it.
A. spend forty kilograms of carbon dioxide into the air
B. spend fifty kilograms of carbon dioxide into the air
C. spend fourteen percent of the energy D. spend sixty percent of the energy
( ) 5.What do you know about the earth from the passage
A. Global warming may bring changes in rainfall and a rise in sea levels
B. Global warming may put human beings in serous danger
C. The earth is in trouble now D. All above are right
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习八上Module7-8
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-8重点短语集锦：
一．基础知识回顾：
M7重点短语
(1)它闻起来很香。It smells delicious. (2)做比萨make a pizza (3)怎么了？What’s the matter
(4)它尝起来味太浓了It smells too strong. (5)我恐怕我….I’m afraid… (6)试一下Have a try.
(7) 你们俩看上去都挺时髦的You both look very smart. (8)举行晚会 have a party
(9)向…介绍……introduce…to… (10)我们当然了 Sure we will. (11)你的上一封信your last message
(12) 收到某人的来信hear from sb. (13)迫不及待做某事can’t wait to do
通过照片认出我recognise me from my photo (15) 到达机场 arrive at the airport
(16)戴眼镜wear glasses (17)带我的厚外套carry my warm coat (18)也also/ as well
(19)校网球队队长captain of the school tennis team(20)为…而骄傲be proud of(21)成绩不好get bad marks (22) 对……生气get angry with… (23) 感觉有点伤心feel a bit sad （24）害怕…be afraid of
(25)对..感到兴奋be excited about (26) 握手shake hands （27）在正式会议formal meeting
(28)在非正式场合informal situation
M8重点短语
1在天安门广场对面opposite Tian’anmen Square 2去公园的路the way to a park
3人民大会堂the Great Hall of the People 4中国国家博物馆the National Museum of China
5毛主席纪念馆the Chairman Mao Memorial Hall 6.给某人看 ...show sb. sth. 7.一张…的地图a map of
8一直向前走go straight ahead 9.在左边on the left 10.在那里over there
在…和…之间between…and… 12.有点；有几分kind of 13.穿过go across 14.向左拐(进)turn left into 15.沿着…走walk along 16.在…拐角处at the corner of 17.在……的中央in the middle of
18.沿着街道走walk/go along the street 19.在一个晴朗的日子里on a sunny day
20.做某事的最好方法/方式the best way to do 21.在……的右边on the right of 22.下船get off the boat 23.乘船 take a boat 24.走过车站 go past the station 25.向右拐进国王街 turn right into King Street 26.在广场上on the square 27. 了解，学习learn about 28. 在... 的另一边on the other side of
Part2: Module7-8基础知识集锦
Module7必备知识点：
1.常见的表示感觉和知觉的系动词有feel, look, smell, sound, taste.这类系动词与be的不同是，其否定形式和疑问形式的构成要加助动词。
2.hope希望 n.v.
希望做某事hope to do sth (2)希望得到某物hope for sth (3)希望……hope+宾语从句
3. be afraid 的用法
(1)不敢去做某事be afraid to do sth (2)担心做某事be afraid of doing sth
(3)害怕某物be afraid of sth (4)恐怕……be afraid +that 从句
4. hear from sb. 收到某人的信
hear from sb. =get /receive a letter from sb. hear from后直接跟人,不能跟letter, 而get/receive后跟a letter 拓展: hear of /about 听说
5.can’t wait to do sth. 迫不及待做….
Mother gave the little girl a nice present. She couldn’t wait to open it. 她迫不及待地打开它.
6. as well 也(放句尾) too也,常放句尾,前面有逗号隔开; as well放句尾,无逗号隔开; also则放句中
7. be excited about 对..感到兴奋 I’m excited about coming to China. 我对来中国感到很兴奋.
8. a bit 意为“稍微，有点儿” 既可修饰形容词或副词的原级，也可修饰比较级，相当
于 a little；而 a little 还可修饰不可数名词,相当于 a bit of(联系kind of)
He is a little sad. = He is a bit sad. There is a little milk in the glass. = There is a bit of milk in the glass.
9.both可作形容词、代词或副词用，意思是“两个”、“双方”、“两个都”。
1) Both of the boys are playing football. 2) His parents are both workers.　
They both enjoy reading. 3) Both he and his brother are good at English.
总结：1) both和both of后都可接复数名词，构成名词词组。
2) both在句子中的位置，大多数放在系动词、情态动词和助动词之后，其它动词之前。
3) both可与and构成并列连词，连接两个性质相同并在句中作相同成分的并行结构。
Module8必备知识点：
主要知识点:
1. 问路方式
(1)How do I get to the Forbidden City (2)Where is the Chairman Memorial Hall
(3)Can you tell me the way to the park (4)Where can I do some shopping
2. on a clear day 具体到某一天（早上、下午、晚上）用介词on。
(1) He was born on the evening of August 28th, 1978.
(2) Let’s go out for a barbecue on Thanksgiving Day.
3.When you are tired , the best way to see London is by boat. 该句是一个when 引导的时间状语从句，总结短语：做…的最好的方式the best way to do sth.
【拓展】the way to…”去…的路” 常见搭配有：on one’s way to+地点名词或on one’s way+地点副词
4. 方位表达法
(1). left/right
1) On the right is the National Museum of China.
2) There is a river on the left/right side of the field. (adj.左边的/右边的)
3) Turn left/right into a narrow street. 向左/右转进一条狭窄的街道。
总结短语：(1)在…的左/右边on the left/right side of (2)向左/右转进turn left/right into
【拓展】turn left/right (adv)=turn to the left/right (n) 向左/右拐
(2) in front of在…前面 behind在…后面 next to在…旁边；紧挨着
(3) between prep. 在…之间 常用短语 between A and B
【区别】：between & among between 是用在两者之间，among是用在三者或者三者以上。
(4) opposite It's opposite Tian'anmen Square. opposite prep. 在....对面
【拓展】①.adj.对面的;相反的 The post office is opposite (to) the station.
②.n.对立物 Light is the opposite of heavy.
③.adv. 在对面 There is a couple with a dog who live opposite.
(5) corner ①.街道拐弯处 on/at the corner of the street ②.角落 in the corner of the room
(6) in the middle of"在...中间"
(7) over 在……..的上方（正上方）above 在……..的上方 （不一定是正上方）
另外over还可表示“盖在…上面”。
5. go along ……to/ into….. 沿……走（来）到……. go along/ down 沿着…往前走
go past...经过...(相当于pass) 如：go past the station 经过车站
go across (从表面)穿过 (相当于cross) go through (从内部)穿过
go straight ahead 一直向前走 同义句为：Go straight on.
6. get off 下车(船\飞机等) get on上车(船\飞机等) take off脱下；起飞 put on穿上
turn off 关上(收音机、电视、灯等) turn on 打开 fall off从...摔下来
Module6必背知识点：
1. left/right
总结短语：(1)在…的左/右边on the left/right (2)向左/右转进turn left/right into
turn left/right (adv)=turn to the left/right (n) 向左/右拐
opposite
1)opposite prep. 在....对面It's opposite Tian'anmen Square.
2)adj.对面的;相反的 The post office is opposite (to) the station.
3)n.对立物 Light is the opposite of heavy.
4)adv. 在对面 There is a couple with a dog who live opposite. 对面住着一对夫妇养着一条狗
3. between prep. 在…之间 常用短语 between A and B
【区别】：between & among between 是用在两者之间，among是用在三者或者三者以上。
4. corner ①.街道拐弯处 on/at the corner of the street ②.角落 in the corner of the room
5. go along 沿着…, 多指沿街、道路、河边或堤坝等处往前走。
go along ……to….. 沿……走（来）到……. go down 沿着…, 多指向低处走，向郊区走等。
go straight ahead 一直向前走 同义句为：Go straight on.
6.Opposite is the National Gallery , a museum with lots of famous paintings.
思考：“a museum ”是“the National Gallery” 的同位语or宾语，with引导的介词短语修饰museum.
7. 区别:over 在……..的上方（正上方）above 在……..的上方 （不一定是正上方）
The bridge is over the river. The plane is above us.
8.When you are tired , the best way to see London is by boat.
该句是一个when 引导的时间状语从句，总结短语：做…的最好的方式the best way to do
【拓展】the way to…”去…的路” 常见搭配有：on one’s way to+地点名词或on one’s way+地点副词
9. get off 下车 【拓展】get on上车 take off脱下；起飞 put on穿上
10. 常用的问路的句型有：
1). How can I get to … I don’t know the way.
2). Where is …
3). Can/ could you tell me the way to…, please
4). Do you know the way to …
5). Is there a(n) …near here
6). What’s the best way to …？
7). How far is it from …to…
8). I am looking for …. Can you tell me where it is
2. 常用的指路句型有：
1). Walk/Go along/down the road,and turn right/left into…
2). It’s over there on the left/right.
3). It’s between … and ….
4) . It's next to/in front of/ behind … You can't miss it.
6). Go straight ahead. It’s opposite Tian’anmen Square.
7). It takes about 10 minutes by bus./ it’s a 10-minute walk.初三一轮复习八上Module5-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module5重点短语:
1.最喜欢like best 2.确定be sure of 3.听说hear of/from 4....的首都the capital of
5.西方古典音乐western classical music 6.你最喜欢的古典作曲家your favorite classical composer 7.流行音乐pop music 8.传统京剧traditional Beijing Opera 9.一个说唱迷a fan of rap
10.让我们休息一下give us a break 11.究竟on earth 12.说唱音乐rap music
13.西方音乐western music 14. ....的中心the centre of 15.最著名的音乐家族the most famous family of musician 16.全欧洲all over Europe 17.两个最重要的作曲家two of the most important composers
18.不仅...而且...not only…but also… 19.带某人参观take sb.around 20.在许多城市开音乐会give concerts in many cities 21.在12岁的时候at the age of 12 22.为古典管弦乐队谱写了数百首动听的乐曲write hundreds of beautiful pieces of music for the classical orchestra
23.欧洲最伟大作曲家the greatest European composer 24.除...之外in addition to
Module6重点短语：
1.你过去的经历your past experience 2.坐在河边sit by the river 3.一个叫爱丽丝的女孩a girl called Alice 4.继续go on 5.从她身边跑过run past her 6.在花园里玩play in the garden 7.坐在草地上sit on the grass 8.坐在树上sit in a tree 9.朝...微笑smile at 10.掉进，落下fall down 11.进入一个奇异的世界go into a strange world 12.近来怎么样？How is it going？ 13.我明白了。I see. 14.让我猜猜。Let me guess. 15.在英国，所有的男孩与女孩都读过这本书。Every boy and girl in Britain has read it.
16.变得劳累get tired 17.一两次once or twice 18.朝...的里面看look into …
19.考虑干…think of/ about doing 20.一只长着粉红色眼睛的兔子a white rabbit with pink eyes
21.一只有口袋和手表的兔子a rabbit with a pocket and a watch 22.一没有图画的书a book without pictures 23.从她身边跑过run by/past her 24.没什么奇怪的there was nothing strange 25.迟到 be late for 26.把...从...中拿出来take ..out of.. 27.跑过田野run across the field 28.追赶 run after
29.看见某人做了某事 see sb do
30.出来get out
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦
Module5语法知识:
1. 当我们陈述一个事实，而又不是很有把握，可以在陈述句后加一个简短问句，称为反意疑问句。
反意疑问句是由系动词、助动词、情态动词的肯定或否定形式+能代替主语的代词。
(1)如果前面的陈述句是肯定的，反意疑问句就要用否定形式；
(2)如果前面的陈述句是否定的，反意疑问句就要用肯定形式；
(3)反意疑问句中，简短问句的主语必须是代替前面主语的代词.
(4)反意疑问句中，简短问句的谓语动词在时态和人称上，要与前面陈述句的谓语动词保持一致。
2. 总结：在英语中，无论问题怎样问，只要答语的事实是肯定句，就要用Yes来回答;只要答语的事实是否定的，就要用No来回答;而汉语中的“是或不是，对或不对”，是针对问题的问法而言的。（注
意理清汉语翻译）
3. 总结：有时英语的谓语动词并不用否定式，而是用上了“never, little, few, hardly, nothing, nobody”
等词，这时该陈述句也属于否定句。因此，反意疑问句的后半部分应用肯定式疑问句。
4. 总结：1）陈述句的主语是指示代词this/that, these/those时，反意疑问句的主语要用it, they.
2) 陈述句的主语是不定代词something, anything,nothing和everything时，反意疑问句的主语要用it;
陈述句的主语是不定代词someone/somebody,anyone/anybody,no one/nobody, none以及
everyone/everybody时，反意疑问句的主语要用they.
3) 陈述句是there be句型时，反意疑问句用be(not) there.
4) 陈述句是祈使句时，反意疑问句要用will，但以let’s开头的祈使句，反意疑问句要用shall.
5) 在I am的肯定陈述句后，反意疑问句用aren’t I.
Module5必备知识点：
on earth究竟，可以用在when,what,where,how,which,why等之后加强语气，表愤怒等情感。on earth
还需放在be动词、助动词、情态动词的前面。
on Earth 在地球上, 需注意本短语中earth的首字母要大写，即Earth.
2. make: (1) 制作 (2) 使，让，与let/have同为使役动词，用法有:
(1)make sb/sth adj. 使某人变得… 例: His works make him famous all over the world.
(2) make sb do sth 使某人做某事. Sometimes the teacher makes us work very hard.
拓展: make/let/have sb do sth的被动语态为 Sb be made/let/had to do sth
3. not only…but also…: 不仅…而且…，为并列结构，可加形容词或名词
例: Miss Li is not only a teacher but our friend. Miss Li不仅是一名老师，也是我们的朋友.
Lucia is not only beautiful but also kind. Lucia不仅漂亮，而且心地善良.
拓展: not only…but also…放在主语位置，谓语动词的选择采取就近原则.
类似的结构还有: either…or…, neither…nor…, there be.
4. in addition to 除…之外 In addition to English, he has to learn a second foreign language.
Module6语法知识：
过去进行时：表示过去某一时刻或一段时间内正在进行的动作。常和表示过去时间的词组或从句连用。
1.构成: 肯定句: 主语+was/ were +v.-ing 否定句: 主语+wasn’t/weren’t +v.-ing
疑问句: Was/ Were +主语+v.-ing Yes, 主语+was/ were. / No, 主语+wasn’t/ weren’t.
一般过去时的时间状语主要有：yesterday(morning, afternoon, evening), last night (week, month,
year…), …ago, the day before yesterday, in 2003, just now, long long ago, one day等；
过去进行时的时间状语有：at this/ that time, then, at that time, at eight o’clock yesterday, the whole
evening, all day yesterday, when和 while 引导的时间状语从句等。
3. 用于句式：过去进行时+ when + 一般过去式 ，表示“…正在…，这时…（发生了另外一件事）”
They were drawing when Mr Li came in. 他们正在画画，这时李先生进来了。
Module6必背知识点：
1.继续做同一件事go on doing sth / go on with sth ；接着做不同的事go on to do ；
2.every A and B结构中，AB是单数可数名词，这个结构作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
例: Every boy and girl in China has read the story. 在中国，每一个孩子都读过这个故事.
3.动词不定式to do和形容词修饰不定代词,作后置定语。nothing, something, anything, somebody, nobody,
anybody ,everything等都是不定代词。不定代词的修饰语要放在它们的后面，作后置定语。
see sb do sth看见当时动作发生地全过程 /see sb doing sth看见当时正在发生的动作。有类似用法
的单词还有watch(观看), hear(听见)，find(发现)；notice（注意）。
5. cross的词性是动词，across的词性是介词,表示在物体表面上横穿；through表示从物体内部穿过。
go across=cross
6. think of/about: 意为“考虑”. 考虑做某事 think of/about doing
例: She has been thinking about going home today. 她今天一直考虑要回家.
7. raise: (1) 募集，筹集. Let’s raise money to help the poor. (2) 举起. If you know the answer, please raise your hands. (3) 抚养. He must work hard to raise the faimly. 他必须努力工作来养活家庭.
8. sure:意为“确定的”，基本用法有(1) be sure of sth. 例: I am sure of his success. 我确信他会成功.
(2) be sure to do sth. 例: David is sure to win the champion. David一定能够赢得冠军.
(3) be sure+that从句. 例：I am sure you can all pass the exams. 我确信大家都能通过考试.初三一轮复习八上Module5-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M5-6中出现的lively等单词、on earth等短语，并灵活运用过去进行时态。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会在表达不同意见时照顾他人的感受；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M5-6词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M5-6重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择:
( )1.He has been here _________ ten years ago.
A. since B. in C. for D. at
( )2.This English newspaper is very easy for the students because there are _______ new words in it.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
( )3.Each of us will have to write a _________ report every two weeks.(2009.广州)
A. two-hundred-word B. two-hundreds-word
C. two-hundreds-words D. two-hundred-words
( )4.--______ the baby still _______ --No, he ______ crying.
A. Has, cried, has stopped B. Was, crying, stopped
C. Did, cry, stopped D. Is, crying, stopped
( )5.--Hello, Mike. Long time no see.Where have you been (2009.黄冈)
--Oh, not only my father but also I _____ Wuhan for a month.
A. have gone to B. have been to C. has been in D. have been in
( )6.E-mail is very popular. People seldom write letters now, ______ (2009.广东)
A. did they B. do they C. didn’t they D. don’t they
( )7.The suitcase looks too heavy for the lady to carry. Let’s go to help her, _______
A. will you B. won’t you C. shall we D. do we
( )8. --What a nice watch!Is it new --No, I have ______ it for two years.(2009.山东)
A. had B. sold C. borrowed D. bought
( )9. I’m hungry now. Let’s stop _________. (2009.芜湖)
A. having a meal B. having a rest C. to have a meal D. to have a rest.
( )10. Dick gave me a note while I _________ in the library.(2007.黄冈)
A. am reading B. was reading C. reads D. will read
( )11. I _______ he can ________ tomorrow.
A. don’t think; come B. didn’t think; came C. think; not come D. don’t think; came
( )12.“Have _______ try. You are so close to the answer. ”The teacher encourages the kids.
A. the other B. one another C. other D. another
( )13.---Is Jessica giving us a speech this evening
–No, it _______ be her. She ______ to Japan. (2010.潍坊)
A. mustn’t; has gone B. mustn’t; has been C. can’t; has gone D. can’t; has been
( )14. Yesterday evening I was playing the piano _______ the doorbell rang.(2008.潍坊)
A. when B. before C. while D. after
( )15. I prefer rock music because it can make me ______________.
A. to feel excited B. feel excited C. feel exciting D. to feel exciting
二、动词的适当形式填空:
1.The son was even ____________________(successful) than his father.
2.Long long ago, there was a little girl _________(call) Alice.
3. Not only you but also Lily___________(do) housework at 8 o’clock yesterday.
4. I always believe in her. She is sure ___________(win) the gold medal.
5. _____________(laugh) at others won’t make you happy. You should always be modest(谦虚).
6. We ____________ (clap) hands while they ________________ (perform) the story on the stage.
7. 11. ---Nice to meet you, Jack! How is it __________(go)
8.将下面的句子变成反义疑问句
(1) Many boys like Jeremy Lin, __________ ___________
(2)You have never seen this film before, __________ __________
(3) Study hard, _________ _________ (4) Let’s go hiking, _________ __________
9. Every teacher and student in our school _______(be) interested in this little boy since he____(come) here.
10. Somebody noticed him enter the room secretly yesterday.(变被动语态)
He was noticed _________ __________ the room secretly yesterday.
11. He ______________(hold) a gun in his hand when the enemy(敌人) came.
12. The speech__________(make) by the president is really great. You should listen to it sometime.
13. After the war began, the old farmer’s sons ____________(make) to join the army.
14. Amy thinks of _______________(travel) abroad for the summer holday.
15. We should stop people from _____________(cut) the trees. The environment is getting worse.
拓展训练：（C层选做）
1. Teacher Zhang often makes the students ____________ (do)the homework..
2. Which river ________ (go) through Shandong Province
3. You _________________ (hear) about him, haven’t you
4. My little brother enjoys _____________ (watch) TV very much.
5. The beautiful songs _______________ (be) popular for ten years.
6. It _______________ (rain) when they ________(leave) the station.
7. The sun _____________ (shine) when I __________ (get) to the top of the mountain.
8. I _______________ (do) my homework at this time yesterday.七年级下册M1-M6
Module1重点短语:
1.站在长城上stand on the Great Wall 2.和你讲话talk to you3.在一次学校旅游on a school trip4.玩得很高兴have a good time 5.拍很多照片take lots of pictures 6.买一些礼物和明信片buy some presents and postcards 7.躺在太阳底下lie in the sun 8.非常喜欢这次学校旅行enjoy the school trip a lot9.等候，等待wait for 10.现在，此刻at the moment11.不同的地方in different places 12.做不同的事do different things13.下班leave work 14.回家go home15.等公车wait for buses 16.赶火车run for trains17.开车drive cars/ a car 18.在家喝下午茶have afternoon tea at home19.走着去酒馆walk to pubs 20.喝一杯have a drink
21.吃晚饭have dinner 22. 在餐馆in restaurants 23.看（听）歌剧go to the opera24. 看芭蕾舞watch a ballet25.穿衣打扮get dressed 26. 开始上课start lessons27.喝咖啡或可乐drink coffee or Coke 28.看望朋友see friends29.给家里打电话call home 30.看…look at31.再见see you soon! 32.晚安good night
Module2重点短语：
33.春节Spring Festival 34.为….准备好get ready for…35.学习舞龙learn a dragon dance 36.制作灯笼make lanterns37.在春节前夕on New Year’s Eve 38.扫地sweep the floor39.做饭cook the meal 40.在工作at work 41.元宵节Lantern Festival 42.扫去sweep away43.有很多传统have lots of traditions 44.打扫房子clean the house 45.扫去霉运 sweep away bad luck 46.把门窗漆红paint doors and windows red 47.好运good luck 48.剪纸paper cuts 49.用……来装饰……decorate…with…50.理发have a haircut51.新年礼物New Year presents 52.舞龙和舞狮dragon and lion dancing 53.拜访家人和朋友visit family and friends 54.年糕sweet rice pudding 55.一种a kind of 56.在半夜at midnight 57.几天a few days 58.一年到头all the year round 59.庆祝….的诞生celebrate the birth of.. 60.对….感兴趣be interested in..
Module3重点短语：
1.在周末at the weekend 2.在周六早上on Saturday morning 3.查看我的邮件check my email 4.上钢琴课have a piano lesson 5.买一些新衣服buy some new clothes 6.去派对 go to a party 7.躺在床上，睡觉stay in bed 8.复习考试revise for the test 9.早起床get up early 10.吃野餐have a picnic 11.登上长城 walk up the Great Wall 12.期待 look forward to 13.乘飞机 take the/a plane 14.游览 do some sightseeing15.喜欢外国文化like foreign culture 16.参观紫禁城 visit the Forbidden City 17.交朋友 make friends ( with ) 18.躺在沙滩上lie on the beach 19.呆在宾馆里 stay in the/a hotel 20.龙舟节 Dragon Boat Festival 21.一位好厨师 a good cook 22.到达 get to / arrive in (at) 23.去观光 go sightseeing
Part2: Module1-3基础知识集锦：
Module1-2
1.for 为；为了1) 等待；等候wait for 2) 因为…而感谢某人thank sb. for sth. 3) 上学迟到be late for school 4) 为某人制作某物make sth for sb 5) 为我的课堂获取信息get information for my lessons
总结：for是介词，后跟动词ing形式、名词、代词宾格。
2.different adj. 不同的 构成短语be different from 与……不同
原句：At this moment, in different places of the world people are doing different things.
Your pen is different from mine.( 和我的不一样).
拓展：1) difference n. 不同点，差别，差异Eg. Can you find out four differences between the two pictures
2) different 反义词是same 例如：We are in the same class. (我们在同一个班)
3. dress n. 裙子，礼服 vt. （给某人）穿衣服, be/get dressed，意思是 “穿衣服”
原句：People aren’t getting up, washing or getting dressed.
put on 穿上，表示动作 原句:Put on your clothes.//wear 穿着，表示状态
①The woman is dressing her baby. (那位妇女正给她的孩子穿衣服)
② He put on his coat and left the house. (他穿上大衣离开了那间屋子)
③ Today she is wearing beautiful red dress.（今天她穿着一件漂亮的红裙子）
4.get ready for 为……做准备
原句：Are you getting ready for Spring Festival？
翻译：我们正在为期中考试做准备。We are getting ready for the mid-term exam.
be always ready to do sth. 乐于干某事We are ready to work for the 2010 EXPO in Shanghai.
5.paint vt. 给……上色 原句：We paint doors and windows red.
6. a few+可数名词复数， a little+不可数名词，两者都表示肯定，意为“一些”
few+可数名词复数, little+不可数名词, 两者都表示否定，意为“几乎没有”
7.take带走；bring带来 It is raining outside. Please take the raincoat with you. But remember to bring it back to me tomorrow.
too, either, also 也too置于句末，用逗号隔开;either置于否定句句末，用逗号隔开;also常置于句中，be动词之后，实义动词之前。
A re you learning a dragon dance, too 2) I don’t want to go there, either.
3) He is also a worker. 4) He also plays the piano.
9. be at work =be working 在上班 My parents are at work.. My parents are working.
10. help帮助 (1)He helps me( to )make a cake for my mother.他帮我为我妈妈制作蛋糕。
结构：帮助某人做某事 help sb. (to) do sth..
Computers can help us with our homework.电脑帮助我们做作业。help sb. with sth.帮助某人
11. decorate装饰We usually decorate the doors with paper cuts.我们通常用剪纸装饰门。
结构：用…装饰… decorate sth. with sth.
12. sweep away扫去 There is so much dust(尘土) on the floor. Sweep it away.
Module3
1. look forward to 期待，盼望. 其中to是介词，后跟名词或动名词.
原句：I’m looking forward to see my daughter and her daughter, my granddaughter.
eg. 1) I’m looking forward to your letter. 2) I’m looking forward to meeting you.
2. Would you like…. 你想要……吗 口语中常用来表示客气的邀请、请求、建议等。
肯定回答：Yes, I’d like to. / Yes, please. 否定：No, thanks. / I’d like to, but I…
原句：Would you like to come 【拓展】⑴表建议的句型：Let’s+v.= =What about+v.-ing
Eg. Let’s play basketball. =How about playing basketball
3. do some sightseeing 游览 原句：We’re going to do some sightseeing, because we like Chinese culture.
“do+v.-ing” 表示日常活动，在v-ing前还可以用some, the, all the, one’s等修饰。
（1）大明正在看书。Daming is doing some reading.
（2）短语拓展：跑步do some running 练字do some writing 买东西do some shopping洗衣服do some washing 做饭do some cooking 读书 do some reading 打扫卫生do some cleaning
【拓展】go+v-ing 往往表示去做某事。如：go cycling, go fishing, go shopping, go sightseeing。
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm 13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high 5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内） 10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内） 12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名 14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China 22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
Part2: Module4-6基础知识集锦：
1. no one表示“没有人、无人”。作主语时谓语动词用单数。 Eg.没有人在这。No one is here.
2. by 介词，含义有“用、通过、靠”等，表示方法、手段、或方式。
by后接交通工具，不加冠词。如：乘（飞机，火车，公交车….): by (plane, train, bus…).
【拓展】with 介词，“用（工具）” Eg. 用粉笔：with chalk 用手：with hands
in 介词，“用语言” Eg. 用英语：in English
3. use 动词，意为“使用，用，利用” e.g.我能用你的钢笔吗？can I use your pen？
use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事 e.g. We use the Internet to do our homework.
4. send v. send sth. to sb.=send sb. sth. （发）送给某人某物
类似词：give/ pass/bring sth. to sb.=== give/ pass/bring sb. sth.
make/buy/cook sth for sb === make/buy/cook sb sth
5. get It will get warm at the North Pole so the seas will be very rough.
get warm 意为变暖。在这get为系动词，意为变…，后面可以跟形容词， 常表示“状态变化”。
翻译：秋天天气变凉。 It will get cool in autumn.
另外我们还学过get的另一个含义得到，如：get presents(翻译) 得到礼物
6. flying 动词ing 形式作主语
Eg: Drinking milk is good for you. / Walking and swimming are good exercises.
7. lots of 许多的，大量的
【拓展】lots of, many 与much
lots of 既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。可与many，much互换。
many 修饰可数名词，表示数量，反义词是few。
much修饰不可数名词，表示数量，其反义词是little。
8.(对某人来说)做某事是…的 It’s + adj. +for sb.+ to do sth.
翻译: 回答这个问题对他来说很容易。It’s very easy for him to answer this question.
9.形容词比较等级、最高级的构成及用法：（见课本P147—149页）重点复习
10.形容词变为副词的方法 ：
1）一般在形容词的词尾加ly slow—slowly
2）以“辅音字母+y”结尾的形容词，变y为i加ly happy-- happily
3）以-ble或-le结尾的形容词，去e 加ly possible – possibly
4）以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时直接加ly careful-- carefully
5）部分形容词和副词同形。hard late early fast …
11.在表示事物的长度时用long, 高度用high，宽度用wide.
①The mountain is about 100 metres high. 这座山大约100米高。
②The room is about 50 metres long. 这个房间大约50米长。
③The river is about 30 metres wide. 这条河大约30米宽。
12.in, on, to 方位词与介词连用时，in表示在范围之内; on表示在范围之外但相连；to表示在范围之外并不相连。Qingdao is on the east of Weifang. Qingzhou is in the west of Weifang. Jinan is to the west of Weifang.
13.动身去某地leave for spl. 离开某地leave spl. 离开A地去B地leave A for B
1) I am leaving for Beijing. 我要动身去北京。 2) I am leaving Beijing. 我要离开北京。
3) I am leaving Shanghai for Beijing. 我要离开上海去北京。
14.population 意为“人口居民”，常与定冠词“the”连用。
①Hong Kong has seven million people.香港有七百万人口。（就划线部分提问）
→What’s the population of Hong Kong
②population作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。
The population of China is large.中国人口众多。
但是当主语是表示"人口的百分之几、几分之几"时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如:About seventy percent of the population in China are farmers.中国大约有百分之七十的人口是农民。
③表示人口的多或少时，要用“large”或 “small”。 The population of China is larger than that in Japan.初三一轮复习八上Module9-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M9-10中出现的danger等单词、find out等短语，并灵活运用动词不定式。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会在表达不同意见时照顾他人的感受；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M9-10词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M9-10重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择:
( )1.People see Yang Liwei _______ a great hero. A. as B. for C. to D.in
( )2. Do you have any difficulties _______ this passage
A. understanding B. understand C. to understand D. understood
( )3. Her mother was ill. Her father _______ a doctor.
A. sent up B. send for C. sent for D. send away
( )4.---Would you like to go out for walk with us
---_______. But I must finish my homework first.
A. Of course not. B. That’s all right. C. Yes, I do. D. I’d love to.
( )5.The old granny liked to ____ a story to the children.
A. tell B. talk C. say D. speak
( )6.Daming’s _____ is football.
A. mainly interesting B. main interesting C. mainly interest D. main interest
( )7. The boy is not _____ to go to school.
A. old enough B. enough old C. young enough D. enough young
( )8. She has no paper _________. A. to write B. to write with C. write on D. to write on
( )9. The teacher often tells Lily and Lucy _________too much time ______TV.
A. not to spend; watch B. to not spend; watching C. don’t spend; watch D. not to spend; watching
( )10. She was surprised _______ me last night. A. to see B. see C. saw D. seen
( )11. China is one of in the world.
A. the bigger country B. the biggest countries C. bigger countries D. biggest countries
( )12. I have to buy this expensive gift for my mother, but I don’t think it’s .
A. enough money, good enough B. enough money, enough good
C. money enough, enough good D. money enough, good enough
( )13. —It’s too hot. Would you mind _______ the door — _______. Please do it now.
A. to open; OK B. opening; Certainly notC. opening; Of course D. to open; Good idea
( )14. You must to your sister for so impolite.
A. say sorry, is B. say sorry, being C. to say sorry, be D. saying sorry, to be
( ) 15. There must be in today’s newspaper, because a lot of people bought it.
A. interesting something B. anything interesting C. interesting everything D. something interesting
二、动词的适当形式填空:
1.He bought many videos to help him ________(write) the story.
2.I want ___________(continue) _______________ (study) after I graduate from the university.
3.I decided ____________(buy) some flowers for my mum.
4. –Would you like __________(go) shopping with me -Yes, please. That sounds ___________(great).
5. Ba Jin is one of the ______________(famous) ___________(writer) of the ___________(twenty) century.
6.Jack has __________(interest) in basketball.
7.Jack is ___________( interest)) in basketball
8. The children began ___________(learn) ____________(swim) when he was
9. They have sent some workers ____________(help) the farmers.
10. The boys were looking forward to ___________ (have) a holiday again.
11. It is very nice of them ___________ (send) me the flowers.
12. Remember _____________ (not be) late next time.
13. A strange noise made me _____________ (stop) my work.
14. We stopped _____________ (talk) with each other after finishing the work.
15. Alice prefers __________ (stay) outside to ___________ (stay) inside.
16. ________________ (see) from the hill, the city looks very beautiful.
17. His wish is ____________ (become) a lawyer.
18. There are about 400people___________ (live) in the village now.
19. He comes here ____________（visit）his teacher .
20.Why not _______（use）the computer___________（help）you .
三、拓展训练：（C层选做）
1. 见到大熊猫我很激动. (be excited to ..) ________________________________________________
2. 想到那些濒危动物令人伤心. (be sad to..) ________________________________________________
3. 我们需要更好地保护他们. (need to) ________________________________________________
4. 很难阻止捕杀. (It’s hard to..) ________________________________________________
5. 许多动物没有生存的地方. (live in) ________________________________________________
6. 让我们找出我们能做的来帮助他们吧。(find out)
_________________________________________________________________________________
7. 众所周知,Sally的主要兴趣是音乐.(main interest)__________________________________________
8. 我的父母提出带我们去那里. (offer to)________________________________________________
9. 我尽力去理解它,但是几乎是不可能的. (try to do )_________________________________________
10. 他尤其以他的剧本茶馆著名.(be famous for) ______________________________________________Module 9—10 复习学案
组别______组号________姓名________等级________
【学习目标】：1.理解构成新词的基本方法，能够灵活运用M9-10中private等重点单词，over there
等短语及知识点。
2.通过自主学习，小组合作，解决疑难，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.培养体谅，关爱的情感，激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识回顾】
Part1: Module9-10重点短语集锦：
Module9:
1.知道结局会怎样know what the ending will be 2.不是好笑的事，严肃问题It’s no laughing matter.
3.寻找look for 4.在那边over there 5.与…谈话have a word with sb.
6.这是好消息。That’s good news. 7.我可以转交给他吗？Shall I give it to him
8.到那边跟他说话go over to speak to him 9.遇到大麻烦be in deep trouble
10.有快乐结局的卡通片a cartoon which has a happy ending 11.扮演角色play a part/role in
12.赢得了年轻人的心win the hearts of young people 13.讲了一个…故事tell the story of
14.飞进桃园fly into a peach garden 15.想吃多少桃子就吃多少eat as many peaches as he likes
16.搞得乱七八糟make a mess 17.成为常用语become a common expression
18.回到某地return to sp. 19.去丛林旅行travel to the jungles 20.自从ever since
21.被翻译成50多种语言be translated into more than 50 languages
22…的整套系列the whole series of… 23.开始被出版begin to be published
24.生活在自己的梦幻世界中live in his own private dream world
25.经历过生活的成年人adults who have experienced life
Module10:
1.有点累a bit tired 2.放弃give up 3.保持健康Keep/stay healthy/fit
4.为奥运会训练train for the Olympics 5.去上一个体校go to a sports school
6.需要大量运动need to take a lot of exercise 7.跑步go running
8.举重训练do weight training 9.照相机怎么了？What happened about the camera
10.遇到某人bump into sb 11.看上去像look like 12.使他很感兴趣interest him very much
13.对…不好be bad for 14.很难做…be difficult to do 15.表现欠佳behave badly
16.了解know about 17.有很多钱花费have very much money to spend 18.决定干…decide to do
19.拒绝干…refuse to do 20.最后in the end 21.说服某人干某事persuade sb to do
22.在学校禁止垃圾食品ban junk food from schools 23.在…方面花钱spend money on sth
24.赞成某人的想法agree with sb 25.展示他参观学校的情境show his visits to the school
Part2: Module9-10重点句子集锦
1.我喜欢的卡通片里有许多笑话。 The cartoons I like have lots of jokes.
2.这不是让你可笑的那些卡通片之一。 This isn’t one of those cartoons which make you laugh.
3.我喜欢的角色是像超人或者蜘蛛侠一样的英雄。
And the characters I like are heroes like Superman or Batman.
4.我们需要一个像超人能拯救Tony的人。 We need someone like Superman who can save Tony.
5.我有一个上面写着他的名字的相机。 I’ve got a camera which has got his name on it.
6.如果Tony告诉他爸爸他丢了那部他借的相机，他将….
If Tony tells his father that he’s lost the camera he borrowed, he’ll be …
7.但是可能它将会是有美好结局的卡通片。 But perhaps it’ll be a cartoon which has a happy ending
8.它讲述的是一只猴子带领群猴对抗玉皇大帝统治的故事。
It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys against the rule of the Emperor in heaven.
9.大闹天宫成为父母回到家或老板回到办公室后看到一片狼藉时的常用语。
“Havoc in heaven” has become a common expression used by a parent or a boss when they return to the House or office and see a mess.
10.杰米.奥利弗返回学校来了解孩子们在吃什么。
Jamie Oliver went back to school to see what the children were eating
11.他发现那些孩子很难教。 He found out that those children were difficult to teach.
12.最后，杰米说服他们，让他们品尝一下他做的饭菜，大家都很喜欢吃。
In the end, when Jamie persuaded them to try his cooking,they liked it!
13.他告诉他们需要在学校禁止垃圾食品，培训厨师，教育孩子并在学校伙食方面投入更多资金.
He told them that they needed to ban junk food from schools, train the cooks, educate the children and spend more money on school dinners.
14.Jamie 是一位厨师，他的观念正在改变着英国学校的饮食.
Jamie is a cook whose ideas are changing school dinners all over Britain.
Part3: Module9-10重要知识点集锦
1. have a joke with sb. 和某人开玩笑→Don’t be so serious, he _____________________________.
2).play jokes on sb. 拿某人开玩笑，戏弄某人Mark Twain always likes to ____________________.
2. Imagine用法: (1) imagine sth (2) imagine doing sth. (3) imagine +that从句
→我不能想象没有水的生活。_________________________________________________________
3. word n. 1) 单词 例：A child asks his or her parent how to spell a word.
2) 语言 ①have a word with sb. 和某人说几句话 ②have words with sb. 同某人争吵→我能和你聊一下吗？___________________→昨晚我同女朋友争吵了。____________________
③in a (或one) word 一句话，总而言之 ④in other words 换句话说，
5. 1）be in (deep) trouble 处于困境中 2）get into trouble 陷入困境
3）have trouble doing sth .做某事有麻烦 4) trouble sb to do sth 麻烦某人做某事
6. win the heart of... “赢得……的心”， What he did has _________________ (赢得了朋友们的心).
7. ever since 是since 的强调形式，“自从...以来”常与现在完成时连用。
ever放在since之前用来表达说话人强调主句或状态持续之长的口气。如果要表达主句的动作
或状态的持续时间之短，就不能使用ever。比较：
8. (1)50th birthday fiftieth为 ______ (序/基）数词，译为________________________,
(2) have/get sth done “让/叫/使/请别人做某事”。sth 与done表示的动作之间是被动关系。
联系：have sb do sth / get sb to do“让/叫/使某人做某事”。sb与do表示的动作之间是主动关系。
拓展: have/get sb doing“叫 / 让 / 使某人做某事”。sb与doing表示的动作之间为主动关系，
且动作正在进行或一直在进行。
9. give up 意为___________, 相当于stop doing sth ; (1) give up sth; (2) give up doing sth
stay fit 意为：_______________, stay 在此为系动词，一般接______词作表语，表示保持某种状态。 保持健康：stay/keep fit/healthy
10. interest 动词，意为______________. 使某人感兴趣_________________
interested. adj.感兴趣的. 对…感兴趣_________________ interesting. adj.令人感兴趣的
interest 还可做名词，表示“兴趣；感兴趣的事”，have/ show (an) interest in…对… 感兴趣
This ________(interest) book ________(interest)him a lot, so he read it all day.
11. prefer v.(preferred, preferred) 更喜欢，更喜爱. 主要用法有以下四种：
(1) prefer to do sth 更喜欢做某事 (2) prefer A to B: 相比起B来，更喜欢A.
(3) prefer doing sth to doing sth 比起干…来更喜欢干…
(4) prefer to do rather than do= would rather do than do 宁愿做…而不愿做…
12. (1) ① in the end 表示“最后、最终”的意思，等于__________或_____________.
② at the end of…是“在…的末尾/尽头”，后必须要加名词.
(2) persuade : v. 说服、劝说，主要的用法有：
①说服某人做某事：persuade sb to do sth == persuade sb into doing sth
②说服某人不做某事：persuade sb not to do sth== persuade sb out of doing sth
③ persuade (sb) + that从句
13. ⑴need: ①需要做某事 need to do sth. 例：为了取得好成绩，你需要努力学习.
②拓展：need doing… 表被动. 例：你的头发需要洗了. Your hair needs washing.
⑵ ban v. (banned, banned) 禁止 ①ban sth ② ban doing sth ③ ban sb/sth from doing sth
14. agree: v. 同意，主要用法有：⑴ agree with sb. 同意某人的意见.
⑵ agree to do sth. 同意做某事. 联想：拒绝/决定做某事 refuse/decide ___________ sth.
拓展：agree to：主要用来表示一方提出一项建议、安排、计划等，另一方同意协作
　 agree on：主要指双方通过协商而取得一致意见或达成协议：
【能力训练】
( ) 1. -----How is the weather tomorrow -----I don’t know if it tomorrow.
----Well, if it , I won’t go for a picnic with you.
A. will rain; will rain B. will rain ;rains C. rains ;will rain D. rains; rains
( ) 2. I want to have a with you about the problem. A. fun B. word C. play D. rest
( ) 3. If you see the cartoon film, it will make you .A. laugh B. to laugh C. laughing D. laughed
( ) 4. Miss Green is the only person_______ can help you with your English.
A. she B.whom C.which D. who
( ) 5. This is Tony’s camera. Could you
A. give it to him B. give him it C. give it him D. give for him
( ) 6. I’ve read sports news about the F1 race today.
A. two B. two pieces C. two piece D. two pieces of
( ) 7. --Can you translate this sentence Chinese for me I’ m poor in English.
--sure A. to B. into C. with D. for
( ) 8. The heroes of the cartoons are , on bags, office desks and so on.
A. anywhere B. nowhere C. somewhere D. everywhere
( ) 9. -----Here is a present for you, Jack. --- Wow! It looks nice.
A. truly B. nearly C. really D. hardly
( ) 10. Let the children go away. They’re making too much ______.
A. noise B. voice C. words D. sounds
( ) 11. It is impossible ______ her ______ the work in half an hour.
A. for; finish B. of; finish C. for; to finish D. of; to finish
( ) 12. The man made such a____speech that all the audience at the meeting felt _____.
A. boring; boring B. boring; bored C. bored; boring D. bored; bored
( )13. My uncle is one of the best　 in that restaurant. A. cook B. cooks C. cooker D. cookers
( ) 14. — let’s make a plan first. Do you agree 　　　me —Of course.
A. to B. with C. about D. on
( )15. —　　　 exercise do you take every day —I run 2 kilometres and swim 3.2 kilometres.
A. How many B. How much C. How long D. How often
( )16. What will happen　 you after you exercise for the first time A. with B. about C. to D. on
( )17. Mum, take it easy. You know we are 　　　 to look after ourselves.
A. enough old B. old enough C. young enough D. enough young
( )18. After the accident, Tom was 　　　 from driving.
A. freed B. asked C. wanted D. banned
( )19. — It’s 　　　 cold. Would you mind my closing all the windows —Not at all.
A. a kind B. a few C. a lot D. a bit
( )20. Tomatoes 　　　 me most. I enjoy eating them.
A. interest B. to interest C. interests D. interesting
二、完形填空
Once upon a time there lived a handsome prince—Prince Jack. One day , his mum, the Queen Bella, said “we must find you a 21 ” so day 22 day, the Queen asked all the princesses to _23_ her son.“I don’t want to marry any of them!”said Jake.“I want to marry a real princess!”Later, the Prince and the Queen thought of a(n) 24 .They made a 25 . Jake said,“ 26 a princess can’t feel this one little pea(豌豆) on it, she isn’t a real princess.”One stormy night, there was a knock at the door. A young lady stood there, wet and 27 . The Queen said, “Come in and rest!”“Did you sleep well ”asked Jake the next day.“No!”she said.“And my name is Fizz by the way.”“Oh dear, what was wrong ”asked the Prince.“There was a terrible bump(凸起) in the bed,”replied Fizz.“I 28 sleep all night long.”“Oh, this princess is not fake(假的)!”cried Jake.“Oh please, Princess Fizz, will you 29 me ”So, after a feast of joy and great laughter, they lived 30 ever after!.
( ) 21. A. girlfriend B. person C. wife D. servant
( ) 22. A. and B. or C. before D. after
( ) 23. A. meet B. see C. notice D. look at
( ) 24. A. try B. idea C. opinion D. advice
( ) 25. A. door B. house C. chair D. bed
( ) 26. A. Because B. If C. Unless D. As
( ) 27. A. sad B. tired C. excited D. angry
( ) 28. A. have to B. might C. couldn’t D. mustn’t
( ) 29. A. hate B. leave C. marry to D. marry
( ) 30. A. happily B. sadly C. quietly D. noisily
三、.阅读理解
People usually hate mice，but people almost all over the world like one mouse----- the famous Mickey Mouse．
Fifty years ago，most films had no sounds．A man called Walt Disney made a cartoon mouse．The cartoon mouse could talk in these films．He named his mouse Mickey Mouse．Soon Mickey Mouse became a good friend of both young and old people．Children liked to see their lovely friend，because he brought happiness to them．
Mickey is a clean mouse right from the beginning．Maybe this is why people love Mickey Mouse very much．In his early life，Mickey did some wrong things．People were very angry．They wrote to Disney and said they did not want Mickey to do wrong things．Because there were some things that Mickey could not do，Disney made a new animal called Donald Duck．He also made a dog，Pluto．This dog does some foolish and wrong things whenever he goes．Now our Mickey Mouse is more interesting as well．He is known as a star of beauty and wisdom（智慧）．He has his friends in almost every country．
( )1.Mickey Mouse first came out___．A.on TV B.in the film C.in the play D.in a picture-book
( )2.Children love Mickey Mouse because _______． A. he brought them joy and laughter
B. he made some mistakes C. he brought them cakes D. he made them angry
( )3.The dog，Pluto，is ______________．
A. a fool that often does something wrongB.a clever dog that can do everything well
C.a beautiful dog that people like very much D.a famous dog as a star of beauty and wisdom
( )4.The best title for the passage is ______________．
A. Pluto B．Donald Duck C. Donald Duck and Pluto D. Mickey Mouse and Donald Duck
( )5. Why did Disney make Duck？_________．
A. Because Mickey Mouse was very lonely．
B. Because there were some things that Mickey could not do．
C. Because Mickey was able to do everything．
D. Because people didn’t like Mickey Mouse any more．
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习七下Module4-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module4-6重点短语集锦：
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm
13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs
16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high
5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内）
10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内）
12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名
14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China
22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
Part2: Module4-6基础知识集锦：
1. no one表示“没有人、无人”。作主语时谓语动词用单数。 Eg.没有人在这。No one is here.
2. by 介词，含义有“用、通过、靠”等，表示方法、手段、或方式。
by后接交通工具，不加冠词。如：乘（飞机，火车，公交车….): by (plane, train, bus…).
【拓展】with 介词，“用（工具）” Eg. 用粉笔：with chalk 用手：with hands
in 介词，“用语言” Eg. 用英语：in English
3. use 动词，意为“使用，用，利用” e.g.我能用你的钢笔吗？can I use your pen？
use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事 e.g. We use the Internet to do our homework.
4. send v. send sth. to sb.=send sb. sth. （发）送给某人某物
类似词：give/ pass/bring sth. to sb.=== give/ pass/bring sb. sth.
make/buy/cook sth for sb === make/buy/cook sb sth
5. get It will get warm at the North Pole so the seas will be very rough.
get warm 意为变暖。在这get为系动词，意为变…，后面可以跟形容词， 常表示“状态变化”。
翻译：秋天天气变凉。 It will get cool in autumn.
另外我们还学过get的另一个含义得到，如：get presents(翻译) 得到礼物
6. flying 动词ing 形式作主语
Eg: Drinking milk is good for you. / Walking and swimming are good exercises.
7. lots of 许多的，大量的
【拓展】lots of, many 与much
lots of 既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。可与many，much互换。
many 修饰可数名词，表示数量，反义词是few。
much修饰不可数名词，表示数量，其反义词是little。
8.(对某人来说)做某事是…的 It’s + adj. +for sb.+ to do sth.
翻译: 回答这个问题对他来说很容易。It’s very easy for him to answer this question.
9.形容词比较等级、最高级的构成及用法：（见课本P147—149页）重点复习
10.形容词变为副词的方法 ：
1）一般在形容词的词尾加ly slow—slowly
2）以“辅音字母+y”结尾的形容词，变y为i加ly happy-- happily
3）以-ble或-le结尾的形容词，去e 加ly possible – possibly
4）以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时直接加ly careful-- carefully
5）部分形容词和副词同形。hard late early fast …
11.在表示事物的长度时用long, 高度用high，宽度用wide.
①The mountain is about 100 metres high. 这座山大约100米高。
②The room is about 50 metres long. 这个房间大约50米长。
③The river is about 30 metres wide. 这条河大约30米宽。
12.in, on, to 方位词与介词连用时，in表示在范围之内; on表示在范围之外但相连；to表示在范围之外并不相连。Qingdao is on the east of Weifang. Qingzhou is in the west of Weifang.
Jinan is to the west of Weifang.
13.动身去某地leave for spl. 离开某地leave spl. 离开A地去B地leave A for B
1) I am leaving for Beijing. 我要动身去北京。 2) I am leaving Beijing. 我要离开北京。
3) I am leaving Shanghai for Beijing. 我要离开上海去北京。
14.population 意为“人口居民”，常与定冠词“the”连用。
①Hong Kong has seven million people.香港有七百万人口。（就划线部分提问）
→What’s the population of Hong Kong
②population作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。
The population of China is large.中国人口众多。
但是当主语是表示"人口的百分之几、几分之几"时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如:About seventy percent of the population in China are farmers.中国大约有百分之七十的人口是农民。
③表示人口的多或少时，要用“large”或 “small”。 The population of China is larger than that in Japan.
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15______ long. And it’s a ______ river.
A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old
C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million ____in Hong Kong.
A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a _______ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ____ the east coast ______ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think _____ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu ______ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. is C. has D. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. with B. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ______ a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that city A. it B. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister____the song together now A. sing B. singing C. are singing D. is singing
( )18.Football is than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __________, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__________the same mistake again. A. make B. is make C. makes D. is made
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher__________ (clear). 2. About 200 people __________ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s ________________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother _______ (write) a letter to my sister and I _________ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.Module 3--4 复习学案
组别______组号________姓名________等级________
【学习目标】 1、牢固记忆Module3-4中出现的重点单词，短语、句子及知识点，并能灵活运用。
2、通过自主学习，小组合作，解决疑难点，总结归纳出运用规律和方法。.
3、热爱体育运动，顽强拼搏，激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识回顾复习】
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module3:
1. 与…对抗 be against 2. 代表，象征 stand for
3. 打败某人beat /defeat sb. 赢得比赛 win the match/ game
4. 一场艰苦的比赛 a tough match 5. 看某人打几次比赛 see sb. play several times
6. 没有机会 have got no chance 7. 让某人感到烦恼、困扰 get to sb.
8. 对某人很生气 be mad / angry with sb. 9. 被选派代表中国 be chosen to represent China
10. 首先 first of all 最重要的是 above all 毕竟 after all
11.邀请某人参加比赛 ask/invite sb. to competitions 被邀请参加比赛be invited to competitions
12. 中国在世界体坛成功的标志a symbol of China’s international sporting success
13. 确保，保证 make sure / be sure 14. 一夜成名an overnight success
15. 建立， 创立set up 16. 和…比较 compare...with 把...比作 compare...to
17.用这些信息来调整他的训练计划 use the information to change his training programme
18. 赢得第一块奥运金牌 win the first Olympic gold medal
19. 努力争取更多奖牌 go for more medals 20.鼓励某人做某事 encourage sb. to do sth.
Module4:
1.在去博物馆的参观中 on the visit to the museum 2.在去博物馆的路上 on the way to the museum
3..从现在开始 from now on 4.从书上获取信息 get information from books
5.普通杂志an ordinary magazine 网络杂志 an online magazine 6. 意味着用纸mean using paper
7.好多年for ages / for years 8.被…取代,被…替换 be replaced by 9.几个月 a couple of months
10.用手工 by hand 11.我保证！I promise 12.能帮我一个忙吗 do a favour / ask a favour
13.关灯turn off lights 打开turn on 调大turn up 调低 turn down
14. 浏览杂志look through magazines 15.学会在纸张上写字learn to write words on paper
16. 由…制成be made of( 看出原材料) be made from( 看不出原材料) 17.一次 at a time
18.因此,所以 so / as a result 19.通过将墨涂在木板上 by putting ink on a wooden block
20.在11世纪初期 at the beginning of the 11th century
21.喜欢做..而不做prefer to do ..rather than do 22. 以便;所以 so that 23.网上阅读read online
Part2: Module3-4重点句子集锦
Module3
1. 你怎样认为？ What do you reckon // What do you think of
2. 他们对我们是如此的生气，以至于会尽最大的努力去获胜，仅仅来向我们表明我们是错误的。
They are so mad with us that they’ll try harder to win, just to show we’re wrong.
3. 不要让别人的坏习惯影响到你。（get to） Don’t let them get to you.
4. 我认为我们这么出色，我想我们会被邀请参加奥运会。（so…that）
I think we’re so good that we’ll be asked to play in the Olympic Games.
5. 刘翔的教练将会建议他怎样成为一名优秀运动员，他的经纪人会建议他怎样成为一个明星
Li Xiang will be advised by his coach on how to be a great sportsman, and by his manager on how to be a star
6.他发现生活中不仅仅是训练了吗？ Has he found out that there’s more to life than training
7.他会被鼓励离开体育吗？ Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport
Module4
1.书可能被电脑取代吗？(be replaced by) Can books be replaced by computers
2.自从你妈妈生日聚会以来它就一直关着。（turn off）
It has been turned off since your mum’s birthday party.
3.我想在下周全校学生参观博物馆的时候拍些照片。
I would like to take some photos on the school visit to the museum next week.
4.计算机已用于教室，报纸和杂志也可在网上阅读。
Computers are used in classrooms, and newspapers and magazines can be read online.
5.这些设备与书比起来有小又轻便以至携带很方便。
These machines are smaller and lighter than books so that they can be carried easily.
6.第一本印刷书籍是将墨涂在木板上，把纸铺在上面把字拓下来而制成的。
The first printed books were made by putting ink on a wooden block and holding the paper against it.
7.当印刷术在11世纪初有很大发展时，书能印刷得（较以前 ）更快，更便宜。
When printing was developed greatly at the beginning of the 11th century, books could be produced
more quickly and cheaply.
8.从那之后，知识和思想传播迅速，从某种程度上说可与20世纪因特网的引入相媲美。
After that, knowledge and ideas spread quickly, in a way that can be compared with the
introduction of the Internet in the 20 th century.
9.但在那时，书依靠手工一次只能制作一本。
But in those days, books could only be produced one at a time by hand.
Part3: Module3-4重要知识点集锦
1. 感官系动词： look, feel, sound, taste, smell 后加形容词
感官动词：watch, notice, hear, find 后跟do和doing
2. so…that 与too…to 和enough to的转化
He is so young that he can’t join the army. = He is _______ young _______ ________ the army.
He is so old that he can join the army.= He is _______ ________ _______ ________ the army.
3. invite意为“邀请，招待” invite sb to do sth 类似用法的动词：encourage、advise
4. make sure of sth. 确定某事 make sure to do sth.确信，务必去做某事
5. make sure+that 从句
Be sure of /about…对…有把握，确信be not sure if/ whether…对…不能确定 be (not) sure + 从句
(1) 务必准时到达这里。 ______ _____ _____ _____ here on time.
(2) 保证拿到金牌。 ______ ______ that you will _______ the _______ _________
(3 )我确定他明天会来。 I _______ ________ he ________ _________tomorrow.
(4) 我不确定他明天是否会来。I’m ____ _____ _____ he _____ ________ tomorrow
6. be /get used for +n //be used to do “被应用” be/get used to + n/doing”习惯于
used to do sth..”过去常常做
(1) 它是被用来喝酒的.It _____ ________ _______ drinking. It ____ ______ _____ drink.
(2) 我过去晚饭后常常散步,但是现在我习惯于呆在家里看书.
I______ ____ take a walk after dinner, but now I ____ _____ _____ _____ at home and reading
6. (1)prefer to do… rather than do… (2) would rather do than do
例：我宁愿出去也不呆在家里.(2种句式).
(1) I prefer to go out rather than stay at home. (2) I would rather go out than stay at home.
7. 在某人去某地的路上 on one’s way to … 做某事的方式、方法 the way to do/ of doing sth
我不知道做这个数学题的方法. ______________________________________________________
【能力训练】
一、单项选择
( ) 1. The 30th Olympic Games __________ in England in 2012.
A. is held B. will hold C. will be held D. was held
( ) 2. The story books________ by the writer in the 1960s.
A. are written B. were written C. wrote D. will be written
( ) 3. He often makes his sister _____, but this time he was made ______ by his sister.
A. laugh, to laugh B. laugh, laugh C. to laugh, to laugh D. laugh, laughing
( ) 4. Either you or he ____ the chance to give your speech at the meeting.
A. have B. has C. is D. are
( ) 5. The yellow sweater looks________ and it sells________.
A .well , good B . good, good C . good , well D. well, well
( ) 6. She always has the same excuse. Can you __________that she is honest？
A. be sure B. sure C. be sure of D. make sure to
( ) 7. Oh, the milk_______ strange. Do you think it’s OK to drink
A .was tasted B. is tasting C . tastes D. is tasted
( ) 8. --What does VOA ________ --Voice of America.
A .look for B. ask for C. stand for D. wait for
( ) 9. ---Did your school _________the basketball match ---No, we were ___________.
A. win; defeated B. win; lost C. lose; won D. lose; defeated
( )10. I hope you don’t compare me ______my sister.
A. to B. with C. for D. at
( )11. --Why are you so ________with Mary --She watched TV the whole night!
A. mad B. pleased C. worried D. sad
( )12. It’s nice _____you to __________ so much time showing me around your school.
A. of; take B. for; spend C. of; spend D. for; take
( )13. We use a big knife 　　　 the watermelon.
A. cut B. cutting C. to cut D. to cutting
( )14. — This dress feels soft. Is it made _____ silk — Yes, it is.
A. in B. by C. for D. of
( )15. — Is everything OK --- No, we still need _____ wood.
A. little B. a few C. some D. many
( )16. This afternoon our team will play ____ your team. A. again B. against C. to D. with
( )17. This is a ____ difficult problem that few students can work it out.
A. so B. so a C. such D. such a
( )18. – Who won the match –Their team ___ our team and their team ___ the game.
A. defeated ; won B. lost ; defeated C. lost to ; won D. won ; defeated
( )19. – Where are the book -- Don’t worry. They ___ here in no time .
A. have sent B. will be sent C. are sending D. have been sent
( )20. A number of new houses ____ in Wenchuan last year .
A. built B. are built C. were built D. will be built
二、用所给词的正确形式填空
1. A piano concert ____________(give) in the hall last Friday.
2. The flowers _______________(water) by Daming already.
3. Stars can’t ________________(see) in the daytime.
4. My father always encourages me _____________(tell) the truth.
5. So far, many man-made satellites ______________(send) up into space.
6. She won’t go out in the evening until she ____________(allow)
7. The hard task can’t _______________(finish) in two months.
8. Knives _________________(use) for cutting things.
9. Lingling ________________(ask) Betty to attend her birthday party yesterday.
10. Can the magazine _______________(take) out of the library
11.Great changes __________(take) place in the last ten years.
12.We _________(not allow) to talk loudly in the reading room.
三、任务型阅读
Jane Austen(简.奥斯汀) is one of Britain’s female writers. She was the seventh of eight children and never lived apart from her family. To entertain(娱乐) themselves, the children wrote and performed plays. ①Even as a little girl, Jane was encouraged to write by her parents.
As a young woman, Jane enjoyed dancing, and she went to many parties that were held in the great houses of the neighbourhood. She loved the country(乡村) and enjoyed long country walks.
In her early twenties she began to write her most famous works—Sense and Sensebility(理智与情感), Pride and Prejudice(傲慢与偏见), Northanger Abbey(诺桑觉寺). ②Yet these books were not published until many years later. She died in her sister’s arms on 18 July, 1817. She was 42 years old. None of the books that were published in Janes Austen’s lifetime had her name on them—They were described as being written “ By a lady.”
As a result, Jane Austen was not very famous in her lifetime, and her books only became popular after death. Her books are now some of the most read and studied books in the world.
When and where was Jane Austen born
将句子①改为主动语态________________________________________________
What did Jane enjoy as a young woman ____________________________________
将划线句子②翻译为汉语______________________________________________
Why was Jane Austen not very famous in her lifetime ________________________
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习七上Module7-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-10重点短语集锦：
Module 7
have Chinese 上语文课2.have an English lesson 上英语课3.What are your lessons today 你今天上什么课？4.at eight o’clock 在八点5.at half past ten 在十点半6.talk about one’s homework 谈论某人的作业7.What about you 你呢？/你怎么样啊？8.get up 起床9.have breakfast / lunch / dinner 吃早餐/午饭/晚饭10.go to school 上学11.have a break 休息12.talk with my friends 与我的朋友交谈/聊天13.have meat and rice 吃肉和米饭14.go home 回家15.get home到家16.finish school 放学17.study science / maths 学习科学/数学
Module 8
1.send him a card 送他一张卡片=send a card to him2.make him a cake 做一个蛋糕给他=make a cake for him3.give her a game 送一个游戏给她=give a game to her4.have a birthday party 举行生日晚会5.watch football 看足球比赛 =watch a football match6.go to one’s party 去某人的晚会7.a lot of 大量，很多 =lots of8.go to concerts 去听音乐会9.in / from the USA在/来自美国10.on television 通过电视11.CDs by Twins Twins的CD12.a box of chocolates 一盒巧克力13.a pair of trainers 一双软运动鞋14.a pair of jeans 一条牛仔裤15.in one’s home 在某人的家里16.at home 在家17.at once 马上，立即18.give flowers as presents 送花作为礼物
Module 9
Welcome to Beijing Zoo 欢迎到北京动物园 2.sixteen thousand 一万六千 3.in / from the Arctic 在/来自北极4.There she is. 她在那里。 5.in Europe / Africa / Asia 在欧洲/非洲/亚洲
be European / African / Asian是欧洲的/非洲的/亚洲的;是欧洲人/非洲人/亚洲人
7.European wolves欧洲的狼8.African monkeys 非洲的猴子9.in the wild 在野外in the forest 在森林in the jungle 在热带雨林in the desert 在沙漠in (the) grassland 在草原10.around the world 全世界，世界各地=all around the world=all over the world 11.for twelve hours 十二个小时 12.15 kilos of bamboo 15公斤竹子13.stay healthy 保持健康
Module 10
1.switch on the computer 开电脑 2.open a new document打开新文档 3.write a name for the document 为文档写个名字 4.download music from the Internet 从网上下载音乐 5.go online 上网6.make travel plans 做旅游计划 7.on the Internet 在互联网上 8.at the weekend 周末9.visit a website 浏览网页，访问网站 10.use my laptop for my lessons 用笔记本电脑备课//use the Internet to do their homework 用互联网来做作业 11.connect to the Internet 连接到互联网//connect the monitor to the computer 把显示器连接到主机 12.save a document 保存文档 13.print a document 打印文档 14.check the timetable 核对时间表 15.at work 在工作(at school 在学校at home 在家at break 休息时)
Part2: Module7-10基础知识集锦：
1.时间表达法在英语中表达时间可用直接表达法和间接表达法。
1).直接表达法 ①表达整点时间可用“基数词+o'clock”。其中o'clock 没有复数形式，也可省略。 one o'clock 1点钟 seven o'clock 七点钟
②表达非整点时间可用“钟点+分钟”两个基数词连用，译为“几点几分”; eight five 8点5分
2).间接表达法 ①如果分钟数不超过30，可用“分钟+past+钟点”表达。其中past是介词，意为“超过”。 ten past six 6点10分 eighteen past eight 8点18分
②如果分钟数超过30，可用“（60-原分钟数）+ to +(原钟点数+1)”表达。其中to是介词，意为“差”，表示“还差多少分钟到下一个整点”。two to two1点50 fifteen to seven 6点45分
Ps:当分钟数是15时，可用a quarter 代替，意为“一刻钟”。当分钟数是30时，可用half代替，意为“半点”。 【注意】如果表示时间的名词被this, that, tomorrow 或 yesterday修饰，它们的前面不需要用任何介词。
【拓展】at 还可以用at night(在晚上)，at last(最后), at weekends(在周末), at noon(在中午)
2.have 1) v. 吃 have breakfast/have lunch/have supper
2)“have+ a + 动词意义的名词” 表示短暂的动作。have a look/have a drink/have a walk
3.频度副词1).常见的频度副词有以下这些：always（总是）usually（通常）often（常常，经常） sometimes（有时候） never（从不, 是用来表示动作频率的，但程度上有别。一般说来可按频率大小排列：always＞usually＞often＞sometimes＞seldom（很少）＞hardly (几乎不)＞never（从不）
2).频度副词的位置：在be动词之后，第一个助动词或情态动词之后， 在行为动词之前。
对这些频度副词提问时，用how often。
【拓展】 sometime,sometimes,some time与some times
1).sometime是时间副词，指不确定的将来或过去某一点时间（某时候或任何时候），不指一段时间。2).sometimes是频度副词，指“有时”、“不时”的意思（=at times）。3).some time是名词词组，指一段时间（一些时间或若干时间）。4).some times指“几次”。
4. a pair of一对，一双 a pair of jeans //a pair of glasses注：This pair of shoes___is__ ( be) cheap.
5. thousand 意为“一千”，用法如下： 1.当前面有数词以及many，several等词修饰时，用单数形式，后面直接跟复数名词。如： two hundred students 200名学生 several thousand workers 几千工人2.当这词前面没有数词而后面有of 时，则一定要用复数形式，表示“数以千计，成千上万”，笼统的数目概念。如： thousands of dollars 数千美元 //hundred（百), million（百万）
6序数词：　序数词是指表示顺序的数词。(根据课本P127)
总结：①序数词一般由基数词在词尾加th构成。
②以ty结尾的基数词变为序数词时，要先把y变为ie，再加th。
③20以上的十位或百位的基数词，只将其个位上的基数词变为序数词就可以了。
注意：序数词前常用定冠词the或形容词性物主代词。
注：由基数词变序数词口诀：一，二，三，要全变，其余把th加后边．八减t，九去e，字母f代ve，ty变成tie。注释：one→first, two→second, three→third four→fourth six →sixth eight→eighth, nine→ninth, twelve→twelfth, twenty→twentieth
7. 常用方位介词的用法
1).on 表示“在……的上面”，通常只一个物体在另一个物体的上面，两者之间有接触。
2).in 表示“在……的里面”3).Under 表示“在……的下面”
4).behind 表示“在……的后面”5.next to 表示“紧挨着，在……的旁边”
8.send 发送 He sends me an email every day.他每天给我发封电子邮件。
Send for the doctor, please.请派人去请医生来。
My boss sends me to meet the foreigner. 我的老板派我去见外宾。
“send for”意思为________________send sb. to do sth.意思为______________________
【复习提升】
一、单项选择
( )1. There are five _________ story books on the bookshelf.
A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of
( )2. I met her ____a cold winter morning. A. on B. in C. at D. of
( )3. This pair of trainers _______to Mary. A. belong B. belongs C. is belong D. are belong
( )4. They have supper ____ half past six. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )5. He was born _______ March 4, 1997. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )6. The glasses _____ broken by Tom yesterday. A.was B. were C. is D. are
( )7. He lives on _____floor. A. the third B.three C.thirds D. a thrid
( )8. ____visitors come to China every year.
A. Thousands of B. Ten thousands C. Ten thousand of D. Thousand of
( )9. Don’t drop it. Please try _____ time. A. the second B. second C. two D. a second
( )10. Would you like some coffee or tea ---- _______. Water is ok.
A. Both B. Either C. Neither D. All
( )11. Do you know _____man in blue --Yes, he’s a professor( 教授) of____university.
A. the , an B. a, a C. /, the D. the, a
( )12. It’s ___nice day, isnt’ it --Yes, what ____fine weather! A. a, a B .the, the C. a, / D. the, /
( )13. How many students are there in the classroom --______. They are all in the lab.
A. Some B. All C. Neither D. None
( )14. What do you like, tea or coffee -- _________. I don’t mind.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. All
( )15. How many ____are there in your family A. bus B. car C. bike D. people
( )16. It’s a fine day today. How about _____ ---Sounds great.
A. go hiking B. go to hike C. going hiking D. to go to hike
( )17. Would you like to play basketball with us this afternoon
-- __________, but I have a lot of homework to do.
A. I’d love to B. I’m afraid not C. Sounds good. D. No problem
( )18. How far is your home from here --It’s about two______drive. A. hour’s B. hours C. hours’ D. hour
( )19. He is ____ unusual boy. A. a B.an C. /
( )20. He will go to America ____ next month.A. sometimes B. some times C. sometime D. some time
二、.单词适当形式填空
1. This pair of glasses ______________(belong) to Tom. And those glasses___________(be)John’s.
2. Today is my friend Jim’s __________(twelve) birthday and it is my mother’s __________(forty) birthday.
3. There _______(be) a pen and some books on the desk.
4. There are two _________(wolf) , three_________(mouse) and two__________(tomato) in the picture.
5. The pen is my friend’s. And _________(her) is on her desk. ______(my) is in my pencil box.
6. The rain______________(last) for two days. 7. Don’t make the childrn __________(talk) there.
8. Has he finished ____________(draw) the horse
9. There are some _______________(different) between Lucy and Liy, although they are twins.
10. Do the ___________(India) speak English as their first language
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
The story happened during the Second World War. A 70-year-old man lived in a small town of Germany. His
three sons all worked in the same factory where he 1 (work). After the war had begun, all his sons 2
(make) to join the army and they all died in the fights.
The old man was very sad. In the days that 3 (follow), he didn’t have enough food and was often hungry. And nobody helped him and he didn’t know how to go on 4 (live). It was becoming colder and colder. 5 (find) a way out, he had to beg from door to door. He had been to a lot of places and knew a lot.
Once he came to a village, but the villagers were all poor and couldn’t give him anything. He was too hungry 6 (go) to another village. Suddenly he saw a policeman 7 (stand) in the street and an idea came to his mind. He then shouted out, “Hitler is a pig!”
As he hoped, the old man was now enjoying some bread and a cup of hot tea 8 (give) by the policeman. “Don’t say so in our village, sir!” the policeman said after a while, “I’m sorry, sir, ” said the old man, “I 9 (not say )that again. I didn’t know it 10 (be) Hitler’s hometown.” “No, no, sir,” the policeman said in a hurry, “It’s a pig’s hometown.”初三一轮复习七上Module1-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M1-6中出现的international等单词、in front of 等短语，并灵活运用there be 句型，some, any ，可数名词和不可数名词等。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会制定合理的计划；热爱传统文化， 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M1-6词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M1-6重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. _____ is before Thursday.
A. Wednesday B. Friday C. Saturday D. Tuesday
( )2. Would you like _______ a football match
A. watch B. to watch C. watching D. watches
( )3. This is the twins’ bedroom. We can see ________beds .
A .May’ s and Joy’s B. May’ s and Joy C. May and Joy D. May and Joy’s
( ) 4. There is a red hat on the table .Please_____.
A put on it B put them on C put on mine D put it on
( ) 5. There _______ three desks and a computer in the room. A are B is C has D have
( ) 6. You can use the Internet ________ music.
A. downloads B. download C. downloading D. to download
( ) 7. —Hello! May I speak to Mr. Smith, please
—Sorry, he’s not in. Who's ____, Please
—________is Jack. A this , this B that, That C that ,This D this, that
( ) 8. -- ______ do you play tennis -- I play it every day.
A. How many B. How much C. How often D. How old
( )9. Daming ______ any brothers.
A. have got B. haven’t got C. has got D. hasn’t got
( )10. We often get together and ______stories.
A. say B. tell C. talk D. speak
( )11. There are more than 50 _____ in our school.
A. woman teachers B. woman teacher C. women teachers D. women teacher
( )12. Look！There's a beautiful table ______three legs over there.
A. have B. has C. with D. in
( )13. I have got a dog, _______ name is Zippy.
A. it’s B. their C. its D. it is
( )14. I have two pictures, one is big, ______ is small.
A. other B. the other C. others D. another
( )15. There is a picture ______ Lucy’s family ______ the wall.
A. of, on B. at, in C. of, in D. in, on
( )16. There are some birds _______ the picture ____ the classroom.
A. in, on B. in, in C. on. On D. on, in
( )17. ---Where is my pen ---_______. A. Here they are. B. Here it is. C. Here are you.
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. There are some _____________(tomato) and ___________(potato) in the basket.
2. Are there any __________(juice) in the glass
3. We have got some _________(apple) juice.
4. “Have you got any _________(beef) ” “Yes, we have.”
5. Milk and water are healthy _______(drink).
6. I want to have some _______(fish).
7.___________ (we) English teacher is Miss Li.
8. Mike ____________ (not can) swim. He is too young.
9. My ____________ ( father) car is white.
10. __________ ( I ) classroom is big and clean.
11. These _____________(America ) doctors ___________ (be ) in China now.
12. ____________ (this) are _________( I ) friends. They are from America.
13. What’s the __________(girl) name
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
Scientists are trying 1________ (make) deserts into good land again. They want 2________ (bring) water to the deserts, so people can grow crops and 3________ (live) there. They 4________ (learn) a lot about the deserts. But more and more of the earth is 5________ (become) deserts all the time.
Why is this true Scientists think that people are making deserts. People are doing bad things to the earth.
Some places on the earth 6________ (not have) much rain, but they don’t become deserts. This is because some green plants are growing there. Small green plants and grass 7________ (be) very important to dry places. Plants prevent the sun from 8________ (make) the earth drier. Plants prevent the wind from blowing the earth away. When a little bit of rain 9________ (fall), the plants hold the water. Without plants, the lands 10________ (become) deserts easily.
1______________ 2.______________ 3. ______________ 4. ______________ 5. _____________
6._____________ 7. _____________ 8._______________ 9._______________ 10._____________初三一轮复习七下Module4-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module4-6重点短语集锦：
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm
13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs
16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high
5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内）
10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内）
12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名
14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China
22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
Part2: Module4-6基础知识集锦：
1. no one表示“没有人、无人”。作主语时谓语动词用单数。 Eg.没有人在这。No one is here.
2. by 介词，含义有“用、通过、靠”等，表示方法、手段、或方式。
by后接交通工具，不加冠词。如：乘（飞机，火车，公交车….): by (plane, train, bus…).
【拓展】with 介词，“用（工具）” Eg. 用粉笔：with chalk 用手：with hands
in 介词，“用语言” Eg. 用英语：in English
3. use 动词，意为“使用，用，利用” e.g.我能用你的钢笔吗？can I use your pen？
use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事 e.g. We use the Internet to do our homework.
4. send v. send sth. to sb.=send sb. sth. （发）送给某人某物
类似词：give/ pass/bring sth. to sb.=== give/ pass/bring sb. sth.
make/buy/cook sth for sb === make/buy/cook sb sth
5. get It will get warm at the North Pole so the seas will be very rough.
get warm 意为变暖。在这get为系动词，意为变…，后面可以跟形容词， 常表示“状态变化”。
翻译：秋天天气变凉。 It will get cool in autumn.
另外我们还学过get的另一个含义得到，如：get presents(翻译) 得到礼物
6. flying 动词ing 形式作主语
Eg: Drinking milk is good for you. / Walking and swimming are good exercises.
7. lots of 许多的，大量的
【拓展】lots of, many 与much
lots of 既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。可与many，much互换。
many 修饰可数名词，表示数量，反义词是few。
much修饰不可数名词，表示数量，其反义词是little。
8.(对某人来说)做某事是…的 It’s + adj. +for sb.+ to do sth.
翻译: 回答这个问题对他来说很容易。It’s very easy for him to answer this question.
9.形容词比较等级、最高级的构成及用法：（见课本P147—149页）重点复习
10.形容词变为副词的方法 ：
1）一般在形容词的词尾加ly slow—slowly
2）以“辅音字母+y”结尾的形容词，变y为i加ly happy-- happily
3）以-ble或-le结尾的形容词，去e 加ly possible – possibly
4）以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时直接加ly careful-- carefully
5）部分形容词和副词同形。hard late early fast …
11.在表示事物的长度时用long, 高度用high，宽度用wide.
①The mountain is about 100 metres high. 这座山大约100米高。
②The room is about 50 metres long. 这个房间大约50米长。
③The river is about 30 metres wide. 这条河大约30米宽。
12.in, on, to 方位词与介词连用时，in表示在范围之内; on表示在范围之外但相连；to表示在范围之外并不相连。Qingdao is on the east of Weifang. Qingzhou is in the west of Weifang.
Jinan is to the west of Weifang.
13.动身去某地leave for spl. 离开某地leave spl. 离开A地去B地leave A for B
1) I am leaving for Beijing. 我要动身去北京。 2) I am leaving Beijing. 我要离开北京。
3) I am leaving Shanghai for Beijing. 我要离开上海去北京。
14.population 意为“人口居民”，常与定冠词“the”连用。
①Hong Kong has seven million people.香港有七百万人口。（就划线部分提问）
→What’s the population of Hong Kong
②population作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。
The population of China is large.中国人口众多。
但是当主语是表示"人口的百分之几、几分之几"时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如:About seventy percent of the population in China are farmers.中国大约有百分之七十的人口是农民。
③表示人口的多或少时，要用“large”或 “small”。 The population of China is larger than that in Japan.
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15______ long. And it’s a ______ river.
A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old
C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million ____in Hong Kong.
A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a _______ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ____ the east coast ______ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think _____ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu ______ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. is C. has D. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. with B. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ______ a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that city A. it B. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister____the song together now A. sing B. singing C. are singing D. is singing
( )18.Football is than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __________, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__________the same mistake again. A. make B. is make C. makes D. is made
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher__________ (clear). 2. About 200 people __________ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s ________________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother _______ (write) a letter to my sister and I _________ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.初三一轮复习九下Module9—10
【学习目标】
1.熟记M9-10中出现的achieve等20个单词、no matter等10个短语，能灵活运用从句。
2.自主学习，小组合作，超越自我，掌握用画知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.热爱生命，培养积极乐观的生活态度；激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module9-10重点短语集锦：
Module9重点短语:
1. 在…方面取得进步 make progress in/with… 2. 还不错not bad 3. 取得很大成绩 achieve a lot4. 为…感到自豪be proud of 5. 最擅长 be best at/do best in
6. 需要一定的努力require a certain effort 7. 看起来比实际上要简单 look simpler than it actually is8. 十分低的fairly/quite/very low 9. 代替in place of 10. 被用于……be used for 11. 即使 even though/ if 12. 而且 what’s more 13. 属于 belong to
14. 有一个..的机会 there is a good chance that... 15.... 的原因是.. the reason is that..
16. 在未来的20或30年中 the next 20 or 30 years
Module10重点短语：
1. 看上去很可爱look lovely 2. 享受这次聚会enjoy the party 3. 感到有点伤心feel a bit sad4. 去美国度假go to the USA for the vacation 5. 挂国旗hang international flags
6. 从地板到天花板 from the floor to the ceiling 7. 有点吵a bit noisy 8. 打算做某事 intend to do 9. 很长时间for long 10. 我希望如此I hope so 11.返回家乡go back to my home town12. 取些吃的东西 fetch something to eat 13. 举杯raise our glasses 14. 做演讲 make a speech15. 有点紧张 a bit/little nervous 16. 做演讲make a speech 17. 众所周知as we all know18. 跟某人说再见say goodbye to sb 19. 在… 末端 at the end of 20. 对…某人严格be strict with sb21. 体验很多快乐have a lot of fun 22. 一直all the time 23. 没有阳光的日子a day without sunshine24. 保持联系stay in touch 25. 回报pay sb back 26. 友谊的重要性the importance of friendship27. 从心底from the bottom of my heart 28. 祝你们有一个成功的将来wish you success for the future
Part2: Module9-10基础知识集锦
1. How much progress in English do you think you’ve made this year, Lingling
progress “进步，发展”，不可数名词，progress 前可用much, little, great, no等词修饰.
短语：在…方面取得进步make progress in/with…
例：Tom现在在英语方面进步很大。Tom is now ______ ______ ______ ______his English.
2. I think I’ve achieved a lot, and I’m proud of what I’ve learnt.
(1) achieve 动词，“完成，达到（目的），取得”名词achievement
例：他的懒惰使他不可能获得成功。His laziness makes it impossible for him ____ _____ ___
(2) be proud of “以…为骄傲，为…而自豪”，相当于take pride in be proud to do sth 自豪的做某事
例：我们以祖国为骄傲。We _______ our motherland.=We ________our motherland.
3. Anyway, what I like most is that you can use English wherever you go in the world.
wherever/ whenever/whatever/whoever 不管在哪里/不管什么时间/无论什么/不管是谁,引导让步状语从句，通常可以和no matter where/when/what/who等引导的句子互换。
例：Whatever she says, you can’t believe her. =____ ____ ___she says, you can’t believe her.
无论你是谁，都应该遵守法律。_________ you are, you should ________the ________.
4.be used for 表示用于某种目的，介词for表示用途，后接名词或动词的-ing形式.
be used as 表示“用作…”介词as意思是“作为”，其后一般接名词，强调使用工具及手段.
be used by表示“被……使用”，by后接动作的执行者（宾语）。
(1) A sweater __________________ keeping warm ．毛衣是用来保暖的。
(2) In many countries，English________ the second language．
在许多国家，英语被用作第二语言。
(3) Chinese ____ the largest number of people in the world．汉语被世界上最多数的人使用。
5. in place of / instead of 均有“代替”之意。 A in place of B 表示以A代B
In making this dish, we used vegetable oil ________________ animal oil.
replace v.代替; take the place of 代替—动词短语
Computers can take the place of books. 书能被计算机代替吗？Can books be replaced by computers
6. beat ① n. 音乐的“强节奏” The beat of the music was so fast that I couldn’t follow it.
② v. 打败( 在比赛、竞赛、赛跑中)击败，打败，压倒
e.g. I knew you would beat them because you had played so well in the league.
我早知道你们会战胜他们的，因为你们在联赛中踢得这么好。
思考：beat,defeat与win 有什么区别？____________________________________
7. Do you intend to stay in China for long
①. intend to do sth “打算做某事”
e .g. Finny intends to go to Australia next year if everything goes well.
如果一切顺利的话,芬妮明年想去澳大利亚。
②.for long =for a long time “很长时间”
e. g .Have you been waiting for long 你等了很长时间吗
8. 区别：bring; take; fetch; carry 1) bring作“带来”“拿来”; 2) take是bring的对语，表“带去”“拿去”
3) carry表示“运载”、“携带”运送的方式很多，可以用车、船，也可以用手
4) fetch则表示“去拿来”（go and bring）的意思
选词填空： 1). The teacher said, “don’t forget to_____your dictionary to the class, Daming.”
2). Mum said, “don’t forget to __________your dictionary to the class, Daming.”
3). The box is too heavy for me to _____________.
4). Would you ___________ me a cup of coffee I am so thirsty.
9. It’s time to do sth 该做… 做…的时间到了 It’s time to start our work now.
It’s time for sb to do sth 该是…做…的时候了 It’s time for me to stop working .
It’s time for sth 该是…做…的时候了. It’s time for supper.
10. at the end of … 在…的末尾/结束的时候
At the end of this year we will have a party to celebrate the coming year.
相关短语: in the end 最后 例: In the end, he won the prize and became famous all over the world. end …with 以…结束 例: Please end the article with a simple sentence.
11. Others will go on to senior high school…
go on doing 继续做同一件事， He went on washing the dishes in the kitchen.
go on to do 继续做另外一件事 He went on to wash the dishes after answering the phone.
12. stay in touch 保持联系 =keep in touch with sb get in touch with sb 与…取得联系We have kept in touch with him for years, but last month he moved without informing us.
We got in touch with each other three years ago.
13. pay sb back 偿还… He has paid me back all that he had borrowed from me.
pay money for sth. 为…付…钱 He paid 2 dollars for the meal.
14. be strict with sb in sth 对…严格/严厉
My mother has always been strict with me in my study.
Part4: 巩固提升
一、用括号内单词的适当形式填空
1. My father often gives me some _____________(suggest) to help me keep healthy.
2. It’s difficult ____________(pay) you back for your help.
3. Do the _________(India) speak English as their first language
4. There are more people _________(speak) Chinese than English.
5. I enjoy ________________ (raise) hands to answer the teacher’s questions when in class.
6. Britain is a developed ______________(industry) country.
7. It’s time _____________ (say) goodbye to everyone here.
8. I look forward to _______________ (learn) English well after my hard work.
9. I spend much time ______________（stay）with my friends every day.
10. Before our traveling, we should find a good place _____________（visit）
11. I know the ______________（important）of English, so I have to know it well.
12. They went on ____________ (decorate) the room after cleaning the floor.
13. Who should ___________ （thank）on the school leavers’ party
14. I wish you _______________ (success) for the future.
15. China’s __________(tour) has improved a lot these years.
16. When I got to the cinema, the film ___________(begin)
17. English is a language which looks __________(simple) than it actually is.
18. At this time yesterday she was practicing _________(sing) songs.
19. Mike asked me if we ________(ask) any questions the next class.
20. She said they _______(know) each other for quite some time.
二、选择题
( )1.Do you like music _____ makes you relaxed A. that B. what C. who D. it
( )2.There ______ more people speaking Chinese in the future.
A will have B. will be C. is going to leave D. are going to have
( )3. ________hard the problem is, we will work it out.
A. No matter what B. No matter how C. No matter when D. No matter where
( )4. I wonder _______ they will arrive at the airport on time.
A. that B. when C. where D. if
( )5. You’d better take the map with you _______ you won’t get lost.
A. as long as B. as soon as C. now that D. so that
( )6. Joe has joined the club in________I was once trained.
A. where B. which C. that D. when
( )7.---Shall I give you a ride as you look so tired ---Thank you._______.
A.It’s your duty B. Don’ mention it C.Do as you like D. It couldn’t be better
( )8. You will be able to get good grades_______.
A. until you follow your teachers’ advice B. if you do some revision every day
C. before you begin to study hard D. while you are doing your homework by yourself
( )9. I want to write to Tom, but I don’t know ________.
A. where is his e-mail address B. where his e-mail address is
C. what his e-mail address is D. what is his e-mail address
( )10. —I wonder if your wife will go to the party. —If your wife ____ . So ___ .
A. does, does she B. will, will mine C. does, will mine D. will, will I
三、选做题
1. 什么也不能浪费，尤其不能浪费时间。
____________________________________________________________________________
2. 在老师们的帮助下，我们都已经取得了很大的进步。
___________________________________________________________________________
3. 他们对他们的新车感到很自豪。
4. 毕业后，我们应该保持联系。
5. 学一门外语需要付出一定的努力，无论它多么简单
__________ a foreign language ________ a certain _______, ________ ________ it is.
6. I don’t know __________he will come tomorrow . ________he comes ,I’ll tell you .
A. if; Whether B. whether; Whether C. if; That D. if; If
7. She used to _______ late. But now she is used to _______ early.
A. getting up, get up B. getting up, getting up C. get up, getting up D. get up, get up
PAGE初三一轮复习九下Module7—8
【学习目标】
1.熟记M7-8中出现的course等单词、play the role of等短语，并灵活运用动词不定式及被动语态。
2.自主学习，小组合作，超越自我，掌握用画知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.热爱生命，培养积极乐观的生活态度；激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-8重点短语集锦：
Module7重点短语:
1.看完莎士比亚的戏剧演出后 after the visit to the play by Shakespeare 2. 布置会场decorate the hall 3.准备一种传统食物 prepare a traditional dish 4.我猜 I guess 5.被加热 be heated up 6.用手吃的食物finger food 7.汤不行 Soup’s no good. 8.我明白你的意思I see what you mean 9.其实,事实上 in fact 10.像西方人那样做When in Rome, do as the Romans do. 11.在...开始时at the start of 12. 没有相似的表达法no similar expression 13.随便吃些…help yourself to sth. 14.更少的菜fewer dishes15.提供太多的食物offer too much food 16.被认为很粗鲁be thought quite rude 17.一吃完就离开leave as soon as you finish eating
Module8重点短语：
1.很高兴看到它be pleased to see it 2. 坐着不动stay still 3.与某人结婚marry sb. 4.扮演…的角色
play the role of.. 5.决定要自杀 play the role of.. 6.一对不幸的恋人a pair of star-crossed lovers
结束某人的生命take one’s life 8.听到对话ar the dialogue 9.尽力去做ry to do
10.做某事最好的方法the best way to do sth 11.给我留下了很深刻的印象. I’m impressed
12. 发现他们的口音很难理解find their accents very hard to understand
13.有许多的机会做某事have plenty of chances to do 14.的主题the subject of…
15.预定票 book tickets 16.以…而出名be well-known for17.各种音乐 all types of music
18.大量的… a huge number of… 19.在露天地里in the open air
Part2: Module7-8基础知识集锦
1. visit 参观，访问—短语： be on a visit to… 参观
He will visit Beijing.== He will be _____ _____ ________ _________Beijing.
2.Oh, soup’s no good. 汤不行。no good 表示不太好，没用处，没好处；
如： The film is no good, I think. 我觉得这部电影不太好。 no good 用法：（1）It’s no good + doing sth 做……是没有用的It’s no good ______（cry）now! (2) It’s not good for sth….是不合适的 These glasses are no good for wine. 这些杯子不适合用来喝红酒。
（3）no good to sb.对…没用处
因为我不会开车，所以汽车对我没用处。翻译：______________________________
3. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事 ---- an invitation n. 邀请
choose sb. to do sth. 选择某人做某事 （chose, chosen ）allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事
使役动词：make / let / have sb. do sth. --- sb. be made to do 被动语态补充出to
1). Don’t make the children ________(talk). 2). The boy was made _______ ________(clean) the classroom.3). Don’t allow the kid ________________(fight) with others.
4. When in Rome, do as the Romans do. 翻译：________________
(1) as 在此的意思为“像…一样” 教练让我们像他一样做。The coach asked us to do as he did.
判断以下as的意思：（2）As a Chinese, I’m proud of my motherland. ______________
(3) As they are laughing, they are dancing. ________
(4) As you weren’t there I left a message. ______
(5) He studies as hard as his brother. 词性：第一个___________, 第二个____________
5. No one will be cross. 翻译：________cross当形容词是________, 当动词是_____
对…很生气 be cross/angry with sb.例：干了一周的累活之后，所有的工人都对老板很生气。
After a _______ hard work, all the workers are very _________ ________ the boss.
当你过马路时要注意红绿灯。When you _______ the road, pay _____ _____ the traffic light.
6. 动词不定式的结构及其用法1.动词不定式的基本结构：to do
2. 动词不定式在句中可做的成分主要有以下几种：
(1) 主语，通常是做形式主语，主要存在于” It is +adj. + for/of sb to do sth” 句式中.
例: 晚上独自出门是很危险的. ____________________________________________
注: “find it adj to do sth” 发现做…是…的，其中it是作形式宾语.
(2) 宾语：放在及物动词后作宾语，类似的结构有：want/hope/begin/try/need/agree… to do sth例：Lucy已经答应和我们一起去了____________________________________
(3) 补语: 基本结构有 ask/tell/ invite/ advise/ want/ allow… sb to do sth
例: 老师不允许我们带手机. ___________________________________________________
(4) 表语：放在be后边. 例: 我的工作是教英语._________________________________
(5) 状语：可表目的或原因. 例: 他省钱是为了买一辆新自行车. _______________
听到这个消息我觉得很伤心.______________________________________________
定语：作后置定语，放在名词后. 例：给我一些吃的东西. __________________
7. 被动语态：各种时态的被动语态
一般现在时被动：is/are done 一般过去时：was/were done
一般将来时被动:will be done 情态动词被动: can/ should / must be done
现在完成时被动 have/ has been done 现在进行时被动：be being done
1).The students choose Tom to decorate the hall. 变为被动语态
Tom ______ _______ ______ ____________the hall.
2). We speak English. English__________ ______________.
3). You should give back the books on time. The books should _______ _______back on time.
4). We have visited the Great Wall. The Great Wall _______ __________ __________.
5). We must speak to old people politely. Old people must ________ _______ _______politely.
6). I often hear the girl sing in the next room. The girl ____often ______ _____ ________in the next room 7). A science lab___________________(build)in our school now.
Part4: 巩固提升
一、用括号内单词的适当形式填空
1. ____ (general),fewer dishes are prepared in the West than in China.
2. The classroom must _ ( keep) clean and tidy.
3. The ( gold) rule is:Watch the other people.Do as they do.
4. I __ (go) home as soon as the work is __ ( finish).
5. Have you heard the song Super Star ___ ( sing) by S.H.E
6. The Greens __________(have) a holiday in 3 weeks, but they haven’t decided where___(go).
7. I find it difficult ______(recite) this English passage. There are too many new words.
8. The students entered the classroom, ________(laugh) happily.
9. I forgot _______ (close) the door. As a result, some money ________(steal)by a thief.
10. A bird was seen ____________(fly) in the sky just now.
11. My car was broken on my way home, so I stopped______(check) what the matter is.(改错)
12. Would you mind _____________(drive) me home this evening
二、单项选择：
1. —Do you often play____________soccer with your friends
—No, I don’t like sports. I often play____________piano in my free time.
A. a, the B. the, / C. /, the D. the, a
2. Between the two hills______a deep river. A. are B. have C. has D. Is
3. —Do you like communicating with your friends on QQ or MSN
—____________. I’d rather ____________mobile phone.
A. Either, use B. Neither, use C. Both, not to use D. Neither, to use
4. The smile on Mother’s face suggested she____________.
A. was glad B. was surprised C. is pleased D. was annoyed
5. The woman____________all of her money to charities____________the poor.
A. gave off, to help B. gave up, helping C. gave away, to help D. gave, helping
6. The following diagram shows the temperature of Yantai in a year. Which month is the hottest in a year
A. January. B. June. C. August. . December.
7. In recent years, the economy of our country____________ rapidly.
A. is increased B. has increased C. increased D. has been increased
8. —I’m sorry for giving you so much trouble. —____________.
A. You’re welcome B. No problem C. All right D. It doesn’t matter
9. —I phoned you at 7:00 this morning. But there was no answer.
—Well, maybe I ____________morning exercises at that time.
A. was doing B. did C. is doing D. would do
10.Could you tell me____________？ A. where is the B. whose camera it is
C. what Jack was happened D. how long does it take you to the aquarium
11. Don't the bus until it stops. A. turn off B. put on C. get off D. set up
12. English well, one must have a lot of practice.
A. Speaks B. To speak C. Spoken D. Speak
13. Please turn to page and look at the picture in this unit.
A. twentieth; one B. twenty; one C. twentieth; first D. twenty; first
14. The Internet is really to us. We can download a lot of things from it.
A. useful B. difficult C. different D. safe
15. —Do you know the Englishman —Yes. I him for two years.
A. get to know B. have known C. knew D. got to know
选做题：
There is always something that we can never forget. And it can really change our life.
Time is important for everyone. It organizes our everyday moments. However, before I received a watch from my father, time never had any importance in my life. It organized my life and made me more responsible.
I received this gift on a Sunday. I had to go to the airport at 9:00 am to pick up Uncle Jim and take him to my father’s house. However, I was late because I hung out with my friends. Later on that day, around 11:00 am, I remembered my uncle and went to the airport to meet him, but I was too late. He had left the airport and taken a taxi to my father’s house.
I got to my father’s house at 2:00 pm that day. Looking at my father’s face, I felt ashamed (羞愧的) at that moment. My father asked me to sit next to him and he handed me this watch as a gift. Then he said, “Bob, did you have fun with your friends today ” “Yes, Father, and I’m sorry about not picking up Uncle Jim,” I replied. He then said, “What you did was not very nice and you should be sorry for your actions. I think you should learn something from it, and this watch will be a reminder for you in your future life.” The watch is very important to me, not because of its price, but because of the lesson that I learned from it.
Today I still remember my father’s words“Respect time and never be late for anything.”
根据短文内容，完成下列各题。
1. 请用“not…until… ”改写文中处划线句子，使其句意不变。
____________________________________________________________________________
2. 请改写文中处划线部分，使其句意不变。
___________________________________________________________________________
3. 请将文中处划线句子翻译成汉语。
___________________________________________________________________________
◆请根据文章内容回答问题。
4. Why did Bob feel ashamed when he arrived at his father’s house
___________________________________________________________________________
5. What lesson did Bob learn from his father
___________________________________________________________________________
PAGE初三一轮复习七下Module1-3
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module1-3重点短语集锦：
Module1重点短语:
1.站在长城上stand on the Great Wall 2.和你讲话talk to you3.在一次学校旅游on a school trip4.玩得很高兴have a good time 5.拍很多照片take lots of pictures 6.买一些礼物和明信片buy some presents and postcards 7.躺在太阳底下lie in the sun 8.非常喜欢这次学校旅行enjoy the school trip a lot9.等候，等待wait for 10.现在，此刻at the moment11.不同的地方in different places 12.做不同的事do different things
13.下班leave work 14.回家go home15.等公车wait for buses 16.赶火车run for trains17.开车drive cars/ a car 18.在家喝下午茶have afternoon tea at home19.走着去酒馆walk to pubs 20.喝一杯have a drink
21.吃晚饭have dinner 22. 在餐馆in restaurants 23.看（听）歌剧go to the opera24. 看芭蕾舞watch a ballet
25.穿衣打扮get dressed 26. 开始上课start lessons27.喝咖啡或可乐drink coffee or Coke 28.看望朋友see friends29.给家里打电话call home 30.看…look at31.再见see you soon! 32.晚安good night
Module2重点短语：
33.春节Spring Festival 34.为….准备好get ready for…35.学习舞龙learn a dragon dance 36.制作灯笼make lanterns37.在春节前夕on New Year’s Eve 38.扫地sweep the floor39.做饭cook the meal 40.在工作at work 41.元宵节Lantern Festival 42.扫去sweep away43.有很多传统have lots of traditions 44.打扫房子clean the house 45.扫去霉运 sweep away bad luck 46.把门窗漆红paint doors and windows red 47.好运good luck 48.剪纸paper cuts 49.用……来装饰……decorate…with…50.理发have a haircut
51.新年礼物New Year presents 52.舞龙和舞狮dragon and lion dancing 53.拜访家人和朋友visit family and friends 54.年糕sweet rice pudding 55.一种a kind of 56.在半夜at midnight 57.几天a few days 58.一年到头all the year round 59.庆祝….的诞生celebrate the birth of.. 60.对….感兴趣be interested in..
Module3重点短语：
1.在周末at the weekend 2.在周六早上on Saturday morning 3.查看我的邮件check my email 4.上钢琴课have a piano lesson 5.买一些新衣服buy some new clothes 6.去派对 go to a party
7.躺在床上，睡觉stay in bed 8.复习考试revise for the test 9.早起床get up early 10.吃野餐have a picnic 11.登上长城 walk up the Great Wall 12.期待 look forward to 13.乘飞机 take the/a plane 14.游览 do some sightseeing15.喜欢外国文化like foreign culture 16.参观紫禁城 visit the Forbidden City 17.交朋友 make friends ( with ) 18.躺在沙滩上lie on the beach 19.呆在宾馆里 stay in the/a hotel 20.龙舟节 Dragon Boat Festival 21.一位好厨师 a good cook 22.到达 get to / arrive in (at) 23.去观光 go sightseeing
Part2: Module1-3基础知识集锦：
Module1-2
1.for 为；为了1) 等待；等候wait for 2) 因为…而感谢某人thank sb. for sth. 3) 上学迟到be late for school 4) 为某人制作某物make sth for sb 5) 为我的课堂获取信息get information for my lessons
总结：for是介词，后跟动词ing形式、名词、代词宾格。
2.different adj. 不同的 构成短语be different from 与……不同
原句：At this moment, in different places of the world people are doing different things.
Your pen is different from mine.( 和我的不一样).
拓展：1) difference n. 不同点，差别，差异Eg. Can you find out four differences between the two pictures
2) different 反义词是same 例如：We are in the same class. (我们在同一个班)
3. dress n. 裙子，礼服 vt. （给某人）穿衣服, be/get dressed，意思是 “穿衣服”
原句：People aren’t getting up, washing or getting dressed.
put on 穿上，表示动作 原句:Put on your clothes.//wear 穿着，表示状态
①The woman is dressing her baby. (那位妇女正给她的孩子穿衣服)
② He put on his coat and left the house. (他穿上大衣离开了那间屋子)
③ Today she is wearing beautiful red dress.（今天她穿着一件漂亮的红裙子）
4.get ready for 为……做准备
原句：Are you getting ready for Spring Festival？
翻译：我们正在为期中考试做准备。We are getting ready for the mid-term exam.
be always ready to do sth. 乐于干某事We are ready to work for the 2010 EXPO in Shanghai.
5.paint vt. 给……上色 原句：We paint doors and windows red.
6. a few+可数名词复数， a little+不可数名词，两者都表示肯定，意为“一些”
few+可数名词复数, little+不可数名词, 两者都表示否定，意为“几乎没有”
7.take带走；bring带来
It is raining outside. Please take the raincoat with you. But remember to bring it back to me tomorrow.
too, either, also 也too置于句末，用逗号隔开;either置于否定句句末，用逗号隔开;also常置于句中，be动词之后，实义动词之前。
A re you learning a dragon dance, too 2) I don’t want to go there, either.
3) He is also a worker. 4) He also plays the piano.
9. be at work =be working 在上班 My parents are at work.. My parents are working.
10. help帮助 (1)He helps me( to )make a cake for my mother.他帮我为我妈妈制作蛋糕。
结构：帮助某人做某事 help sb. (to) do sth..
Computers can help us with our homework.电脑帮助我们做作业。help sb. with sth.帮助某人
11. decorate装饰We usually decorate the doors with paper cuts.我们通常用剪纸装饰门。
结构：用…装饰… decorate sth. with sth.
12. sweep away扫去 There is so much dust(尘土) on the floor. Sweep it away.
Module3
1. look forward to 期待，盼望. 其中to是介词，后跟名词或动名词.
原句：I’m looking forward to see my daughter and her daughter, my granddaughter.
eg. 1) I’m looking forward to your letter. 2) I’m looking forward to meeting you.
2. Would you like…. 你想要……吗 口语中常用来表示客气的邀请、请求、建议等。
肯定回答：Yes, I’d like to. / Yes, please. 否定：No, thanks. / I’d like to, but I…
原句：Would you like to come 【拓展】⑴表建议的句型：Let’s+v.= =What about+v.-ing
Eg. Let’s play basketball. =How about playing basketball
3. do some sightseeing 游览 原句：We’re going to do some sightseeing, because we like Chinese culture.
“do+v.-ing” 表示日常活动，在v-ing前还可以用some, the, all the, one’s等修饰。
（1）大明正在看书。Daming is doing some reading.
（2）短语拓展：跑步do some running 练字do some writing 买东西do some shopping
洗衣服do some washing 做饭do some cooking 读书 do some reading 打扫卫生do some cleaning
【拓展】go+v-ing 往往表示去做某事。如：go cycling, go fishing, go shopping, go sightseeing。
一、单项选择.
( )1. What about _______table tennis with me this afternoon A. playing B. play C. to play D. plays
( )2. She is going to stay in ______bed tomorrow morning A./ B. a C. an D. the
( )3. Look! Class One _____eye exercises.A. are to do B. do C. are doing D. are going to do
( )4. Daming is going to revise______ his test. A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )5. He _____have a field trip the day after tomorrow. A. is B. does C. is going D. is going to
( )6. Her parents____ for Beijing next Sunday. A. are leaving B. leave C. leaves D. is leaving
( )7. There will be____ rain and_____ winds next Monday.
A. heavy; strong B. strong; big C. strong; heavy D. big; strong
( )8. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. Playing D. play
( )9. In a few years’ time, there ______hundreds of trees on the mountain.
A. will have B. will be C. are have D. be have
( ) 10. Look! The students ______ the kites in the park. A. fly B. flying C. are flying D. Flies
( ) 11. Mary is a beautiful girl ______ long black hair. A. with B. has C. have D. to have
( ) 12. The boy _______ on the bed at the moment. A. is lying B. lie C. lies D.lying
( ) 13. ---What are your parents doing now
---They _____ cakes in the kitchen. A. making B. are making C. doing D. are doing
( ) 14. He _____ his homework in the classroom every day.
A. not do B. not doing C. doesn’t do D. isn’t doing
( ) 15. She often helps me ____ my homework. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( ) 16. ---Is Bob doing his homework ---No, he _________. He is _______ a letter.
A. doesn’t; write B. isn’t; is writing C. isn’t; writing D. doesn’t; writing
( ) 17. ---What is Tom doing ---He ______ in the river.
A. is swimming B. is swiming C.swims D. swimming
( ) 18. She can speak _______ Chinese now. A. a few B. few C. no D. a little
( ) 19. My parents are at _______ work. They are working. A. his B. their C. the D. /
( )20. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. playing D. play
二、单词的适当形式填空
1.There are many __________(foreign) in Beijing. 2.Please come __________(early) tomorrow than today.
3.What time do you __________(usual) get up 4.Our teacher are all very _________(friend) to us students.
5.Spring is the __________(good) time to plant trees. 6.Jim is going __________(fish) with Mr.Li tomorrow.
7. Let’s help him______________(mend) the machine. 8. I think he __________(visit) Qingdao next week.
9. They _________________(not use) paper and they will use computers.
10. No one __________(like) expensive things. 11. __________students_______(go) to school in the future
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时，可加助动词或情态动词等。
A girl in Nepal
This picture shows eighteen-year-old Katy Ross in Nepal, a small country north of India. Katy 1.______ (leave) school eight months ago and soon she 2.________ (go) to university. She loves traveling and decided 3._____(visit) Asia before she goes to university.
Now Katy4._______ (stay) with a family in the capital of Nepal. The family 5.______ (have) two children but many uncles and cousins, live with them in their big house. They have taken Katy to many parties. Katy has learnt a lot about the country since she6._______ (arrive) four months ago.
Katy teaches for four hours a day at a small school. All the classes7._______ (teach)in English, because the pupils8._______ (speak) English since the age of six. The older children speak English very well. Katy teaches writing, grammar, and art, all in English.
Katy9._______ (not, get) a lot of time to see Nepal since she came to this country. But soon she will stop 10._______ (teach) and travel around Nepal with a friend. "After that," Katy says, "we’ll visit more countries’ in Asia. We’re not sure which ones yet. "初三一轮复习七下Module1-3
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M1-3中出现的buy等单词、wait for 等短语，并灵活运用一般将来时。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会制定合理的计划；热爱传统文化， 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M1-3词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M1-3重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. What about _______table tennis with me this afternoon A. playing B. play C. to play D. plays
( )2. She is going to stay in ______bed tomorrow morning A./ B. a C. an D. the
( )3. Look! Class One _____eye exercises.A. are to do B. do C. are doing D. are going to do
( )4. Daming is going to revise______ his test. A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )5. He _____have a field trip the day after tomorrow. A. is B. does C. is going D. is going to
( )6. Her parents____ for Beijing next Sunday. A. are leaving B. leave C. leaves D. is leaving
( )7. There will be____ rain and_____ winds next Monday.
A. heavy; strong B. strong; big C. strong; heavy D. big; strong
( )8. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. Playing D. play
( )9. In a few years’ time, there ______hundreds of trees on the mountain.
A. will have B. will be C. are have D. be have
( ) 10. Look! The students ______ the kites in the park. A. fly B. flying C. are flying D. Flies
( ) 11. Mary is a beautiful girl ______ long black hair. A. with B. has C. have D. to have
( ) 12. The boy _______ on the bed at the moment. A. is lying B. lie C. lies D.lying
( ) 13. ---What are your parents doing now
---They _____ cakes in the kitchen. A. making B. are making C. doing D. are doing
( ) 14. He _____ his homework in the classroom every day.
A. not do B. not doing C. doesn’t do D. isn’t doing
( ) 15. She often helps me ____ my homework. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( ) 16. ---Is Bob doing his homework ---No, he _________. He is _______ a letter.
A. doesn’t; write B. isn’t; is writing C. isn’t; writing D. doesn’t; writing
( ) 17. ---What is Tom doing ---He ______ in the river.
A. is swimming B. is swiming C.swims D. swimming
( ) 18. She can speak _______ Chinese now. A. a few B. few C. no D. a little
( ) 19. My parents are at _______ work. They are working. A. his B. their C. the D. /
( )20. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. playing D. play
二、单词的适当形式填空
1.There are many __________(foreign) in Beijing. 2.Please come __________(early) tomorrow than today.
3.What time do you __________(usual) get up 4.Our teacher are all very _________(friend) to us students.
5.Spring is the __________(good) time to plant trees. 6.Jim is going __________(fish) with Mr.Li tomorrow.
7. Let’s help him______________(mend) the machine. 8. I think he __________(visit) Qingdao next week.
9. They _________________(not use) paper and they will use computers.
10. No one __________(like) expensive things. 11. __________students_______(go) to school in the future
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时，可加助动词或情态动词等。
A girl in Nepal
This picture shows eighteen-year-old Katy Ross in Nepal, a small country north of India. Katy 1.______ (leave) school eight months ago and soon she 2.________ (go) to university. She loves traveling and decided 3._____(visit) Asia before she goes to university.
Now Katy4._______ (stay) with a family in the capital of Nepal. The family 5.______ (have) two children but many uncles and cousins, live with them in their big house. They have taken Katy to many parties. Katy has learnt a lot about the country since she6._______ (arrive) four months ago.
Katy teaches for four hours a day at a small school. All the classes7._______ (teach)in English, because the pupils8._______ (speak) English since the age of six. The older children speak English very well. Katy teaches writing, grammar, and art, all in English.
Katy9._______ (not, get) a lot of time to see Nepal since she came to this country. But soon she will stop 10._______ (teach) and travel around Nepal with a friend. "After that," Katy says, "we’ll visit more countries’ in Asia. We’re not sure which ones yet. "
1.________ 2.___________ 3.__________ 4.__________ 5.___________
6._________ 7.__________ 8.___________ 9.___________ 10.__________


17
1、害羞时，大多数人脸发红，说话吞吞吐吐(结巴)
2、If shyness doesn’t stop you from doing what you want to do.
keep the things that you want to do
prevent
3、more, talk
4、There’s nothing for you be afraid of
5、首句
七年级下册M1-M6
Module1重点短语:
1.站在长城上 2.和你讲话 3.在一次学校旅游
4.玩得很高兴 5.拍很多照片 6.买一些礼物和明信片
7.躺在太阳底下 8.非常喜欢这次学校旅行 9.等候，等待
10.现在，此刻 11.不同的地方 12.做不同的事
13.下班 14.回家 15.等公车 16.赶火车
17.开车 18.在家喝下午茶 19.走着去酒馆
20.喝一杯 21.吃晚饭 22. 在餐馆 23.看（听）歌剧
24. 看芭蕾舞 25.穿衣打扮 26. 开始上课 27.喝咖啡或可乐28.看望朋友 29.给家里打电话 30.看… 31.再见 32.晚安
Module2重点短语：
33.春节34.为….准备好35.学习舞龙36.制作灯笼37.在春节前夕on New Year’s Eve 38.扫地sweep the floor39.做饭cook the meal 40.在工作at work 41.元宵节Lantern Festival 42.扫去sweep away43.有很多传统have lots of traditions 44.打扫房子clean the house 45.扫去霉运 sweep away bad luck 46.把门窗漆红paint doors and windows red 47.好运good luck 48.剪纸paper cuts 49.用……来装饰……decorate…with…50.理发have a haircut51.新年礼物New Year presents 52.舞龙和舞狮dragon and lion dancing 53.拜访家人和朋友visit family and friends 54.年糕sweet rice pudding 55.一种a kind of 56.在半夜at midnight 57.几天a few days 58.一年到头all the year round 59.庆祝….的诞生celebrate the birth of.. 60.对….感兴趣be interested in..
Module3重点短语：
1.在周末at the weekend 2.在周六早上on Saturday morning 3.查看我的邮件check my email 4.上钢琴课have a piano lesson 5.买一些新衣服buy some new clothes 6.去派对 go to a party 7.躺在床上，睡觉stay in bed 8.复习考试revise for the test 9.早起床get up early 10.吃野餐have a picnic 11.登上长城 walk up the Great Wall 12.期待 look forward to 13.乘飞机 take the/a plane 14.游览 do some sightseeing15.喜欢外国文化like foreign culture 16.参观紫禁城 visit the Forbidden City 17.交朋友 make friends ( with ) 18.躺在沙滩上lie on the beach 19.呆在宾馆里 stay in the/a hotel 20.龙舟节 Dragon Boat Festival 21.一位好厨师 a good cook 22.到达 get to / arrive in (at) 23.去观光 go sightseeing
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm 13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high 5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内） 10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内） 12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名 14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China 22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. What about __table tennis with me this afternoon A. playing B. play C to play D. plays
( )2. She is going to stay in ___bed tomorrow morning A./ B. a C. an D. the
( )3. Look! Class One ___eye exercises.A. are to do B. do C. are doing D. are going to do
( )4. Daming is going to revise____ his test. A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )5. He __have a field trip the day after tomorrow. A. is B. does C. is going D. is going to
( )6. Her parents____ for Beijing next Sunday. A. are leaving B. leave C. leaves D. is leaving
( )7. There will be____ rain and_____ winds next Monday.
A. heavy; strong B. strong; big C. strong; heavy D. big; strong
( )8. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.A. to play B. play C. Playing D. play
( )9. In a few years’ time, there ______hundreds of trees on the mountain.
A. will have B. will be C. are have D. be have
( ) 10. Look! The students ______ the kites in the park. A. fly B. flying C. are flying D. Flies
( ) 11. Mary is a beautiful girl ___ long black hair. A. with B. has C. have D. to have
( ) 12. The boy _______ on the bed at the moment. A. is lying B. lie C. lies D.lying
( ) 13. ---What are your parents doing now
---They _____ cakes in the kitchen. A. making B. are making C. doing D. are doing
( ) 14. He _____ his homework in the classroom every day.
A. not do B. not doing C. doesn’t do D. isn’t doing
( ) 15. She often helps me __ my homework. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( ) 16. ---Is Bob doing his homework ---No, he _________. He is _______ a letter.
A. doesn’t; write B. isn’t; is writing C. isn’t; writing D. doesn’t; writing
( ) 17. ---What is Tom doing ---He ______ in the river.
A. is swimming B. is swiming C.swims D. swimming
( ) 18. She can speak _______ Chinese now. A. a few B. few C. no D. a little
( ) 19. My parents are at _______ work. They are working. A. his B. their C. the D. /
( )20. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it___computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. playing D. play
二、单词的适当形式填空
1.There are many _____(foreign) in Beijing. 2.Please come ____(early) tomorrow than today.
3.What time do you ____(usual) get up 4.Our teacher are all very ____(friend) to us students.
5.Spring is the ___(good) time to plant trees. 6.Jim is going _____(fish) with Mr.Li tomorrow.
7. Let’s help him___(mend) the machine. 8. I think he __________(visit) Qingdao next week.
9. They _________________(not use) paper and they will use computers.
10. No one ________(like) expensive things. 11. ____students___(go) to school in the future
三、拓展训练
阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时，可加助动词或情态动词等。
A girl in Nepal
This picture shows eighteen-year-old Katy Ross in Nepal, a small country north of India. Katy 1.______ (leave) school eight months ago and soon she 2.________ (go) to university. She loves traveling and decided 3._____(visit) Asia before she goes to university.
Now Katy4._______ (stay) with a family in the capital of Nepal. The family 5.______ (have) two children but many uncles and cousins, live with them in their big house. They have taken Katy to many parties. Katy has learnt a lot about the country since she6._______ (arrive) four months ago.
Katy teaches for four hours a day at a small school. All the classes7._______ (teach)in English, because the pupils8._______ (speak) English since the age of six. The older children speak English very well. Katy teaches writing, grammar, and art, all in English.
Katy9._______ (not, get) a lot of time to see Nepal since she came to this country. But soon she will stop 10._______ (teach) and travel around Nepal with a friend. "After that," Katy says, "we’ll visit more countries’ in Asia. We’re not sure which ones yet. "
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15___ long. And it’s a ___ river.A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million____in Hong Kong. A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a ___ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ___ the east coast ___ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think ___ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu __ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. isC. hasD. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. withB. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ____a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that cityA. itB. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister__the song together now A.singB. singing C.are singing D.is singing
( )18.Football is __than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__the same mistake again. A. makeB. is make C. makes D. is made二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher_____ (clear). 2. About 200 people ___ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s _________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother ___(write) a letter to my sister and I __ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.初三中考复习---九年级上册Module7-8复习学案
班级_________ 姓名__________ 组别__________ 等级________
【学习目标】1.理解定语从句的基本概念，能够灵活运用detail等重点单词及pick up等重点短语。
2.通过自主学习，小组合作，解决银安殿，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.了解不同国家的文化，增强民族意识；全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7--8重点短语集锦：
Module7重点短语：
1.你在忙什么？What are you up to 2.你需要帮忙去找到它们吗？Would you like a hand to find them 3.在…中心in the center of.. 4.在我们回来的路上on our way back 5.在许多方面in many ways6.像一个三面环水的巨大的帆船be like a huge sailing boat with water on three sides
7.做关于澳大利亚的课题研究do a project on Australia 8.看…一眼 have a look at
9.最大的说英语的国家the largest English-speaking country 10.对…感到惊讶be surprised at ..
11.乘直升机飞过岩石上空take the helicopter tour over the rock 12. 与我们的相似be similar to ours13.在地里in the fields 在农场上on the farm 14. 脾气不好have a bad temper
15.更像是一片沙漠be more like a desert 16.每个其他人everyone else 17.不断趴下keep lying down
Module8 重点短语:
1.参加摄影比赛enter the photo competition 2.因..向..表祝贺congratulations to sb on sth 3. 找出find out4.让某人一直做某事get sb doing 5.进行的怎么样？How do you get on 6.即使even though7.拍了几张…的好的照片take some great shots/photos of… 8.对..很满意be pleased with.9.多亏thanks to10.某物出故障了。There is something wrong with sth. 11.从事于work on 12.玩的开心have fun (doing)13.有机会赢be in with a chance to win 14. 离他家远far from his home 15.设法完成某事manage to do16.与..其他年相比compared with other years 17.收到了更多的照片receive many more photos
Part2: Module7--8重点句子集锦
Module7重点句子集锦
1.我正在寻找你在澳大利亚拍的照片。
I am looking for the photos that you took in Australia.
2.我们正在做一个关于想去参观的国家的项目。
We' are doing a project about countries that we want to visit._
3.这是我在大堡礁看到的一条鲨鱼的照片。
This one is a photo of a shark that I saw on the Great Barrier Reef.
4.在我们从Uluru 回来的路上，有跟着我们的车跳来跳去的袋鼠。
There were kangaroos that jumping alongside the car on our way back from Uluru.
5.有一个我想赢的摄影比赛。
There is a photo competition that I want to win.
6. 澳大利亚人最喜欢的食品和饮料有葡萄、羊肉，火腿，尤其是澳大利亚南部产的酒.
The food and drink that most Australians like are grapes, lamb and ham, especially wine that they make in the south of the country.
7.他们喜欢所有的体育运动，但是他们最喜欢的运动是足球，板球和橄榄球。
They love all sports, but the games that they love the most are football, cricket and rugby.
8.第二天我们骑了一次骆驼。我骑的骆驼脾气不好，并且我很累.
The next day we had a camel ride. The camel that I rode had a bad temper, and I got very tired.
9.它是一个能让每个人都跳舞的乐队。
It’s the band which gets everyone dancing.
10.我们对这次摄影比赛十分满意。
We were very pleased with the photo competition.
11.与往年相比，这次我们收到的照片多了很多。
Compared with other years, we received many more photos.
12.何忠很好地展现了这支很棒的新乐队的动作和音乐，
He Zhong manages to show the movement and the sounds of this great new band,...
13.祝贺我们的获奖者，并感谢所有参与者。
Congratulations to our winners and thanks to everyone who entered the competition.
Part3: Module7---8重要知识点集锦
1.对…感到惊讶：be surprised at sth / that 从句; 对做某事感到惊讶：be surprised to do
使某人惊讶的是to one’s surprise 惊讶地in surprise 联系：surprised & surprising
练习：(1) 他很惊讶听到这个消息。He the news.
(2) 使我惊讶的是，我通过了这个考试。 ,I passed the exam.
(3) 这个男孩惊讶地望着我。 The boy looked me ______ _________.
(4) We were ____________ at the _______________ news.
2. be similar to“与…相似”, 相当于be like. 例：She is similar to her elder sister.
be similar in”在…方面相似” 例：They are similar in habits.他们在习惯上相似。
联系：be the same as…“与…相同”如：Tony’s age is the same as Lingling’s.
be different from 与..不同 be familiar with 对..熟悉 如：She is familiar with this area.
3. Everyone else thought it was very funny that my camel kept lying down…
1). else adj. （用在疑问代词、疑问副词、不定代词或不定副词等的后面）别的；其他的
你还想要说些什么吗？What else do you want to say
没有其他的事情发生。Nothing else happened.
2). keep doing 继续做某事。 keep后可接动名词或复合宾语，但不可接不定式。
keep +宾语+doing 例： I’m very sorry to keep you waiting for so long a time.
keep +adj. 保持…状态 例: keep healthy保持健康; I like keeping busy我喜欢保持忙碌
keep +宾语+介词短语 例: What food can keep me in good health
练习：他又继续走了5千米。He ________ __________ for_______ 5 kilometers.
别让你妈妈一直等着！_____________________________________！
4. way短语：on the way to..在去..的路上 by the way顺便问一下in a ...way以…方式
in many ways在许多方面 lose one’s way迷路 no way没门，绝不
做某事的方法the way to do/ of doing/ that 定语从句
5. expect V. 期望，预期①expect sth② expect to do sth ③expect sb to do ④expect +that 从句
我期待很快见到你。I expect ____________(see) you soon.
我期待你回信。I expect you _____________(write) back.
我希望他会准时来。I expect that he will come on time.
It is expected that the report will suggest some major reforms.
预计这个报告会提出一些重大的改革。
6. pick up ①捡起 ② (开车)接人My father will pick me up.③接收(信号、声音等)We were able to pick up the BBC World Service.我们能收到英国广播公司国际广播节目。④(偶然)得到，学会She picked up Spanish when she was living in Mexico.她旅居墨西哥时顺便学会了西班牙语。
【巩固提升】
一、单项选择:
( )1.Two places of interest in Beijing are well-known to people from home and abroad. One is the Great Wall; _________ is the Summer Palace.
A. the other B. another C. other D. others
( )2._________, they were very happy.
A. Though they have no money B. Though they had got fine clothes
C. Although they were very poor D. Although they were rich
( )3.The weather in Nanjing is ____ ours. A. same as B. same of C. similar to D. similar with
( )4.You’ll make progress if you keep ___ hard. A. work B. works C. worked D. working
( )5.We have two rooms _____, but I can’t decide ________.
A. to live; to choose which one B. lived; choose which one
C. to live in; which one to choose D. live; which one
( )6.Unlike Chinese, Americans ___ their meals with knives and forks.
A. used to taking B. are used to taking C. used to take D. are used to take
( )7.Chen Yibing won the gold medal for China so we take pride ___ him. A. in B. on C. of D. for
( )8. The young man _____ is a friend of mine.
A. who I had a word B. whom I had a word with
C. which I had a word with D. whom I had a word
( )9.---Do you mind opening the window --- ________. Go ahead please.
A. Certainly B. Yes, I do C. No, not at all D. All right
( )10.He ran faster than ____ runner in the race. A. the other B. any other C. the others D. any
( )11.—Can I ____ the book ---Yes, here you are, but you can only ___ it for 5 days.
A. lend; keep B. borrow; lend C. lend; borrow D. borrow; keep
( )12.--Have you found the information about the famous people ___ you can use for the report
--Not yet. I’ll search some on the Internet.
A. who B. what C. whom D. which
( )13.I’ve never got any letter from her ____ she left home.
A. because of B. even though C. ever since D. and then
( )14.—Are you pleased ___ the food here ---Yes, I have got used ____ the life here.
A. by; for B. with; to C. at; with D. to; in
( )15.---Where is my watch I can’t find it. ---Don’t worry. It must be ____ in your room.
A. somewhere B. anywhere C. everywhere D. nowhere
二、用单词的适当形式填空:
1.You can’t let him help you. It’s ___________________(hope).
2.Do you care about the ____________________ (environment) problems
3.Do you know what the _________________(pollute) is
4.It’s _______________(waste) not to turn off the lights when you sleep.
5.This envelope is made of ___________________(recycle) paper.
6. More and more people begin to use _____________ (reuse) bags in order to save our world.
6.The clothes are the ____________(late) fashion, I think.
7.There is boy ____________(call) Tony _______________(live) in a small village.
8.The Australian girl has got used to ___________(eat) Chinese food.
9.It’s much cheaper and ____________(quick) to use email than send normal mail.
10. Tom finishes it __________________(quick) than John.
11. He went back to Beijing hurriedly(匆忙地) ___________(see) his uncle who was in hospital.
12. When Mike _________________(ask) why he was late, he gave the answer.
13. I _________________(try) to get a bottle of milk from the fridge when I lost the bottle.
14. Instead of ________________(punish) him, she explained the matter carefully.
15. I ____________________(not see) such a hamburger before.
三、完形填空：
What do you think of stress Is it a good thing or a bad thing
Most of the students think stress can do harm l 6 them in some ways. There’s a story about a teenager in a middle school. He even l 7 his study because of the stress from school and family. We also usually l8 that someone turns to psychological doctors because of heavy working stress. There is no doubt that some people think stress is a dangerous wolf.
On the other hand，other people argue that stress is not a bad thing. They l 9 stress can produce momentum(动力)in the end. For them，right attitude and action can reduce stress and make it 20 . When l was a child，my mom always pushed me to study hard. She wished I could go to an ideal 21 for further education. I experienced stress for the first time. For a poor family，I deeply knew 22 was not easy for us，and everything my mom did to me was just to hope I could live a better life in the future. 23 the saying goes，“No pains，no gains. ”So I did what my mom expected because I didn’t want to let her down. At last，I did measure up(达到标准)to my mom’s expectation and go to college 24 . Thanks to my mom’s push! Thanks to the stress! In this way，I don’t think stress is a bad thing.
Overall，stress is not a bad thing in 25 . The key is how we deal with it.
( )16. A. for B. in C. to D. of
( )17. A. began with B. showed off C. gave up D. cheered for
( )18. A. wonder B. decide C. promise D. hear
( )19. A. doubt B. believe C. disagree D. forget
( )20. A. useful B. difficult C. strange D. terrible
( )21. A. company B. college C. factory D. farm
( )22. A.1ife B. spirit C. opinion D. silence
( )23. A. Then B. But C. As D. Or
( )24. A. quietly B. wildly C. specially D. successfully
( )25. A. himself B. myself C. itself D. herself
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习七上Module7-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
熟记M7-10中出现的talk等单词、what about等短语，并灵活运用there be 句型，序数词，
频率副词等。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.增加朋友间的友谊和对父母的爱，享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M7-10词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M7-10重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择
( )1. There are five _________ story books on the bookshelf.
A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of
( )2. I met her ____a cold winter morning. A. on B. in C. at D. of
( )3. This pair of trainers _______to Mary. A. belong B. belongs C. is belong D. are belong
( )4. They have supper ____ half past six. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )5. He was born _______ March 4, 1997. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )6. The glasses _____ broken by Tom yesterday. A.was B. were C. is D. are
( )7. He lives on _____floor. A. the third B.three C.thirds D. a thrid
( )8. ____visitors come to China every year.
A. Thousands of B. Ten thousands C. Ten thousand of D. Thousand of
( )9. Don’t drop it. Please try _____ time. A. the second B. second C. two D. a second
( )10. Would you like some coffee or tea ---- _______. Water is ok.
A. Both B. Either C. Neither D. All
( )11. Do you know _____man in blue --Yes, he’s a professor( 教授) of____university.
A. the , an B. a, a C. /, the D. the, a
( )12. It’s ___nice day, isnt’ it --Yes, what ____fine weather! A. a, a B .the, the C. a, / D. the, /
( )13. How many students are there in the classroom --______. They are all in the lab.
A. Some B. All C. Neither D. None
( )14. What do you like, tea or coffee -- _________. I don’t mind.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. All
( )15. How many ____are there in your family A. bus B. car C. bike D. people
( )16. It’s a fine day today. How about _____ ---Sounds great.
A. go hiking B. go to hike C. going hiking D. to go to hike
( )17. Would you like to play basketball with us this afternoon
-- __________, but I have a lot of homework to do.
A. I’d love to B. I’m afraid not C. Sounds good. D. No problem
( )18. How far is your home from here --It’s about two______drive. A. hour’s B. hours C. hours’ D. hour
( )19. He is ____ unusual boy. A. a B.an C. /
( )20. He will go to America ____ next month.A. sometimes B. some times C. sometime D. some time
二、.单词适当形式填空
1. This pair of glasses ______________(belong) to Tom. And those glasses___________(be)John’s.
2. Today is my friend Jim’s __________(twelve) birthday and it is my mother’s __________(forty) birthday.
3. There _______(be) a pen and some books on the desk.
4. There are two _________(wolf) , three_________(mouse) and two__________(tomato) in the picture.
5. The pen is my friend’s. And _________(her) is on her desk. ______(my) is in my pencil box.
6. The rain______________(last) for two days. 7. Don’t make the childrn __________(talk) there.
8. Has he finished ____________(draw) the horse
9. There are some _______________(different) between Lucy and Liy, although they are twins.
10. Do the ___________(India) speak English as their first language
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
The story happened during the Second World War. A 70-year-old man lived in a small town of Germany. His
three sons all worked in the same factory where he 1 (work). After the war had begun, all his sons 2
(make) to join the army and they all died in the fights.
The old man was very sad. In the days that 3 (follow), he didn’t have enough food and was often hungry. And nobody helped him and he didn’t know how to go on 4 (live). It was becoming colder and colder. 5 (find) a way out, he had to beg from door to door. He had been to a lot of places and knew a lot.
Once he came to a village, but the villagers were all poor and couldn’t give him anything. He was too hungry 6 (go) to another village. Suddenly he saw a policeman 7 (stand) in the street and an idea came to his mind. He then shouted out, “Hitler is a pig!”
As he hoped, the old man was now enjoying some bread and a cup of hot tea 8 (give) by the policeman. “Don’t say so in our village, sir!” the policeman said after a while, “I’m sorry, sir, ” said the old man, “I 9 (not say )that again. I didn’t know it 10 (be) Hitler’s hometown.” “No, no, sir,” the policeman said in a hurry, “It’s a pig’s hometown.”
1._____________2._____________3._____________4._____________5. _____________
6. _____________7. _____________8. _____________9._____________10._____________初三一轮复习九下Module3—4
【学习目标】
1.熟记M3-4中出现的dress等15个单词、fall off等8个短语，并灵活运用。
2.通过自主学习，小组合作，解决疑难，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.了解其他国家人们的着装理念，培养跨文化意识；激情投入,全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module3重点短语:
1.看起来很疲劳look tired 2. 与…对抗be/play against 3. 代表，象征 stand for
4. 上次被打败了 were defeated last time 5. 一场艰苦的比赛 a tough match
6. 没有机会 have got/have no chance 7. 被允许看比赛 be allowed to watch the game
8. 对某人很生气 be mad/ angry with sb 9.首先first of all 10. …的标志 a symbol of …
11. 既然，由于 now that 12. 建立， 创立 set up 13. 和…比较 compare… with..
14.用…来做…use sth to do sth 15. 在同一年 in the same year 16. 争取获得 go for sth.
Module4重点短语：
1. 去长城的学校旅行the school trip to the Great Wall 2. 沿…往前走go along
3. 决定穿什么参加毕业聚会 decide what to wear to the school leavers’ party
4. 在学校前in front of school 5. 有点亮 a bit bright 6.长头发的女孩a girl with long hair
7. 我不这样认为I don’t think so 9. 这边走 Come this way 10. 一些时候for some time
11. 看那件漂亮的裙子take a look at /have a look at the beautiful dress 12. 关心,在乎care about
13. 选择时髦的东西choose something fashionable 14. 引起某人的注意catch one’s attention
15. 最知名的服装公司the best-known clothing companies 16. 显示,炫耀show off
17. 合适的跑鞋the right running shoes 18. 看起来一样/不同 look the same/look different
19. 赚很多钱make a lot of money 20. 钱花得更值spend our money better
Part2: Module3-4基础知识集锦
1. We’re better at ________________(prevent) illness.
短语：be good at / do well in +doing sth 擅长做某事 be good for 对…有好处
prevent sb / sth from doing sth, 相当于 stop/ keep sb/ sth from doing sth 阻止…做…
没有什么事能阻止我们实现梦想．Nothing can stop us from_____(make) our dream come true.
联系：ban sb/ sth from doing sth. 禁止某人做某事
2. And that makes life more dangerous and less healthy. make sb/ sth +形容词/ done/ do sth
(1) I played some jokes to make the boy_______________(laugh).
(2) He spoke English slowly to make himself____________________(understand) by his students.
3. The most important difference is that people are healthier today.
划线部分位于be动词is之后作____________(成分)，所以该句含有that引导的表语从句。
4. My sister was the eldest child and she left school when she was only 12 to help my mother at home.
old的比较级有两个older&elder。（1）elder为“年长的”，只指人，用来比较年龄长幼，尤指兄弟姐妹的长幼关系，它只能用在名词前作定语，不能用于than引导的比较状语从句中；older为“年龄较大的”、“较老的”、“较旧的”，可指人，也可指物，一般作表语，能用在than引导的比较状语从句中。（2）elder还可用作名词，单数指两人中年龄较大的人，复数泛指“长辈”
练习：1.我的姐姐比我大3岁。_________________________________________________
2.两兄弟中他是老大。He is the ____________(elder/older) of the two brothers.　
5. 形容词原级，比较级，最高级在短语中的运用：
原级： ①as…as… 如：The boy is as tall as his father.
②(much) too, so ,quite, very +原级 如：It was quite good, but not perfect.
比较级：①…比较级+than… ②比较级 and比较级 happier and happier
③the +比较级, the +比较级 The harder you work, the better you will be.
④much, even ,a lot, lots+比较级 如：lots more buildings; much more traffic
⑤the ＋比较级 of the two
最高级：①the+最高级 I have the most books in my family
②one of +最高级… Luxun is one of the most famous writers in China.
③the＋序数词＋最高级 He is the third tallest boy in my class.
练习：1.It’s very ________________ to play on the road. (danger)
2. The boy ran so ____________ that I couldn't catch him.(fast)
3. Who is _____________, your sister or his (thin)
4. Which skirt is ________________ ,yours, hers or mine (beautiful)
6. 区分 “穿”：have on；dress；wear；put on ；in
1).dress表穿的动作，也表示打扮，后面常接人。The child can dress himself.这孩子能自己穿衣服了。2).have on表示穿的状态，不用于进行时态。如：The king has nothing on那皇帝啥也没穿。
3).put on表示穿的动作，后面接衣服。He put on the coat and ran out.
4).wear表示穿的状态，如：We wear sunglasses in summer.我们在夏天常戴太阳镜，后接从头上到脚底的所有衣服，饰品，如手表，头发，眼镜等。
5).in人作主语，后接衣服或颜色，表示人穿着啥衣服。如：Do you know the boy in red
练习： ①The child can _________ ________.这孩子能自己穿衣服了。
②She ________ __________ her mother’s coat. 她穿着她母亲的大衣。
③________your coat _____when you go out. 出去时穿上外套。
④The girl _______red is my sister. 穿红色衣服的是我的姐姐。　
⑤Mary ______ _________ her daughter.玛丽正给她女儿穿衣服。
⑥The king __________ nothing __________.那皇帝啥也没穿。
⑦We ________sunglasses in summer. 我们在夏天戴墨镜。
7.I think we’re going to be here for some time.我认为我们将在这待段时间。
some time 一些时间； sometime某时； sometimes 有时； some times几次
练习： (1) I will go to visit you _________ next week. (2) He _____ watches TV in the evening.
(3) I have been to Shanghai ______________. (4) Will you stay here for _________________
Part4: 巩固提升
一、用括号内单词的适当形式填空
1. We hope the weather will be fine, but it is getting even _____________(bad).
2. The ____________(high) you climb, the more beautiful view you will see.
3. Nancy doesn't go to the club any more, so she has __________(much) free time than before.
4. Maggie doesn’t think skating is_______________________(和……一样有趣) skiing.
5. Of the two coats, I’ll choose the ____________(便宜) one to save some money for a book.
6. The Browns have four children and Lucy is their __________ (old) child.
7.The experiment was lots ___________ (easy) than they had expected.
8. Today many women continue to work after they get _____________ (marry).
9. There were many young _____________ (couple) taking part in the activity.
10. I think food that is ____________ (fresh) cooked is healthier than ready-made food.
11. I am looking forward to _______________ (watch) the TV plays tonight.
12. Have you _____________ (decide) what ____________ (wear) to the party
13. Everyone spends money on clothes and everyone has their ___________ (person) look.
14. People also think __________(design) clothes are better made.
15. I prefer __________ (lie) on the beach to _____________ (swim) in the sea.
16. The dress looks ___________ (cool) on you.
17. His mother bought him a pair of expensive _____________ (run) shoes.
18. The teacher always wears _________________(fashion) clothes.
19. You can sit ___________________ (comfortable) on the sofa and read a book.
20. Advertising companies need a new way ____________ (sell).
二、单项选择：
（ ）1. Tom got up very __________,so he came to school half an hour ______.
A. late; lately B. lately; late C. lately; lately D. late; late
（ ）2. ______ children there are in family,_______ their life will be.
　 A. The less; the better B. The fewer; the better C. Fewer; richer D. More; poorer
（ ）3. "A ______ accident happened at 7:30 a.m." said the policeman _______.
　 A. serious, serious B. seriously, seriously C. seriously, serious D. serious, seriously
（ ）4. In our city, it is ______ in July, but it is even _______ in August.
　 A. hotter; hottest B. hot; hot C. hotter; hot D. hot; hotter
（ ）5. This pencil is ______ that one.
A. so long as B. as longer as C. longer than D. not as longest as
（ ）6. The cake smells ______. Please throw it away. A. good B. badly C. bad D. Well
（ ）7. Is there ___________ in today’s newspaper
A. anything interesting B. interesting anything C. everything interesting D. interesting something
（ ）8. Computers can work ______ than men and make__________ mistakes.
A. slower, less B. faster, fewer C. faster, less D. faster, more
（ ）9. The _______, the better. I’m short of money.
A. cheap B. cheaper C. expensive D. more expensive
（ ）10. ---How nice the music sounds! ---It does! The peaceful music will make you feel______.
A. excited B. bored C. moved D. relaxed
( )11. I lost the way_____a rainy evening and didn’t get home _____midnight.
A. on, at B. in, at C. on, until D. in, until
( )12. There used to be no bridge ______the river. People had to swim ______it.
A. on, through B. over, across C. above, in D. near, into
( )13. It’s very kind ____you to get me a ticket ____the World Cup.
A. for, of B. of, to C. to, for D. of, of
( )14. The United States is______the south of Canada and ______the east of Japan.
A. to, in B. on, to C. in, beside D. at, on
( )15. This photo reminds me ____the days when I worked _____the farm with my classmates.
A. about, in B. about, on C. of, in D. of, on
三、选做题：1. ____________(talk) of free time, I remember the visit to the theater.
2. Compared with money, health is______________________(important ).
3. Are you_________________(finish) with that work
4. You will be more_______________(relax) and less nervous before your exams.
5. The most important _________________(different) is that people are healthier today.
6. She played the piano_________________(successful) at the concert.
7. We did well in_______________(prevent) illness in the past .
( )8. I worked on the problem____a long time and I worked it out ____myself______last.
A. for, by, at B. in, with, on C. on, by, in D. for, for, at
( )9. Here are some flowers ____ your mother ______ our best wishes.
A. to; for B. for; with C. of; to D. from; to
( )10. He wrote the letter _______ink. A. in B. on C. with D. at
( )11. What have you done _____the letter ---I have posted it.
A. for B. of C. in D. with
( )12. Are you going to school___bus ---No, we are going ____Tom’s father’s car.
A. by, by B. from, by C. by, in D. in, at
三、完成句子
1. 我将尽我的最大努力赶上别人。I will ____ ____ ____ ____ catch up with others.
2. 过去人们因疾病和饥饿过着困难的生活。
The people in the past _______ ______ _______ ______ because of diseases and hunger.
3. 树木能够阻止土壤流失。Trees can __________ soil(土壤)__________running away.
4. 说到钱，它对我们生活很重要但不是万能的。_______ ______ money, it is necessary for our life.
5. 他比起写更擅长画。 He _______ ________ ________drawing than writing.
PAGE初三一轮复习八下Module5-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module5-6重点短语集锦：
Module5重点短语:
1. 告诉我关于音乐会的事tell me about the concert2. 一起演奏一些音乐play some music all together
3. 独奏一段爱尔兰舞曲play a solo of some Irish dance music 4. 在.. 快结束时 at the end of 5. 幸好是你不是我rather you than me 6. 在后台演奏 play in the background 7.在我们最后的排练中during our final practice8. 把你打败 beat you 9. 独奏 play the solo 10. 警告她关于她的功课 warn her about her schoolwork 11. 花太多时间和乐队在一起spend too much time with the orchestra
12. 惩罚她并且把她送去一所不同的学校punish her and send her to a different school 13. 以她为荣 be proud of her =take pride in her 14. 把她送走send her away 15. 拒绝演奏refuse to play 16. 那多可惜啊！Such a pity 17. 有另一次机会have another chance 18.留住我的好朋友keep my best friend
19. 带来一个新的电脑游戏 bring him a new computer game 20. 警告我不要用他的电脑玩游戏warn me not to use his computer for playing games 21. 用它来工作use it for his job 22. 出故障go wrong
23. 把它复制到电脑上copy it onto the computer24. 把它从电脑上卸载下来take it off the computer
25. 十分确信make quite sure 26. 感觉糟糕极了feel terrible 27. 主动提出赔偿 offer to pay
28.犯了两个错误make two mistakes 29. 告诉他真相 tell him the truth 30. 生你的气be angry with you
31. 在家周围做些事情do some jobs around the home32. 帮他做他的工作 help him with his work
33. 真的抱歉 be truly sorry 34.在电脑上留下了病毒leave a virus on the computer
35. 为……而付钱pay … for
Module6重点短语：
1 醒着的be awake 2太困了be sleepy 3亲密的朋友 close friends 4关于交朋友about making friends 5就这些吗？was that it 6采访的尾声the end of the interview 7鼓掌欢呼 clap and cheer
8在朋友中间among friends 9担心她be worried about her 10.照顾她look after her 11.谈论她的朋友talk about her friends 12.小提琴拉得十分好play the violin really well 13. 我今天的文化播报my culture report for today 14.在这部电影中演得很好act well in this film 15.使角色真实可信make their characters believable 16.关于 be about 17.环绕着加勒比海诸岛航行 sail around the Caribbean islands
18.试图找到一些丢失的黄金try to find some lost gold 19.遇到一些坏人come face to face with some terrible men 20.不得不和他们斗争have to fight them 21.有很多打斗镜头There’s lots of action
22.看起来十分危险 look really dangerous 23.反映现实生活be true to life 24.在我看来in my opinion 25.太多的打斗too much fighting 26.除此以外except for that 27.上映、出版come out
28.建议你去看advise you to go and see 29.上演一周 show all week
30.一个奇幻惊险电影a fantastic adventure 31.既很受欢迎也很出名both very popular and famous
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦：
【M5知识点集锦】
【知识点复习】
1. warn 警告，用法：1) warn sb of/about sth 2) warn sb (not) to do sth 3) warn + that 从句 use…for…表示用...做，介词for后用动名词形式。
拓展：be used for doing / to do 被用来干…… get used to doing … 习惯于干某事
2. too much修饰不可数名词 ，too many修饰可数名词，两者意思为:太多。
much too 意思为太... 修饰形容词、副词。
3.such +（a/an) +（形容词）+ 名词, so +形容词或者副词
拓展：so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
4.decide 决定 1). decide (not ) to do 2). decide +(when/where/ how…)从句
5. take off : 1）脱下 2）（飞机）起飞 3）请假，休息 4) 拔掉，卸载
6. offer 提出；提供1). offer sb. sth. =offer sth. to sb.给某人提供某物2). offer to do sth. 主动提出做某事
7. at least 至少， 反义短语 at most 至多
8. after all 毕竟 He is good enough. After all, he is only a child.
9. make sure 弄清楚，查明 1). make sure of / about 2). make sure that 从句
拓展：be sure of/about sth 对某事有把握 be sure to do sth 务必做某事 be sure that 确定…..
10. go wrong 出毛病，出故障， go 为“变得，变成” 类似短语： go bad, go white
11. Rather you than me! 翻译：幸好是你不是我.
prefer to do sth. rather than do sth.=would rather do than do sth. 宁愿做…而不愿做…
12. beat & win 翻译下列句子总结beat和win的用法：
小结：beat通常用于游戏或比赛中击败对手，其宾语多是与之比赛、战斗的运动员或球队。
win 常跟类似a game，a war a prize等之类的名词连用，不可接表示人的名词作宾语。
另外beat 还有“连续不断敲打”的意思
【M6知识点集锦】
1.awake adj. 醒着的（表示状态，不用进行时） be awake
wake v. 醒来 (woke, woken) wake up 叫醒，唤醒 代词放中间 wake him up
2.sleepy adj. 困乏的，打盹的 feel sleepy asleep adj. 入睡的 be asleep / fall asleep
sleep v. (slept, slept ) go to sleep 睡觉
3. among 在…中 （指三者或三者以上之间） between 在…中间 （指两者之间）
1). The teacher sits among the students.2). The girl sits between the twins.
4. look after 照顾，照看 = take care of 照顾，看管
look after…well === take good care of …好好照顾
1). He looked after his cat well. 同义句 He takes good care of his cat.
5. explain 解释 explanation n. explain to sb. sth 向某人解释… explain + that 从句
6. at the end of 在…末尾 at the end of April 在4月底， at the end of the street
in the end 最后,终于 == at last / finally
7. worry vt(及物动词) 使烦恼，使忧虑 不及物动词 常与about 连用
worry的形容词有两种形式: worrying和worried be worried about
8. be on 上映，上演 The film has been on for 20 minutes.
9. both 词组：both …and == not only…but also
both..and谓语动词 用复数 Both you and he are going to Shanghai tomorrow.
not only…but also 就近原则 Not only you but also he is going to Shanghia tomorrow否定：neither .做主语谓语动词用单数。
neither …nor 两者之中一个也不 ：连接主语谓语动词采用就近原则：
Neither he nor I am (be) wrong. Neither you nor he has (have) made some mistakes.
就进原则的其他短语：either…or not only… but also there be
10. make make sb +动词原形 ，make sb+形容词 make sb+ 名词
① Our teacher often makes us do (do) a lot of homework. .
② Our hard work can make our country beautiful (beautiful).
(3) The teacher made me monitor. 老师让我当班长
11. although (尽管) 与 but although不能与but同时出现在一个句子中.
Although in my opinion there is too much fighting, it’s an enjoyable film.
In my opinion there is too much fighting, but it’s an enjoyable film.
12. except 除…之外 (同类之间的比较)
I go to school every day except Sunday. (言外之意：周日不上学)
except for 表示"除..外" (指不同类比较).
Your composition is quite good except for some spelling mistakes.
你的作文除了几处拼写错误之外，非常好。 （对作文是肯定的）
13. advise 与suggest 建议…
1). 建议某人做某事：advise sb to do sth. 2). 建议做某事：suggest doing sth.
Ex ① Our teacher often advises us to practise (practise)our handwriting.
② The teacher suggested practising (practise) our handwriting初三一轮复习七年级下册Module11&Module12
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M11-12中出现的national等单词、on holiday等短语，并灵活运用一般过去时。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.珍惜时光,互爱互助，激情投入，全力以赴，享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、20’激情背诵M11-12词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M11-12重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择。（2012淄博）
1. — Please park your car over there. — Sorry. I ______ notice the sign.
A. am not B. don’t C. won’t D. didn’t
2. — Excuse me! I’m going to Linzi. The No. 51 bus
—The No. 51 bus______to Huantai. Take the No. 20 bus, please.
A. go B. goes C. went D. has gone
3. — Look! What a beautiful hill! — Yes, and it’s also famous______its old trees.
A. about B. with C. by D. for
4. — How often does the train run to Jinan —______twenty minutes.
A. Any B. Each C. Every D. Some
5. Peter, please come to school a little earlier tomorrow. You are ______ late these days.
A. already B. almost C. always D. also
6. — Is John an ______ boy — Yes, he never tells lies.
A. honest B. active C. athletic D. outgoing
7. — Where is Mary — She’s busy______for the exams.
A. study B. studies C. studying D. to study
8. — Will you help me with the trouble — I won’t______ you tell me the truth.
A. if B. but C. while D. unless
9. —Sam, you always get up early every morning. Do you like it —Not really, but______.
A. I used to it B. I’m used to it. C. I used to do it D. I’m used to do it
10. Who can tell me when______
A. the telephone is invented B. the telephone was invented
C. is the telephone invented D. was the telephone invented
二、完形填空。(2012陕西)
Wang Yani was born in 1975. Even as a baby she loved to draw. Her father was an 31 .Yani wanted to be like him. So she tried to stand like her father as she painted, which made him laugh.
One day, Yani painted lines on her father’s painting. He got 32 . At the time she was only two and a half years old. She cried and said, “I want to 33 like you!”Her father looked at her without saying anything. He 34 remembered his childhood(童年). He also wanted to draw and paint, but his parents didn’t understand. They just got angry. He didn’t want to see the same thing happen to his daughter. So he decided to 35 her.
With her father’s help, Yani soon 36 . Her lines became flowers, trees, and animals. Her father took her to parks and zoos to get 37 for her paintings. By the end of six, Yani had made over 4,000 works. Her paintings were very special. People 38 her works. When she was eight, one of her paintings was made into a Chinese postage stamp.Yani became famous when she was young. Her works were 39 in different countries in Asia, Europe and North America, 40 her parents never sold her paintings. She is well-known in the world, and art is still a great joy in her life. ( http: / / image. / i ct=503316480&z=&tn=baiduimagedetail&word=%CC%EC%C6%BD&in=24977&cl=2&lm=-1&pn=465&rn=1&di=41911951695&ln=2000&fr=&fmq=&ic=0&s=0&se=1&sme=0&tab=&width=&height=&face=0&is=&istype=2" \t "_blank )
31. A. actor B. athlete C. artist D. engineer
32. A. angry B. excited C. sad D. interested
33. A. laugh B. speak C. stand D. paint
34. A. happily B. clearly C. hardly D. usually
35. A. help B. stop C. refuse D. miss
36. A. did homework B. made money C. did sports D. made progress
37. A. news B. time C. ideas D. luck
38. A. hated B. loved C. found D. forget
39. A. lost B. sold C. bought D. shown
40. A. and B. but C. so D. or
三、动词填空。（2012 德州）
I recently heard a story about a famous scientist. Because of his great achievements(成就), he was thought to be more creative（有创造性的）than the average (一般的) person. When He (1) ____________ (ask) why he was able to do this, he gave the answer. It all came from an experience with his mother when he was about two years old. “I (2) ____________ (try) to get a bottle of milk from the fridge when I lost the bottle and it fell, spilling（溢出）the milk all over the floor — a sea of milk! I was frightened and I didn’t know what to do!”he said.
His mother heard the noise and got into the kitchen. “I (3) ______________ (consider）how to explain all this to you, mom.” He said. Instead of (4) ____________ (punish) him, she said, “Robert, what a great mess(杂乱) you have made! I (5) ____________ (not see) such a huge sea of milk before! Well, since the milk has already been spilled, would you like (6) ____________ (play) in the milk for a while We (7) ____________ (clean) it up after that.” Indeed, he did so. After a few minutes, his mother said, “You know, Robert, whenever you (8) ____________ (make) a mess like this, finally you have to clean it up.” He used a sponge(海绵) and together they cleaned up the spilled milk.
His mother then said, “You know, we (9) ____________（fail）in how to successfully carry a big milk bottle with two tiny hands just now. Let’s go out in the yard and fill the bottle with water to see if you (10) ____________ (discover) a way to carry it.” Then the little boy learned that if he grasped (抓紧) the bottle at the top near the lip with both hands, he could carry it without dropping it.
What a wonderful lesson!
拓展训练：翻译句子（C层选做）
1.建铁路很困难，因为地处大山之中并且还有许多桥梁和隧道。（It’s difficult to do sth.）
________________________________________________________________________________
你觉得昨天晚上电视上演的关于詹天佑的电影怎么样？( think of)
________________________________________________________________________________
我拍了很多照片，现在随着这封电子邮件发给你。（take photos of）
_______________________________________________________________________________
我的收获：_______________________________________________________________________初三一轮复习八下Module1-2
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M1-2中出现的tidy等单词、as well as 等短语，并灵活运用宾语从句。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过讨论爱好培养对他人不同爱好的尊重，建立良好的同学关系, 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M1-2词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M1-2重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1.–What happened ___Sarah –She fell down and hurt her leg. A. to B. with C. in D. on
( )2. Jack is good at playing ____ guitar but he is weak in playing ____ soccer.
　　　His sister Lucy likes playing ____ chess. A. the; /; / B. the; the; / C. the; /; the D. /; the; /
( )3. I think _____is relaxing to go on a vacation. A. that B. this C. that D. it
( )4. .My father is a pianist so I often hear him_____ the piano A. to play B. play C. playing D. plays
( )5. My brother is very______ in this______ book. A. interesting; interested
　　　 B. interested; interest C. interest; interested D. interested; interesting
( )6. His smile made me_________. A. to feel happy and warm
　　　B. feel warmly and happily C. felt happy and warm D. feel happy and warm
( ) 7. She _____the piano for six years，but she doesn’t play now. A.have played B.played C.has played
( ) 8. We ____ the museum yesterday. A.visited B.visit C.have visited
( ) 9.I _____ stamps since I was ten years old. A.collected B.have collected C.am collecting
( ) 10. I _____ to school yesterday because I was ill. A.went B.haven’t gone C.didn’t go
( ) 11. I asked him _____ he wants to go to the cinema with us. A. what B. if C. whether D. B and C
( ) 12. Look at my running nose. I think I feel like _______ a bad cold.
A. catch B. to catch C. caught D. catching
( ) 13.--- I am going to enter the English speech competition . ----______________.
A. Congratulations B. Good luck C. Sorry D. OK, thanks
( ) 14. Can you tell me _______________ A. where is the supermarket B. how do you get there
C. where do you come from D. when the meeting will begin
( ) 15. ----____________ will your father come back --- In a couple of months.
A. How soon B. How often C. How long
( ) 16. I asked him ________ , but he didn’t answer me.
A.Why did he smile B. why he smiles C. why he smiled D. he why smiled
( ) 17. She told me that I posted the letter last week. But I didn’t remember ____ it.
A. post B. posting C. to post D. posted
( ) 18. I asked him _____ she would come or not. A. if B. that C. what D. Whether
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. No one __________(like) playing chess in our class. 2. Don’t be afraid ____________(make) mistakes.
3. Alice saw the rabbit ____________(go) down the hole under the hedge.
4. It’s raining outside. Remember ___________(take) an umbrella.
5. It is fine today. Why not ________(go) out for a walk.
三、翻译句子
1.我很孤独,害怕和别人交朋友。 (be afraid to do ). _____________________________________
2. 每当我听到其他同学在说着、笑着，我都感觉心都要碎了。(hear sb. doing)
____________________________________________________________________
3. 我问他为什么笑，但是他已经不记得朝我笑了。(remember doing … smile at …)
____________________________________________________________________
4.我不想让我的父母担心我。(want sb. to do worry about)
__________________________________________________________________
四、拓展训练 （C层选做）
Shyness means feeling frightened when you’re around other people. Some children are born shy. Some become very shy later because of their life experience. In fact , everybody gets a little shy sometimes. It’s just how much they feel shy.
①Most people have red faces and talk in broken sentences when they are shy. But some become so shy that they won’t go to a restaurant because they are too nervous to order and pay for their food. Some are afraid of meeting new people, so they seldom go outside. This kind of shyness can be bad for a person.
②如果害羞并没有让你不能去做你想做的事, being shy isn’t a big problem. Some experts say shy people are good at working because they think __③__ and __③__ less. But remember not to let good opportunities (机会) pass you by just because of it. If you have to sing a song at a birthday party or give some performances in front of others, just do it. There’s nothing for you to be afraid of.
1.将①句翻译成中文。_____________________________________________________________
2.将②句翻译成英文。_____________________________________________________________
3.在③空格处填上适当的词。 __________　__________
4.You have nothing to be frightened.(同义句)_____________________________________
5. Find out the main idea of the message.________________________________________________
17
1、害羞时，大多数人脸发红，说话吞吞吐吐(结巴)
2、If shyness doesn’t stop you from doing what you want to do.
keep the things that you want to do
prevent
3、more, talk
4、There’s nothing for you be afraid of
5、首句
初三一轮复习七上Module1-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module1-6重点短语集锦：
Module1-3重点短语:
1.来自于 be from / come from 2.读书 read books 3.坐下 sit sown 4.站起来 stand up 5.在黑板上 on the blackboard 6.名字 first name/ given name 7.姓 family name / last name 8. 打篮球 play basketball 9. 踢足球 play football 10. 打乒乓球 play table tennis 11. 弹钢琴 play the piano 12. 骑自行车 ride a bike 13. 骑马 ride a horse 14. 一张我家庭的照片 a photo of my family 15. 欢迎某人到某地 welcome sb. to sp. 17. 国际学校 international school 18. 说英语 speak English 19. 在医院 in / at the hospital 20. 工厂经理 factory manager 21.酒店经理 hotel manager 22.在我的教室里 in my classroom 23.在我的课桌上 on my desk 24.在我们的学校 in our school 25.在上学 at school 26.在…前面 in front of 27.紧挨着，在…旁边 next to 28.在墙上 on the wall 29.在…后面 at the back of 30.在床底下 under the bed 31.在科学实验室里 in the science lab 32.在箱子里in the box
Module 4-6 重点短语
1.谈论 talk about 2.在Betty的家里 in Betty’s home 3.一个大家庭 a big family 4.感谢…thanks for … 5.拥有 have got 6.给某人做某物make sth for sb 7. 健康食品healthy food 8.一些果汁 some juice 9.一些西红柿some tomatoes 10.一些甜瓜some melons 11.保持健康keep healthy 12.在瓶子里in the bottle 13.一些土豆some potatoes 14.最喜欢的水果favourite fruit 15.在冰箱里in the fridge 16.一些面条some noodles 17.为了健康to be healthy 18.一瓶果汁a bottle of juice 19.中国茶Chinese tea 20.美国食物American food 21.三个汉堡包 three hamburgers 22. 水果和蔬菜fruit and vegetables 23. 去看电影go to the cinema 24. 在星期天on Sunday 25. 美好的祝愿/ 祝福你best wishes 26. 在一个寒冷的冬天的早晨on a cold winter morning 27. 上课have classes 28.游泳课 swimming lessons 29. 在早上/下午/ 晚上in the morning/afternoon/evening 30. 我最喜爱的电影明星my favourite film star 31. 去看电影的邀请an invitation to the cinema 32. 在大连体育馆at Dalian Stadium 33. 在周一的下午on Monday afternoon 34. 看望奶奶visit grandmother 35. 待在家里stay at home
Part2: Module1-3基础知识集锦：
1. practise 练习（动词） practise doing sth 练习干某事
和practise的用法一样的动词还有：finish, mind, suggest, enjoy, miss, feel like……..
2. class 班，班级（名词） class表示“几班”，Class One/ Class 1 （= the first class）一班
3. welcome adj. 受欢迎的; v. 欢迎 欢迎某人到某地welcome sb to sp
4. 国家 国人
China Chinese England English
Japan Japanese India Indian
Australia Australian France French
German Germany Canada Canadian
5.在英语中，有些名词在其后加’s 来表示所属关系，名词的这种形式称为名词的所有格，译为“…的”。
(1) 一般情况下，在单数名词词尾加 “’s” (2) 单数名词以s结尾，变所有格加 “’s”
(3) 以-s 结尾的复数名词只加 “’s” ④ 不以-s结尾的复数名词在词尾加 “’s”
(4) 所有格为无生命的事物，一般用of 结构。
6. 询问职业的句型：你妈妈是干什么的？
（1）What’s your mother’s job （2）What’s your mother （3）What does your mother do
7. there be 句型：there be句型 通常用来表示 某地有某物或某人。
(1)There is a computer on Miss Li’s desk..
思考句型转换：① 写一般疑问句及肯定和否定回答:... ② 改为否定句:... ③ 改为复数形式：…
（2）there be句型中的be动词的确定根据就近原则。
8.some 一些 adj.
（1）.some可用作形容词，即可修饰可数名词复数又可修饰不可数名词
（2）. some & any: 一般情况下，some用于肯定句中，any用于否定句和疑问句中。但当表示 要求、请求或希望得到肯定回答 的疑问句中,要用some。
9. in front of , in the front of:的用法：
同：均表示“在…前面”
异：in front of表示“在某物范围之外的前面”， in the front of表示“在某物范围之内的前面”
at the back of (与 in/ at the front of 相对)，表示“在…后面”
Module4-6基础知识集锦
1. have got/ has got: 有… There be 句型表示在某地有某物，而 have got 表示某人拥有某物.
She has got a big family. 她有一个大的家庭. ①否定句：She hasn’t got a big family. 她没有一个大的家庭. ②一般疑问句：Has she got a big family 她有一个大的家庭吗？③肯否定回答：Yes, she has. No, she hasn’t.
2.选择疑问句：基本结构：一般疑问句 + or + 其它。
注意：选择疑问句回答时要根据实际情况来回答，而不能用Yes/No回答。
3. 因…感谢某人： Thank…for… thank sb. for sth. =thanks for sth. thank sb. for doing sth.=thanks for doing 如：Thank you for your coming.感谢你的到来。
4. and/ or的用法：and 一般用在肯定句中，or 一般用在否定及疑问句中.
5. There are some apples on the tree. There is a bird in the tree.
属于树本身的用on, 不属于树本身的用in.
6.Make a family tree for your family. 为你的家庭绘一张家谱。总结：给某人做某物 make sth. for sb.
7.drink n.饮料；v.喝 drink作名词时，表示“饮料”总称时为不可数名词;drink还可表示“饮料的一杯或一份”。Eg. Can I have a drink drink作动词时，译为喝，饮；喝酒。
8.healthy（反义词）unhealthy，是在healthy前加上了前缀un-构成的，前缀"un-"通常放在一些形容词前表否定。类似的还有：unhappy unlucky unfair unusual unpleasant unimportant
9. would like ⑴想干某事 would like to do sth ⑵想要某物 would like sth ⑶would you like …的常用答语：同意：Yes, I’d like to. / Yes, please. 拒绝：Sorry, I’m afraid not. / No, thanks.
10. Let’s do sth用于邀请或建议某人和说话人一起去做某事。
Let’s do sth.的常用答语有：①That’s a good idea. ②Sure. ③OK. ④All right.
11. 特殊疑问句. 提问“星期几”用：What day；提问“日期”用What date; 提问“明确而具体的某一时刻”用When 或 What time; 提问价格要用How much或What’s the price of…
12. invite 名词形式：invitation
邀请某人做某事invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人去某地 invite sb. to sp.
(1) Lily邀请我去她的生日聚会。 Lily invites me to go to her birthday party.
(2)Tony和Tom邀请我去剧院。Tony and Tom invite me to the theatre.
(3) 谢谢你的邀请。Thank you for your invitation.
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. _____ is before Thursday.
A. Wednesday B. Friday C. Saturday D. Tuesday
( )2. Would you like _______ a football match
A. watch B. to watch C. watching D. watches
( )3. This is the twins’ bedroom. We can see ________beds .
A .May’ s and Joy’s B. May’ s and Joy C. May and Joy D. May and Joy’s
( ) 4. There is a red hat on the table .Please_____.
A put on it B put them on C put on mine D put it on
( ) 5. There _______ three desks and a computer in the room. A are B is C has D have
( ) 6. You can use the Internet ________ music.
A. downloads B. download C. downloading D. to download
( ) 7. —Hello! May I speak to Mr. Smith, please
—Sorry, he’s not in. Who's ____, Please
—________is Jack. A this , this B that, That C that ,This D this, that
( ) 8. -- ______ do you play tennis -- I play it every day.
A. How many B. How much C. How often D. How old
( )9. Daming ______ any brothers.
A. have got B. haven’t got C. has got D. hasn’t got
( )10. We often get together and ______stories.
A. say B. tell C. talk D. speak
( )11. There are more than 50 _____ in our school.
A. woman teachers B. woman teacher C. women teachers D. women teacher
( )12. Look！There's a beautiful table ______three legs over there.
A. have B. has C. with D. in
( )13. I have got a dog, _______ name is Zippy.
A. it’s B. their C. its D. it is
( )14. I have two pictures, one is big, ______ is small.
A. other B. the other C. others D. another
( )15. There is a picture ______ Lucy’s family ______ the wall.
A. of, on B. at, in C. of, in D. in, on
( )16. There are some birds _______ the picture ____ the classroom.
A. in, on B. in, in C. on. On D. on, in
( )17. ---Where is my pen ---_______. A. Here they are. B. Here it is. C. Here are you.
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. There are some _____________(tomato) and ___________(potato) in the basket.
2. Are there any __________(juice) in the glass
3. We have got some _________(apple) juice.
4. “Have you got any _________(beef) ” “Yes, we have.”
5. Milk and water are healthy _______(drink).
6. I want to have some _______(fish).
7.___________ (we) English teacher is Miss Li.
8. Mike ____________ (not can) swim. He is too young.
9. My ____________ ( father) car is white.
10. __________ ( I ) classroom is big and clean.
11. These _____________(America ) doctors ___________ (be ) in China now.
12. ____________ (this) are _________( I ) friends. They are from America.
13. What’s the __________(girl) name
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
Scientists are trying 1________ (make) deserts into good land again. They want 2________ (bring) water to the deserts, so people can grow crops and 3________ (live) there. They 4________ (learn) a lot about the deserts. But more and more of the earth is 5________ (become) deserts all the time.
Why is this true Scientists think that people are making deserts. People are doing bad things to the earth.
Some places on the earth 6________ (not have) much rain, but they don’t become deserts. This is because some green plants are growing there. Small green plants and grass 7________ (be) very important to dry places. Plants prevent the sun from 8________ (make) the earth drier. Plants prevent the wind from blowing the earth away. When a little bit of rain 9________ (fall), the plants hold the water. Without plants, the lands 10________ (become) deserts easily.
1______________ 2.______________ 3. ______________ 4. ______________ 5. _____________
6._____________ 7. _____________ 8._______________ 9._______________ 10._____________初三一轮复习Module 1--2
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module1-2重点短语集锦：
Module1重点短语：
1.欢迎回到welcome back to 2.充满…的be full of 3. 乘飞机飞回fly back 4.因为（短语）because of
5.乘飞机去香港fly to Hong Kong 6.玩的非常高兴have quite a good time 7.去观光go sightseeing
8. 乘坐豪华公交旅行去。。take a tour by coach to… 9.最好（不）做某事had better (not) do sth
10.在学期末at the end of the term 11.大量的趣事plenty of fun things 12. 动身，启程set off
13. 梦想做某事 dream about/ of doing sth 14.不能说话be unable to speak 15. 下车 get off
16. 在…的开始 at the start of…. 17. 在过去的16年里the last 16 years 18. 感兴趣地 with interest
19. 抱/挎着某人 hold sb in one’s arms 20. 眼里含着眼泪 with tears in one’s eyes 21. 即使 even if
22. 大声地 in a loud voice 23. 有很长的路要走 have got a long way to go
Module2 重点短语:
1.再次见到她真是太棒了. It’s great to see her again. 2. 她自己带我去那里. She took me there herself.
3.它怎么样 What’s it like 4. 同我们的一样大as big as ours 5. 担心…be worried about
6.其他的地方somewhere else 7.对…感到吃惊 be surprised at 8.通过考试 pass the exam
9.远离学校 away from school 10.在场或是缺席be present or absent 11. 演讲make a speech
12.告诉某人某事tell sb sth=tell sth to sb. 13.持续一小时last for an hour 14. 休息一下have a break
15.另外两节课two more lessons/ another two lessons 16.代表stand for 17.参加…考试have an exam in…
18.学着干… learn to do 19.代替instead of 20.干…很幸运be lucky to do sth 21.每学期一次once a term
Part2: Module1-2重点句子集锦
天气如何？ What’s the weather like today
2.你们英语老师人怎么样？ What’s your English teacher like
3.我看一看。 Let’s have a look. 4.管理一个大城市，保护人们不受侵害是很艰巨的工作。
It’s difficult to run a big city and protect people from crime
5.她不如她姐姐高。She isn’t as/so tall as her sister.
6.我敢肯定，在英语方面，我们比Park School要好。I bet we’re even better than Park School at English!
7.他的父母亲都在国外。Both of his parents are abroad.
8.我爸爸既不喜欢打扑克也不喜欢看电视。My father likes neither playing cards nor watching TV.
9.在那里我们的校长给我们作演讲并告诉我们有关学校的新闻.
There our head teacher makes a speech and tells us any news about school.
10.个人健康与安全教育课宣讲毒品和吸烟的危害性，以及一些其他内容。
PHSE is about the dangers of drugs and smoking, among other things.
11.下午上完两节课就放学了。We have two more lessons before school finishes.
12.有些同学不会做法国菜，会做意大利菜和西班牙菜，不过还没有人学做中国菜呢
Some people can do Italian and Spanish instead of French.
Part3: Module1-2重要知识点集锦
充满… be full of / be filled with 用…装满… ___________
如果你想用下落中的沙子装满袋子，你得移动卡车。
If you want to _______ the bag _______ ________ sand, you have to move the truck.
2.plenty of 意为“大量的，充足的”，后即可修饰可数名词也可修饰不可数名词，同义词组为 a lot of/ lots of/enough 在中国，有很多人失业。There _______ ________ _________people out of work in China.
不要担心！我们有足够的食物 Don’t worry. We have _______ __________food
【总结】修饰可数名词的有：__________________________修饰不可数名词的有：________________________既可修饰可数又可修饰不可数的是：_______________________
3.(1)dream of/ about + 名词，代词/ V-ing“梦到，梦见，梦想
eg. The girl dreamt about her mother last night. 拓展：dream +名词/代词/ that从句
in front of/ in the front of 在…前面（3）set off“出发、动身”=set out
We’ll set off as soon as he comes back.
补充：set about着手做set about doing sth/set out to do开始做某事set up搭起，建起 set free 释放
4. Lin nodded, unable to speak. This was his first long trip by train at the start of his new life,
_____________(leave 填适当形式) his village and his home for the last 16 years.
.nod 过去式 过去分词：____________;
(2). unable to speak形容词短语表状态。不能做… be unable to do--- 能够做…_______________.
a. 他还太小，他不能自己穿衣服。He is so young. He ____ ______ ___ _______himself.
=He is ______young ______ ______himself.
b. 他足够大了，可以自己穿衣了。
He is ______ _____ ____ ______himself.=He is so old ______he is _____ ______ _____himself
(3). at the start of = at the beginning of
(4). leaving—现在分词短语作伴随状语, 表示一个动作发生的同时伴随另一个动作
Ex. a. That was my first trip by plane, ____________(leave) my village and my home.
b. The teacher came into the classroom, ___________(carry) books in his hand.
(5).孩子们站在树下，又唱又说。The children ________ ________ the tree, _________and ___________.
5. He held Jin in his arms. With tears in his eyes, Jin pushed Lin away. “Go, brother. Write to us as soon as you get there, OK ”
(1).拥抱某人hold sb in one’s arms hold过去时，过去分词____________ ___________
那个女人抱着一个孩子。The woman held a baby ______ _____arms.
(2).此处with的用法：作伴随状语， without 用法同
没有问为什么父母认为孩子们是错误的 _______ ____ why, the parents think the kids _____ _______
(3). 一…就… ______________ 直到…才…______________, 引导的是_____________从句，
如果主句为一般将来时态，从句要用___________ 表将来--------即主将从现
Ex. 一到那里就给我们写信。 Please ____ _____us ____ _______ ____you _______ there.
直到妈妈回来我才上床睡觉。 I didn’t go to bed _________ my mother _________back.
6. The other people watched___________(without 适当形式) interest.
(1).interest 在此为_____词，兴趣,感兴趣的事 (2). adj. 感兴趣的(指人) ________指物___________,
短语：对..感兴趣： be interested in == show interest in == take an interest in
(3).interest 还可作动词，某物使某人感兴趣 interest sb.
One of the things he became ______________( interest) in was foreign language.
7.Finally a man ___________(wear适当形式) glasses spoke in a loud voice.
wearing glasses是现在分词短语作定语，表达主动含义。过去分词也可作定语，表达被动含义
. The boys ___________(play) basketball are from Class 16.
. There are lots of children _____________(play ) football.
(3). The girl ____________(call) Lingling is my friend.
8. I have got a long way to go. have got a long way to go=have a long way to go此句中， to go做way的_________语. (1).There are lots of things_____________(do)
(2).I haven’t got anything _____________(wear).(3). I have a lot of homework _______________(do).
9.A地与B地还有多远: A is +时间或距离+away from+B.
他的家离学校有2千米远。His home ________ two kilometers _______ ________his school.
10. It is +adj. +to do sth.句型
管理一个大城市，保护人们不受侵害是很艰巨的工作。It is difficult____________________________.
11. as… as…意为“同…一样…”第一个as是副词，后接形容词或副词原级；第二个as是连词，引导从句。其否定形式为: not as/so… as…,意为“不如…”可以与比较级形式进行转换。
例：她不如她姐姐高。She ___________________ her sister. =Her sister __________________ she is.
12.擅长…,在…方面做得好_________________ / ___________________________
13.(1) both只能用来表示“两者都”，_______表示三者或三者以上都。
both 和all在句中一般要置于be动词，系动词和情态动词之后，实义动词之前。另外，both 和all可以直接放在名词的前面，在代词宾格前要加of, 而of 有时也可以省略。
例如：他的父母亲都在国外。 _________ his parents are abroad.
所有的男孩都在农场里工作. _______ the boys are working in the farm.
(2) neither两者中每一个都不 例如：Neither the boys ______(be) from Europe.
either 两者中每一个都 例如：这两本书都很有趣，所以我把它们都买下了。
Either of the books _______ interesting, so I bought ________of them.
(3) 拓展：each“两个或两个以上中的每一个”强调个体
every“三个或三个以上中的每一个”强调全部
例如：①There are many trees on ____ side of the road. A. both B. each C. every
②There are many flags on ____ side of the square . A .all B. each C. every
tell为及物动词,后可加双宾语。告诉某人某事_________________ =____________________
其他后边可以加双宾语的动词有__________________________________________________
告诉某人做某事: _____________, 其他后边可加 sb to do sth的动词还有________________________
15. PHSE is about the dangers of drugs and smoking, among other things.
其中among意思为“在…中间”，表示的范围为三者或三者以上；而between表示“在…之间”的含义时指代的范围只能是两者，通常与and连用，构成between…and…结构
例：(1) ________ the 8 subjects, I like English best. (2) Our house is ______ the park and the post office.
16.We have two more lessons before school finishes. 其中two more= another two.
例：I have three more places to go.(同义句转化) I have ____________ _________ places to go.
17. Some people can do Italian and Spanish instead of French.
此处instead of 为“而不是”的意思。Instead of 后可加名词、代词或Ving.
例：我选择去北京，而不是上海. I choose ______ _______ to Beijing________ _______ Shanghai.
我写作业了，没有打球. I did my homework __________ _______ ___________ basketball.
【巩固提升】
一、单选
( )1. Let's look at the bag. Can you see _____“s”on the corner of_____ bag
　　 A. a, a B. a, the C. an, a D. an, the
( )2. Our teacher told us that ___ moon moves around ____ earth, and_____ earth circles____ sun.
　　 A. a, a, a, a B. an, an, an, an C. the, the, the, the D. /, /, /, /
( )3. _________ mother is a worker.
A. Mary and Mike's B. Mary's and Mike's C. Mary's and Mike D. Mary and Mike
( )4.The room is too small, there' s no enough ________for another desk.
　 A. place B. room C. floor D. ground
( )5.-- Which room shall we live in tonight – In __________.
　　 A. the Room 406 B. Room 406 C. the 406 Room D. 406 Room
( )6. We'll be away for two weeks because we'll have a ___________.
　　 A. two-weeks holiday B. two weeks' holidays C. two- week holiday D. two-weeks' holiday
( )7. The number of the students in our grade _______about six ______, ______ of them are girls.
　　 A. are, hundreds, two- thirds B. is, hundred, two- third
　　 C. is, hundred, two thirds. D. are, hundreds, two third
( )8. My home is about ________ from my school.
　　 A. 15 minutes B. 10 minute's ride C. 20 minutes by bike D. 15- minute's on foot.
( )9. We are doing much better ______ English _______ our teacher's help.
A. in, at B. at, in C. in, with D. with, with
( )10. He walked ___ fast for us ____catch up with. A. so, that B. such, that C. enough, to D. too, to
( )11. --I don't think it very expensive to buy a family computer here.
　　 -- Really I'll buy _______ next week.A. it B. this C. one D. mine
( )12. Oh, boys and girls, come in please. And make ___at home.A. yourself B. us C. you D. yourselves
( )13. Lucy has been to ______ many times this year.A. his uncle B.her uncles C. uncle’s D. her uncle’s
( )14. The boys always stay here for _________.
A.one and half hour B. one and half a hour C. one and a half hours D. one and half hours
( )15.What a nice garden! How well it ___ after! A. has looked B. look C. is looked D. is looking
( )16. The plane to Hong Kong____________at this time of day.
A. takes off B. gets to C. leaves for D. takes away
( )17. Reading in bed isn't ______ our eyes. A. good at B. weak in C. bad for D. good for
( )18. _________children there are in a family,__________their life will be.
A. The less; the better B. The fewer; the better C. Fewer; richer D. More; poorer
( )19. These books should____ to the library on time. A.send B.be returned C.give back D. be got back
( )20. We find it _____________ to do some reading every day.
A. easily B. be enjoyable C. helpful D. interested
二、单词适当形式填空
1. The______________(clean) clean the roads early in the morning.
2. Tom was the______________ (five) runner past the finishing line.
3. You'd better ______________ (not drink) too much water before you go to bed.
4. The old man looked at them ______________ ( angry) and couldn't say a word.
5. The panda has been ______________ (die) for about two months.
6. In summer it ______________ (rain) little in this city, so everyone must save water.
7. Look! The Greens ______________ (get) ready for the journey.
8. So far, most of the children______________(see) the film "Harry Potter".
9. There______________ (be) a talk on science in our school tomorrow afternoon.
10. I______________ (forget) the time for the meeting, so I was late.
11.The flowers must _____________（water）every day.
12.Take off your shoes before____________ (enter) the room.
13.Katina asked me to leave the door____________ (open).
14.As a Chinese, I’m____________ (pride) of my motherland.
15.Among these stories, which do you think is________________ (annoy) one
16.The old man planned to give away all he had______________ (help) the people in need.
17. Don’t speak to the disabled people______________ (polite) or laugh at them.
18. His car_____________ (break) down half way once more, so it needed repairing indeed.
19. My father is so_______________ (energy) that he never appears tired.
20. Nobody likes a person who is____________ (honest).
三、完成句子：根据汉语意思完成英语句子，每空一词。(10分)
1. 你认为潍坊怎么样 (think of)
2. 嘲笑处于困境中的人是不礼貌的. (it is + adj + to do)
3. 交警告诉这位司机不要再犯同样的错误。
The traffic policeman told the driver not to ____________________________any more.
4. 学英语最好的方法是尽可能的多说。(as much as possible)
5. 你酷爱什么 (be crazy about)
6. 把音乐关小点您介意吗 (turn down)
7. 这棵树一定属于我们。(belong to)
8. 他太害羞，不敢在公共场合做演讲。(too…to…, speech)
9. 我一收到你的来信就会打电话给你。(as soon as, hear from)
10.刘翔是世界上最受欢迎的体育明星之一。(one of …)
PAGE初三一轮复习八下Module7-8
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M7-8中出现的hardly等单词、wake up等短语，并灵活运用状语从句
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过讨论爱好培养对他人不同爱好的尊重，建立良好的同学关系, 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M7-8词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M7-8重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择
1. Can you _______ at 2:30 p.m, mum
A. wake me up B. wake up me C. awake me up D. awake up me
2. The physics teacher told the boys and girls that light _______faster than sound.
A. travel B. travels C. traveled D. was travelling
3. This song is very beautiful _______its lyrics(歌词)
A. except B. except for C. besides D. beside
4. Mr. Chen is ____, so don’t make any noise.
A. sleepy B. going to sleep C. sleeping D. falling sleep
5. What he said _______the English teacher________.
A. make, angry B. makes, angrily C. makes, angry D. made, to be angry
6. There is a boy ____ Tom in our class. I saw him____on the playground just now.
A. calling, playing B. called; played C. called; playing D. calling; played
7. I felt ________ tried because I had ________ homework.
A. too much; much too B. very much; too much C. too much; very much D. much too; too much
8. — Who do you usually spend your holiday ____ — Of course my family.
A. for B. about C. with D. /
9. Our teacher made a ____ of books for us to read during the summer holidays.
A. note B. show C. menu D. list
10. Mary has been in Beijing for two years and she has ____ Chinese friends here.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
11. I _________you to have a wonderful with your classmates on the camp.
A. hope B. wish C. ask D. think
12. Try to guess its meaning when you meet a new word. Don’t ____ the dictionary all the time.
A. work on B. wait for C. depend on D. take up
13. When I got home, I found my brother _____ model planes.
A. makes B. made C. make D. making
14. Mr Smith asked _____ off because he didn’t feel well.
A. three day B. three days C. three days’ D. three-day
15. On the first day the teacher let us ____ resolutions for the new term.
A. make B. to make C. write D. to write
16. I won’t spend _____ much time _____ video games.
A. such; playing B. such; play C. so; playing D. so; play
17. ---Hurry up! The bus is coming. --- Wait a minute. Don’t cross the street ___ the traffic lights are green.
A. until B. after C. while D. since
18. They were celebrating the New Year _______ it rained hard.
A. till B. when C. as soon as D. if
19._________fine weather! Let’s go for a picnic on _________fine day.
A. What a, such a B. What, such a C. How, so D. How, so a
20.Changjiang River is ____________river in China.
A. the first longest B. the one long C. the one longest D. the first longe
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. I remember ________ (turn off ) the light in my bedroom, but now it’s still on.
2. Mother promised _________________( buy ) a new bike for me.
3. If he __________(not be) early, __________(not wait) for him.
4. We must clean and tidy the room when we finish _________(paint).
5. It’s hard work to get everything ready on time ________(print).
6. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
7. Certainly I posted your letter—I remember _________(post) it.
8. She ________(fall) in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
9. They ________(listen) to the teacher attentively （专心地） when the bell _______(ring).
10. We couldn’t decide whether ________(buy) the red one or the blue one.
三、翻译句子（C层选做）
1. 超市在饭店的对面。(opposite)_________________________________________________.
2. 黄河是中国最长的河之一。(one of )
______________________________________________________________________.
3. 国家美术馆是一个有许多著名绘画作品的博物馆。(with)
the National Galley______________________________________________________.
4. 昨天我们在公园里玩得多开心啊！(have fun)______________________________________________.
5. 他还对许多其它的事情感兴趣。（also, be interested in ）
__________________________________________________________________________初三一轮复习八下Module7-10
Module7重点短语:
1、欢迎到北海公园welcome to Beihai Park 2.几乎不能听到街上的车辆 hardly hear the traffic in the streets 3.甚至能听到鸟在唱歌 can even hear the birds singing 4. 想保护全国公园的环境want to protect the environment of parks all over China 5. 沿湖边走一走walk around the lake 6. 爬上白塔climb up to Baita 7.音乐会你打算怎么办？What are you going to do about the concert 8. 从上面能看到公园的全貌see the whole park from up there 9.我的手和胳膊疼 my hand and arm hurt 10.与乐队去其他人一起表演play with the rest of the orchestra 11. 告诉她真相tell her the truth 12. 练习的太多practice too much 13. 告诉她不要担心tell her not to worry 14. 告诉我照顾好自己tell me to look after myself15. 叫我休息，尽快好起来tell me to rest and get better soon 16. 去国家公园放松放松go to one of our national parks to relax 17.度假spend some time off 18.以怪石著称be famous for the strange shape of rocks 19.看上去像look like 20.很少有人few people 21.在一个小湖边露营camp by a small lake 22.在深夜during the night 23.好象as if=as though 24.问他们是什么声响asked them what the noise was 25.出了帐篷看看怎么回事left /leave the tent to find out what it was/is 26.告诉我们悄悄的出去tell us to come out quietly 27.指着森林point into the forest 28.跳到树上jump up into the trees 29.通过云端through the clouds 30.从树上揪下一片叶子pull a leaf off a plant 31.摘树叶是不对的. It is wrong to pull leaves 32.中国的第二大淡水湖the second largest fresh water lake in China
Module8重点短语：
1、五.一节计划 plans for May Day holiday 2、和他们呆在一起 stay with them 3、在青岛度过几天 spend a few days in Qingdao 4、呆在那儿直到5月5号stay there until 5th May 5、在五.一节 on May Day / on Labour Day / on 1st May 6、离五.一最近的星期一 the closest Monday to 1st May 7、休一天的假 have one day off 8、在一个不同的日期 on a different date 9、在九月份的第一个星期一 on the first Monday in September 10、做特别的事情 do something special 11、去野营 go camping 12、在好的地方野餐 have a picnic somewhere nice 13、假期的结束 the end of the vacation 14、开始变得更加凉爽 start to get cooler 15、回到学校去 go back to school 16、五一节一结束就as soon as the May Day holiday is over 17、在暑假开始以前 before the start of the summer holidays 18、玩得开心点 enjoy ourselves =have a good time=have fun 19.全世界的人们 people all over the world 20.庆祝新年 celebrate the new year 21.依靠;根据 depend on 22.开始干某事 start doing 23.时代广场Times Square 24.等待wait for 25.听音乐、唱老歌、玩儿listen to music, sing traditional songs and have fun 26.临近12点 just before 12 o’clock 27.倒数 count down 28.一…就 as soon as 29.唱起一首名为《友谊地久天长》的古老歌曲 sing a song called Auld Lang Syne 30.相聚 get together 31.到户外走一走 go out for a walk 32.下决心 make resolutions33.写下来列个单子 write down a list of things 34.帮..克服困难help out
35.许诺要实现这些决心 promise to follow their resolutions 36.向..告别say goodbye to
Part2: Module7-8基础知识集锦：
Module7 1. I can hardly hear the traffic in the streets and no one is shouting.
hardly表示否定，意为：几乎不I haven’t seen him for years but he has hardly changed at all.
表示否定的副词还有：seldom , rarely ,never（ 注，含有这些副词的句子表示否定）
2. It’s so quiet. 这里如此安静。 She is such a pretty girl. 她是如此漂亮的女孩。
such是形容词修饰名词或名词词组，such +（a/an) +（形容词）+名词。
so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so +形容词或者副词。so 还可以与表示数量的形容词many, few, much, little连用后加名词。so many books, so much water, so few people, so little money
拓展： so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
He works so hard that he can get good grade. 他学习如此努力，他肯定能得到好的成绩。
He is such a clever boy that he can work out the difficult problem.
他是如此聪明的一个男孩，他能解决这个难题。
3.We are spending some time off in Hunan Province.
(1) spend 此处为“度过”， 例:Will you spend a long time next time
(2) spend “花费” 总结take, cost, pay，spend的用法区别
4. I heard a loud noise, as if someone was singing. 我听到好大的噪音，好像有人在唱歌. as if 意为“好像，似乎”，后加句子。如：You look as if you’ve had a good time.
5. hope与wish：两个都可以表示“希望”，动词用法如下：
(1). hope的用法：①.hope for+名词； ②. hope to do sth； ③. hope +that 从句
Ex：I hope that I can see you one day.(同义句转化) I hope to see you one day.
(2).wish的用法：①.wish to do sth； ②. wish sb to do sth； ③.wish + that从句
【拓展】： 课文原句Wish you were here! 译为：如果你们在这就好了。此句只是表示一种主观的愿望，与事实不符，所以从句用过去时态表示虚拟。例：我希望我可以飞。 I wish I could fly.
6. We are going to the second largest fresh water lake in China. “the +序数词+形容词或副词最高级+单数名词”，表示“第几最…” Ex: Wang Lin is the second tallest boy in our class.
Module8 1. depend on 依靠，依赖，取决于 independent adj. 独立的
It can depend on the seasons, the moon or the sun.
2. count down 倒数，倒计时 Just before 12 o’clock,everyone counts down from 10: 10,9,8…
3. get together聚会 get常见短语：get back归还get to到达get there 到那里 get home 到家
get along/on well with和……相处融洽 get on/ off 上/下车
4. help out帮助…克服困难 help sb out 帮助某人解决难题 I will help more at home.
1）help的具体用法：help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事 help sb. with sth.在某方面帮助某人
help oneself to...随便吃(喝/用)些……
2）名词help的相关短语： ask for help求助 without one’s help没有某人的帮助
with one’s help = with the help of sb在某人的帮助下
5. promise v. 保证;发誓
1）promise to do sth. 承诺做某事 promise not to do sth.承诺不做某事 promise（sb.）that...允诺……
2）promise作名词时的相关短语： break a promise违背诺言 give a promise给予保证
keep a promise遵守诺言 make a promise to sb.(对某人)作出允诺
6. 时间状语从句：通常由以下连词连接：when ,while, after, before, as soon as ,since, till /until
1). 由when, while引导的时间状语从句；它们都表示当…时候，但有不同：when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词，又可以是瞬间动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”：
While引导的从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的.
2).由before和after引导的时间状语从句.before ,after可以作介词，后加动词ing或者名词，代词
3). 由till或until引导的时间状语从句。till和until做连词时一般情况下两者可以互换，直到…才：如果主句中的谓语动词是瞬时动词时，必须用否定形式；如果主句中的谓语动词是延续性动词 ( http: / / baike. / view / 238104.htm" \t "_blank )时，用肯定形式。例如：I didn't go to bed until（till）my father came back.直到我父亲回来我才上床睡觉。 Please wait until I arrive.在我到达之前请等我。 I worked until he came back.我工作到他回来为止。
4). 由since引导的时间状语从句。一般情况下，从句谓语动词用一般过去时，而主句的谓语动词用现在完成时。但在It is ＋时间＋since从句的句型中，主句多用一般现在时。
5). 由as soon as表示“一……就”。例如： I will go there as soon as I finish my breakfast.。
注意：时间状语从句和if 条件句有共同的特征：主句如果表示一般将来时态，从句需要用一般现在时态来表示.
一、单项选择
1. Can you _____ at 2:30 p.m, mum A. wake me upB. wake up me C. awake me upD. awake up me
2. The physics teacher told the boys and girls that light _______faster than sound.
A. travel B. travels C. traveled D. was travelling
3. This song is very beautiful _______its lyrics(歌词)A. except B. except for C. besides D. beside
4. Mr. Chen is ___, so don’t make any noise.A. sleepy B. going to sleep C. sleeping D. falling sleep
5. What he said _______the English teacher___.
A. make, angry B. makes, angrily C. makes, angry D. made, to be angry
6. There is a boy ____ Tom in our class. I saw him____on the playground just now.
A. calling, playing B. called; played C. called; playing D. calling; played
7. I felt ________ tried because I had ________ homework.
A. too much; much too B. very much; too much C. too much; very much D. much too; too much
8. — Who do you usually spend your holiday ___ — Of course my family.A. for B. aboutC. withD. /
9 teacher made a _ of books for us to read during the summer holidays. A.noteB. showC.menu D. list
10 Shehas been in Beijing for two years and she has _Chinese friends here.
AlittleB.a littleC.fewD.a few
11. I ____you to have a wonderful with your classmates on the camp.A. hope B. wishC. ask D. think
12. Try to guess its meaning when you meet a new word. Don’t ____ the dictionary all the time.
A. work on B. wait for C. depend on D. take up
13. When I got home, I found my brother _____ model planes. A. makes B. madeC. makeD. making
14. Mr Smith asked _off because he didn’t feel well.A.three dayB. three daysC. three days’D. three-day
15. On the first day the teacher let us _resolutions for the new term.A.makeB.to makeC.writeD.to write
16. I won’t spend __ much time __video games.A. such; playing B. such; play C. so; playingD. so; play
17. ---Hurry up! The bus is coming. --- Wait a minute. Don’t cross the street ___ the traffic lights are green.A. until B. after C. while D. since
18. They were celebrating the New Year _______ it rained hard.A. till B. when C. as soon as D. if
19._________fine weather! Let’s go for a picnic on _________fine day.
A. What a, such a B. What, such a C. How, so D. How, so a
20.Changjiang River is ____________river in China.
A. the first longest B. the one long C. the one longest D. the first longe
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. I remember ________ (turn off ) the light in my bedroom, but now it’s still on.
2. Mother promised _________________( buy ) a new bike for me.
3. If he __________(not be) early, __________(not wait) for him.
4. We must clean and tidy the room when we finish _________(paint).
5. It’s hard work to get everything ready on time ________(print).
6. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
7. Certainly I posted your letter—I remember _________(post) it.
8. She ________(fall) in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
9. They ________(listen) to the teacher attentively （专心地） when the bell _______(ring).
10. We couldn’t decide whether ________(buy) the red one or the blue one.
三、翻译句子
1. 超市在饭店的对面。(opposite)_________________________________________________.
2. 黄河是中国最长的河之一。(one of )
______________________________________________________________________.
3. 国家美术馆是一个有许多著名绘画作品的博物馆。(with)
the National Galley______________________________________________________.
4. 昨天我们在公园里玩得多开心啊！(have fun)__________________________________________.
5. 他还对许多其它的事情感兴趣。（also, be interested in ）
__________________________________________________________________________
Module9重点短语:
1.不错 Not bad 2.擅长于 be good at 3.出现，发生 come up 4.期待look forward to 5.错过了最后的排练 miss the final practice 6.目的是 so that 7.独自on one’s own 8.一个借口an excuse 9.避免和某人的矛盾 avoid problems with sb 10.尽力去做某事 try to do sth 11.她真勇敢. It was very brave of her12.一个善解人意的想法 a kind thought 13.演奏这首音乐 play the music14.请老师重写最后的舞曲ask their teacher to rewrite the final dance music 15.我打赌 I bet … 16.真正的英雄 a real hero17. one of China’s famous heroes 中国最著名的英雄18.give one’s life to 献身于19.成为一名医生 become a doctor 20. 照顾,照看 look after=take care of 21.受伤的士兵 injured soldiers 22. 在战争中 in the war 23.invent new treatments 发明新的治疗方式 24.open hospitals 开办医院25.give treatment to local people and soldiers 给当地人民和士兵提供治疗26.without stopping to rest 不停下来休息 27.perform operations 做手术28.in spite of 尽管 29.during an operation 在手术中30.in the end 在最后31.使他成为英雄 make him a hero
Module10重点短语：
1.航班号flight number 2. 它在那儿There it is 3. 想同你一起去would like to go with you 4. 我也是so would I 5. 乘火车去巴黎take the/a train to Paris 6. 所有其它的动物the other animals7.去参加一个大型户外流行音乐会go to a big outdoor pop concert 8．担心..be afraid that.. 9.飞机会出故障something would go wrong with the plane10 别傻了。 Don’t be silly. 11. 同你们所有人呆在这儿stay here with you all12. 前往伦敦航班的乘客passengers for flight to London13 保持联系stay in touch (with sb) 14. 一路平安Have a safe trip15.飞往fly to../take a/the plane to/go to..by plane 16. 因公出差 go away on business 17. 不得不独自呆在家里have to stay at home 18. 和…一样简单 as easy as 19. 一个14岁的女孩a 14-year–old girl =a girl of 14 years old 20. 对做饭知之甚少know little about cooking 21. 用…填满fill …with 22. 知道做什么 know what to do 23. 怎样照顾我们自己how to look after ourselves24. 一些重要的事情something important 25. 把汤熬糊 burn the soup26. 基本的生活技能basic life skills 27. 尤其重要especially important28. 得到足够的锻炼 get enough practice 29. 学会做饭 learn to cook30．有写作业的时间 have time for their homework 31. 上大学go to college32. 做一些简单的饭菜 cook some simple dishes 33. 在他看来in his opinion 34. 太多依赖父母 depend too much on their parents 35.打扫房间tidy up your room36. 穿着得体dress oneself properly 37.一个完美的假日a perfect holiday 38.不得不单独待在家里have to stay at home alone 39 你的父母在身边 your parents are around 40．我的很多同学many of my classmates 41比如做饭和洗衣服such as cooking and washing clothes
Part2: Module9-10基础知识集锦
1.语法聚焦：状语从句
（一）because 引导的原因状语从句与so 引导的结果状语从句可以互换：
注：because从句如果放于句首应该与主句以逗号隔开，放于句末则不用。此外，because和 so 不能同时出现在同一个句子中。
（二）so that 引导的目的状语从句与so引导的结果状语从句区别：
注：so that引导的目的状语从句中时态表示未来、可能性，常用could，will, would, can 等词，而 so 引导的结果状语从句常表示动作已经发生。
（三）so…that...与such…that….引导的结果状语从句的区别：
1). so + adj./adv. + that…. 2). such + (a/an)+adj. +n. +that
★so that 常可以用too…to或enough to 同义句转化。
2). such 是形容词，修饰名词或名词词组，so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many，few，much， little连用，形成固定搭配。
Ex:用so/such 填空： ①_____ much/little money; ②______ nice a flower;
③_____ a fool; ④_______a nice flower; ⑤______ many/ few flowers;
⑥_____a lot of people ⑦______ bad weather; ⑧_______nice flowers
2. on one’s own “独自，自己，单独地”，相当于by oneself
拓展： owner n.“主人，拥有者” own adj.自己的 own v.“拥有”
3.avoid 作动词，意为“避免、躲开”，后接v-doing形式、名词、代词作宾语。
4. It was very brave of her. brave adj.勇敢的 bravely adv. 勇敢地
★ It is + adj. + for (of) sb. to do sth. 当形容词修饰人的性格特征的时用of; 如：kind；clever；
generous(慷慨的); brave; gentle（温柔的）; honest; friendly; stupid； 当形容词修饰物的特征时用for,
如：easy，interesting, difficult, hard,
5. 用real/really填空：________good; a _______hero; _______ famous
6. one of + the 形容词的最高级+名词复数最…之一
7. give one’s life to sth. / doing sth. 献身，捐躯 注意: to 为介词，后跟动名词
【拓展】：look forward to doing 期待做某事 be/ get used to doing 习惯于做某事
8.hard adj.困难的----同义词 difficult adv.努力地---- work hard / study hard
hardly adv.几乎不(表否定)【拓展】：never，seldom, few, little, rarely, no, nothing, nobody…
Ex:1). He can _________(hard) swim. 2). He studies _________(hard) than last year.
3). It’s very __________(hard) for us to translate the text.
9. in spite of 尽管，后跟名词，代词，动名词ing ; although（though）后加句子
都不与but 连用 Ex: 1) Although she cut her hand,she went on studying. 同义句转化
=>She went on studying in spite of cutting her hand.
10. end v. 结束，终止 n. ending结局; 结尾
in the end 最后，终于 == at last / finally; at the end of .. 在…末尾
Ex: 1) At the end of the road, there is a hosptal.
2) In the end/ At last / Finally， he went to the college.
11. have to 不得不 have to do sth 否定形式：don’t have to do
12 . invent 动词：发明，创造; n. 发明者_________; n. 发明，创造___________
【M10基础知识】1.would 用法 1). 表示想象,推测或可能，would do
2). would like to do sth. == I want to do sth. 想做…
2. so +助动词+ 主语 表示：..也是, 助动词根据前文变化，如do/does/did /am/is /are , can /could。
Tom likes playing table tennis. So he does.(确实如此).
I can play the violin. So can she. (她也会)
There is nothing wrong with it.== Nothing is wrong with it. ==Nothing goes wrong with it.
go wrong with 出故障， go 根据人称，时态而变化
1). Something _________________(出故障) with our TV yesterday.
2). Something is wrong with your watch. 同义句= Something _____ _______ _______ your watch.
4. stay in touch (with) == keep in touch (with) 和…保持联系 lose touch with 和..失去联系
5. take…to ==go to…by…. 乘…去… I will ______ ______ plane ______ Paris.
== I will ______ ______Paris ______plane. == I will ______ ______Paris.
6. as …as 像…一样 中间是形容词或副词的原级。 not so (as) ….as 表示不如、不及
Tom 跑的跟Jim 一样快。 Tom runs Jim.
Tom不如Jim 跑的快。 Tom run Jim.
7. I can fill an empty stomach with tomato
拓展：be full of …装满了… The bottle is full of water
一、单项选择:
( ) 1. We should go by bus_____ get there earlier.A. as soon as B. where C. in order to D. as
( ) 2. My brother left school in 2005, and since then he _____in Beijing.
A. lives B. lived C. will live D. has lived
( )3. Jane, please turn off the lights _____you leave the classroom.
A. after B. before C. until D. but
( )4. Betty put on her raincoat _______she wouldn’t get wet.
A.in order to B. so as not C. so that D. just as
( )5. It was really selfless _______ Bethune to help Chinese people. A. for B. to C. in D. of
( )6. Why did he perform operations ____soldiers A. on B.for C.to D.with
( )7. We will send the presents to Daming _______we receive them.
A.until B.as soon as C.before D.since
( )8. He has lived in England for a year, ________his English is still poor.
A.although B.but C.because D.so
( )9. He tried to ____meeting me in the street because he didn’t pay my money back.
A.avoid B.hide C.enjoy D.look forward to
( ) 10. -That’s my flight! Goodbye, everyone! -Byebye! _______.
A. So do I B. Stay in touch C. There it is D. Thanks
( ) 11. All living things __the sun for their growth.A. depend ofB. fill with C. full of D. depend on
( )12. Tom has visited Beijing. ____________. I like it very much.
A. So I do. B. So have I C. So do I D. So I have
( )13. The trip cost __ that they all went.A. such little B. so little C. so muchD. such much
( )14. He runs ______ to catch up with Tom.A. enough fast B. fast very C. too fast D. fast enough
( )15. Is there _____ in today’s newspaper --No, there isn’t.
A. anything new B. new anything C. something new D. new something
( )16. ---“Do you think the chicken tastes _______ ” ---“She cooked it ____, I think”
A. good, good B. well, well C. well, good D. good, well
二、根据单词的适当形式填空
1. He gave his life to _________(save) the poor children.
2._________(protect) our world is our duty.3. I’ll go to the movies if it_______(not rain).
4. I remember____________(give) the pen back to you. Why do you ask me again？
5. Tom went to school without ____________(have) breakfast.
6. You’d better go ____________(immediate).7. Something ____________(go) wrong with it just now.
8.I _________ (do) my homework while my parents____________(watch) TV at 8 o’clock last night
9. They started as soon as they _________________ (receive)my telephone.
10. He ________________ (leave) as soon as he _________________ (drink)up his coffee.
11. Can Jim write as (careful) as Kate 12. There is much more _____ (learn) than cooking.
13. He worked hard enough (catch) up with others.
拓展训练：（C层选做）
Each morning, I walked past a security guard(保安). He 1_____ everyone that walked by him. I 2_____ how he knew so many people by their first names. The first few times I saw him. I didn’t say hello back to him 3_____ he greeted me. I was lost in my own world. On Monday he asked, “How was your 4_____ ” I told him about my visit to my sick, elderly mother. He told me how 5_____ he was for my mother’s sickness. As I walked away, I realized I did not even know his 6_____. The following day, I asked, “What’s your name ” He answered, “Gary.” I said, “I’m Deborah.” After that, we talked a couple of times a week. We 7_____ stories about our weekends, our dreams, and our families. Gary got offered a new job and moved 8_____. It has been years since I last spoke to him, yet the memory feels like yesterday.
I look back at what became a friendship of sharing stories from the heart. When you say 9_____ to a stranger(陌生人) you become a pebble(鹅卵石) thrown into a lake. With each ripple(涟漪) you create, you spread 10_____ that continues to give.
( ) 1. A. watched B. believed C. thanked D. greeted
( ) 2. A. complained B. admired C. expected D. forgot
( ) 3. .A. when B. until C. before D. and
( ) 4. A. visit B. weekend C. mother D. sickness
( ) 5. A. afraid B. glad C. sorry D. surprised
( ) 6. A. age B. job C. name D. family
( ) 7. A. wrote B. heard C. read D. shared
( ) 8. A. away B. over C. on D. in
( ) 9. A. yes B. hello C. no D. goodbye
( ) 10. A. news B. virus C. love D. sadness初三一轮复习八上Module5-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M5-6中出现的chance等单词、be able to 等短语，并灵活运用if从句。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.通过了解不同国家的影视文化,培养对他国影视文化的爱好, 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M5-6词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M5-6重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1. He lives in a poor place, so he has no _______ to hear popular music.
A. advice B. text C. chance D. information
( )2. I am busy. Can you help me ________ the housework
A. for B. with C. in D. onto
( )3. All the people in the office believe Jack, because he is always a(n) ____ man.
A. friendly B. lonely C. poor D. honest
( )4. She is _______ good girl and we all like to play with her. A. so B. so a C. such D. such a
( )5. My father often warns me ______ with that bad boy.
A. not to play B. not playing C. don’t play C. not play
( )6. If there _______ no red light, you can press the blue button.
A. are B. is C. will be D. were
( )7. It takes _______ practice to become a good swimmer.
A. a lot of B. many C. a few D. a little
( )8. Please _____ the computer games. I don’t want my computer to get a virus.
A. take on B. take off C. turn up D. turn down
( )9. The rich man gave me much money yesterday, but I _______ it.
A. received B. accepted C. borrowed D. refused
( )10. Finally I realized _________ I was wrong, so I said sorry to him.
A. who B. if C. that D. which
( )11. I don’t like playing with Jane. I’d rather _______ in the park alone.
A. playing B. play C. to play D. played
( )12. — Sally doesn’t feel well today, so she can’t see the film with us. — _______
A. What a shame! B. Why not C. That is great. D. Don’t mention it.
( )13. Who can tell me what happened _____ the story
A. to the end B. by the end of C. at the end of D. in the end
( )14. — I want to be a zookeeper in the future. — ____________ I’m afraid of animals.
A. Sounds nice. B. That’s lovely! C. Look out! D. Rather you than me.
( )15. The boy won first place in the race. His parents ______ him.
A. are interested in B. are worried about C. are proud of D. are busy with
( )16. All the children like Mr White very much because he often makes them_____.
A. laughed B. laugh C. laughing D. to laugh
( )17. My teacher said ______ I was hard-working. A. when B. who C. which D. that
( )18. Did you have anyone _____ the trees？ ---- Yes. I had them ______.
A. to water, water B. to water, watered C. water, to be watered D. water, watered
( )19. It’s a good habit______ breakfast every day. A. had B. have C. has D. to have
( )20. He is creative enough _____ so many nice toys for his daughter.
A. buying B. making C. to buy D. to make
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。
1. He is hungry. He would like something ______________(eat)
2.There are twelve ____________ (month) in a year.
3. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
4. As he _________(read) the newspaper, his mother came in.
5. Don’t forget _________(water) my flowers while I’m away.
6. If the photo isn’t good, __________ (not/save).
7. Please teach me how___________ ( play ) the computer games.
8. Will you please ____________( not talk ) in class any more
9. They keep __________ (watch ) the beautiful scenery out of the window.
10. Do you think English is as __________ ( important ) as maths
11. Jim, ____________ ( not swim ) here. It’s dangerous.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1.他们饰演的角色真实可信。 They __________the character ___________.
2.他们与一些坏人面对面的相遇，不得不与他们交战。
They come ______ ______ _______with some terrible men and have to ________them.
3在我看来，尽管作文中的错误太多，但这还是一篇不错的文章。
______ _____ _______，It’s an excellent composition, __________ there is ______ ______ mistakes.
4.他们绕着加勒比海诸岛环行。 They ______ ______the Caribbean islands.
5. She is very happy，because she is always __________ _______(在朋友中间)。
__________________________________________________________________
四、拓展训练 （C层选做）
Shyness means feeling frightened when you’re around other people. Some children are born shy. Some become very shy later because of their life experience. In fact , everybody gets a little shy sometimes. It’s just how much they feel shy.
①Most people have red faces and talk in broken sentences when they are shy. But some become so shy that they won’t go to a restaurant because they are too nervous to order and pay for their food. Some are afraid of meeting new people, so they seldom go outside. This kind of shyness can be bad for a person.
②如果害羞并没有让你不能去做你想做的事, being shy isn’t a big problem. Some experts say shy people are good at working because they think __③__ and __③__ less. But remember not to let good opportunities (机会) pass you by just because of it. If you have to sing a song at a birthday party or give some performances in front of others, just do it. There’s nothing for you to be afraid of.
1.将①句翻译成中文。_____________________________________________________________
2.将②句翻译成英文。_____________________________________________________________
3.在③空格处填上适当的词。 __________　__________
4.You have nothing to be frightened.(同义句)_____________________________________
5. Find out the main idea of the message.________________________________________________
17
1、害羞时，大多数人脸发红，说话吞吞吐吐(结巴)
2、If shyness doesn’t stop you from doing what you want to do.
keep the things that you want to do
prevent
3、more, talk
4、There’s nothing for you be afraid of
5、首句
初三一轮复习八下Module3-4
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module3重点短语:
1. 谢谢你带我们参观北京电台thank you for taking us around Radio Beijing 2. 不客气Don’t mention it. / You’re welcome. / That’s all right. 3. 喜欢带游客到处转 enjoy showing visitors around 4. 小心红色信号灯 look out for the red light 5. 这边走Come this way. 6. 收集最新消息collect the latest news
7. 需要说好英语need to speak English well 8. 坚持学习 keep studying 9. 决定听什么和看谁decide what to listen to and who to see 10. 想当一名体育播音员would like to be a sports reporter 11. 准备天气预报 prepare the weather reports 12. 进两个球score two goals 13. 讨厌输球hate losing 14. 低头看着我 look down at me 15. 记得紧靠收音机坐着 remember sitting close to the radio
16. 亲自和我交流speak to me in person 17. 在一个小电台找份工作 ask for a job in a small radio station 18. 了解网络电台 learn about Internet radio 19. 给听众播放我最喜欢的音乐 play my favourite music to the listeners 20. 关闭close down 21. 准备每周节目prepare the weekly programmes 22. 通过观察窗外的情况做这件事do this by looking out of the window 23. 跟我来come with me 24. 在另一个房间in another room 25. 告诉我你早饭吃的什么tell me what you had for breakfast 26. 以同一个问题开始工作begin work with the same question
Module4重点短语：
1. 借给我他的CD 刻录机lend me his CD recorder 2. 让我们看看说明书Let’s look at the instructions
3. 打开刻录机turn on the recorder 4. 回放play back 5. 等三十秒wait for 30 seconds
6. 通过邮件 by email 7. 把刻录机连接到电脑上connect the recorder to the computer
8. 选择复制键choose the ‘copy’ symbol 9. 挽救你的生命 save your life 10. 令人惊奇的建议the surprising advice 11. 咬到他的手 bite him on the hand 12. 几天以前a few days earlier
13. 从箱子里爬出来climb out of the box 14. 藏在盘子底下hide under the dish 15. 捡起它 pick it up 16. 落在冰箱里 land in the fridge 17. 保持冷静 stay cool /keep cool 18. 开始疼痛 begin/start to ache 19. 给他对症下药 give him the right medicine 20. 出院leave hospital
Part2: Module3-4基础知识集锦：
Module3
1. would like to do sth. “愿意做某事” I would like to speak a few words. 我想讲几句话。
would like sth. 愿意要某东西, 如: Would you like something to eat.
2. Thank you for (doing) sth. “因为…而感谢你” , Thank you for your invitation.
Thank you for inviting me. 感谢你邀请我。
3. take / show sb. around +地点 带某人参观某地
4. look out 意为当心，小心 其后接宾语时, 加介词for （look out for + sth）
Look out for the car. It’s dangerous to play football on the road.
牢固记住: look组成的常见短语: look for 寻找 look at 看 look after照看 look up 查阅
look down on轻视, 看不起 look forward to 期待 look through 浏览
5.keep 的用法：
(1) keep doing sth 继续做某事，不停地做某事
They kept talking on the phone for half an hour.
(2) keep 常用语“keep +宾语+宾语补足语”复合结构中。宾语补足语可以由doing, 形容词充当。
如：保持健康：keep healthy/fit, stay healthy/fit
6. decide 用法：
(1) decide to do sth 决定做某事 decide not to do sth决定不做某事
(2) decide +that 从句 she has decided that she will be a doctor.
(3) decide +(when/where/ how..) We decide what to listen to and who to see.
I can’t decide which one I should choose.=I can’t decide which one to choose.
7. explain v. 解释;讲解 ( n. explanation)
①explain sth to sb向…解释 e.g. Mr. white often explains questions to me carefully.
②explain that/why/what从句 e.g. He explained that he had never taken his dad’s money.
8. It seemed that they were speaking to me in person.
1）seem 后面可以加形容词，to do, that 从句
2）It seems that… “ 看起来似乎…” 可与 “主语+ seem +to do”互相转化。
① It seems that Tony is unhappy today. = Tony seems to be unhappy today. = Tom seems unhappy today. ② It seems that she knows what I will say. = She seems to know what I will say.
9. voice： 嗓音；多指的是人的说话声或唱歌声。
sound：声音；指人们听到的“声音” 可以指人和动物发出的声音，也可以指物体碰撞发出的
声音或自然界的任何声音。
noise: 噪音,指人们不愿意听到的不悦耳的噪音，及嘈杂声、吵闹声。
10. to do不定式与doing作宾语
(1) 后跟to do不定式作宾语的动词： want, would like, hope, agree, decide...
(2) 后跟doing作宾语的动词：巧妙记忆：完成 练习 持续 忙 (finish, practice, keep, be busy )
喜欢 介意 别放弃 (enjoy, mind, give up)
(3) 后跟两者作宾语的动词：remember, forget, stop, try…
Module4
1. 把某物借给某人lend sth. to sb.=lend sb sth
辨析：borrow 和lend borrow：v. 借进 (borrow…from…) lend：v. 借出 (lend…to…)
2. If you want to send your recording by email, connect the recorder to your computer.
(1) send 发送;送给 把某物送给某人send sb. sth.=send sth to sb.
(2) connect在句中表示“连接、接通”， 短语：connect… to/with …
3. If the red light doesn’t come on, wait for 30 seconds.
(1) come on 在这里表示“打开、开动”
They heard a strange sound, and lights came on.他们听到一个奇怪的声音，接着灯亮了。
(2) come on 还以表示“鼓励、劝说、催促”等。
4. If you want to turn on the recorder, press the blue button. turn on 打开，反义短语为turn off
其他关于turn的短语：turn up调大（高）； turn down调小（低）；拒绝
turn ove r翻转; 调转；返回； turn back往回走
5祈使句：
(1) 祈使句是简单句里一种特殊的句子形式，表示命令、请求等。
这类句子最显著的特点是省略主语，且动词在任何情况下都用原型。
注意：祈使句要与动词作主语的情况进行区分. 动词作主语时要用V-ing形式.
(2) 祈使句的否定形式是直接在动词前加Don’t。
大多数祈使句的反意疑问句是will you；Let’s…, shall we. Let us…, will you
6. bite 过去式bit,过去分词bitten bite “叮、咬”，根据咬的部位不同，要接不同的介词。
动词+宾语+介词 (in / on) +身体部位，类似的动词有hit
7. suggest doing sth 建议做某事 ；advise sb. to do sth建议某人做某事。
8. if条件状语从句:
(1) 注意“主将从现”原则，即：当主句是一般现在时；祈使句；含情态动词，或当主句的谓语动词是hope, wish, want等动词时, 从句要用一般现在时表将来。
(2) 注意：要会区分宾语从句中的if 以及条件句中的if： 宾语从句中的if意思为“是否”，相当于whether；条件状语从句里的if 意思为 “如果”。Module 5--6 复习学案
组别__________姓名____________等级____________
【学习目标】：1.理解构成新词的基本方法，能够灵活运用M5-6中repair等重点单词，instead of等短语及知识点。
2.通过自主学习，小组合作，解决银安殿，掌握用知识树梳理基础知识的方法。
3.明确自觉遵守公共规则的重要性，争做文明公民。全力以赴,享受英语学习的快乐。
【基础知识回顾】
Part1: Module5--6重点短语集锦：
Module5: <短语与习惯用语> ：unit one
1. 不得不回家 have to go home 2. 等一下hang on a minute
3. 必须完成一个报告上交作业have got to write a report for homework
4. 独自离开go off on one’s own 5. 注意你在说什么 pay attention to what you were saying
6. 这是违反规定的 It’s against the rules 7. 不要喧哗no shouting 8. 怎么了？What’s the matter
9.不许进入 No entry 10. 快点吧！Hurry up 11. 难怪它看上去很逼真 No wonder it looks real!
unit two 1.谈论所能看到的talk about what they can see and do
2.了解科学的一个好方法a great way to learn about science/a great way of learning about science. 3.弄懂，解决，计算 work out 4.尝试，实验try out 5.做物理实验 do physics experiments
6.在一个袋子里装满下落的沙子 fill a bag with falling sand
7.同动物比速度compare your speed with animals 10.首先，最重要的是 above all
Module6: unit one 1.收到读者的一封邮件get an email from a reader
2.做关于最喜欢书的家庭作业do homework on favourite books
3.谨慎对待环境 be careful about the environment 4.数千所绿色学校 thousands of green schools
5.扔掉玻璃，纸张和金属throw away glass, paper and metal
6.卖掉它可再循环使用 sell it for recycling
7.募集来的钱可以帮助贫困地区的学生raise money to help students in poor area
8.考虑污染和回收利用 think about pollution and recycling 9.帮助拯救地球help (to) save our world
unit two 1.介意保护环境care about protecting the environment
2.当地产的东西things produced locally 3.把它们扔掉之前before throwing it away
4.对我们的环境有害处do harm to our environment 5.有用的事情something to help /something helpful
6.对…产生影响make a difference to 7.时间尽可能长for as long as possible
8.花费能量把东西变成其它的东西take energy to change something into something else
9 查明什么能被循环使用find out what can be recycled
10. 参加再循环活动take part in recycling programmes
Part2: Module5--6重点句子集锦
1.我想回家之前到楼上看看。I want to go upstairs before we have to go home.
2.我和同学们要在星期五前完成一个报告作业。
My classmates and I have got to write a report for homework by Friday.
3.他已经自己走了。He has gone off on his own.
4.我刚才没有注意你在说什么。I wasn’t paying attention to what you were saying.
5.在大部分博物馆里，没有人喧哗和奔跑，而且不允许你触摸展品
In most museums, there’s no shouting and no running, and you aren’t allowed to touch the exhibits.
6.人们谈论他们在那儿能看到什么，能做什么，有些机器还发出响声
People talk about what they can see and do there, and some of the machines are noisy as well.
7.参观博物馆很有趣并且这也是了解科学的一个好方法，因为你能寻求答案，尝试想法。
Visiting the Science Museum is fun and it’s a great way to learn about science because you can work things out and try out ideas.
8.例如，如果你想在一个袋子里装满下落的沙子，你就得将一种装有轮子的卡车移至合适的位置。
For example, if you want to fill a bag with falling sand, you have to move a kind of truck on wheels into the correct position.
9. 那就意味着你可以顺便进去看一会，愿意停多久就多久—它每天都开放，从上午10点到下午6点
That means you can drop in for a few minutes or you can stay as long as you like---it’s open every day from 10 am to 6 pm.
10.你会不会买当地生产的东西而不买国外生产的？
Do you buy things produced locally instead of made abroad
11.虽然我们年龄小，但仍然可以做一些事情来保护环境。
Though we are young, we can still do things to help.
12. 即使是最简单的日常小事也能对保护环境产生很大影响。这里有一些好主意供你参考
In fact, even the simplest everyday activities can make a real difference to the environment, there are some ideas for you.
13.当我们买东西的时候，如可能的话，要选择当地的产品，尽量不买很多国外产品。
When we do buy things, choose local products if possible, and try not to buy too many things from abroad.
14.我们应该保养物品，以便能用更长时间；修理后能使用的物品还应该修理，而不该把东西扔掉再买新的。We should look after them so that they will last, and we should repair them if we can instead of throwing them away and buying new.
15. 虽然把一种东西变成另一种东西也回消耗能源，但是还是比扔掉或烧掉好。
Although it takes energy to change something into something else, it’s better than throwing things away or burning them.
Part3: Module5---6重要知识点集锦
1.“也” too，as well用于肯定句中，also 用于句中，either 用于否定句句尾。
另：either 还指（两者之中任意一个。作主语谓语动词用单数：Either of you is ok.
either…or…意为“或者…,或者…” 连接两个并列的句子成分，若连接两个并列的主语时，谓语动词与其最近的主语保持一致，即就近原则。neither 指两者之中一个也不，作主语谓语动词用单数：
Neither of you is right. neither…nor “既不..也不..”连接主语采用就近原则。思考：采用就近原则的还有哪些：___________________________________________.
Either you or he __________(be) right. Neither he nor I ___________(have) a pen for you now.
2.take,spend, pay ,cost 的区别：1）take表示“花费时间、精力energy”。
如：①The journey took us a long time because of the bad weather.
②It takes me half an hour to get to school from home by bike.
2）spend 句型：sb +spend time/money on sth sb +spend time/money (in) doing sth.
I spend half an hour getting to school from home by bike.
3)pay 句型：sb +pay +money +for sth / sb +pay + for + sth
I paid 5 dollars for the book. My parents pay for my education.
4)cost 句型：sth+cost sb +money . sth + cost + money .
The book cost me five dollars. The house cost a lot of money.
3. allow sb to do sth允许某人干某事，被动：某人被允许干某事__________________,
My parents don’t allow me to go out at night.变被动____________________________.
同类短语：1. advise sb. to do 2. encourage sb. to do 3. want sb. to do
4. tell sb. to do 5. ask sb. to do
4. as well as也，还有，而且 用来连接两个相同的成分，强调的重点在前面，意为“不但……而且……”通常不位于句首。 Living things need air and light as well as water.
当as well as 连接并列的主语时，谓语动词与前者保持一致,就远原则：
He as well as his parents _____________(like) playing football.
思考：He with his parents ____________(go) to the park every week.
5. fill… with…用…装满…(表动作) be filled with….充满；装满…
He fills the bottle with sand. The bottle _____ ______ ______sand.
【联系】be full of….充满,装满 (表状态) The bottle is full of water.
6. drop in顺便拜访，造访 drop in on + 某人（顺便拜访某人）拜访某地drop in at +地点。
They _____________ us as they were passing . They _____________ Beijing once a year.
思考：这两个空都能用visit 吗？
7. above all 首先，最重要的是（在句中作状语，可置于句首或句中）
first of all首先 after all毕竟；终究；到底 in all意为“总共；总计”。
8.句式： It’s +adj. + for sb. to do sth.
联系： It’s +adj. + of sb. to do sth. 当形容词形容人时，用of sb.，常见词：kind /nice, clever/foolish【练习】1).保护环境对我们说是重要的。 ________________________________
2).你帮助我太好了。 ______________________________________
9. It’s also at home that we save energy and recycle..
此句为强调句式，其结构为 It +is / was +被强调部分+that(物)/ who（指人）, 强调部分常译为…是…
It was he who read English in the garden yesterday.
翻译： 昨天是在街上我碰到他父亲。
It _____ _____ ____ __________ that I met her father yesterday.
10. stop ….from doing // prevent…from doing // keep…from doing（from 可以省略）
如：We should stop the factories from polluting the air. 我们应阻止工厂污染空气。
We must stop the water from being polluted. 我们必须阻止水被污染。
11. instead of和instead 的用法
We should repair them if we can instead of throwing them away and buying new ones,
instead of : 用A 来代替B of 是介词，后跟名词或者动词ing 形式。
eg. I like swimming instead of playing basketball. I like apples instead of bananas.
I stayed at home instead of going out to play.
instead :相反的，通常放在句末。上句可以转换成： I didn’t go out to play ,I stayed at home instead.
12.When we do buy things,choose local products if possible ,and try not to buy too many things from abroad.
1) .do 用于肯定句表示强调。I do like eating fish.我确实喜欢吃鱼。
2).try to do sth 试图做某事，否定：try not to do sth. try doing sth 试着做某事。
3) too many things .too many 后加名词复数。too much 后加不可数名词。意思是太多 much too 后加副词或者形容词，意思是太….
13. make a difference to..对…产生影响。这里的 to 是介词 后加名词或者动词ing形式
类似这样的词组还有：look forward to , pay attention to ,do harm to ,be used to ,give one’s life to等。
Your behaviour made a real difference to ______________(protect ) the environment .
(eat) __________too much does harm to _________(keep) healthy.
【能力提升】
一、单项选择。
( )1. There are many shops on ____ side of the street. We can buy everything we want.
A. both B. all C. either D. every
( )2. My father is getting older and cannot jump as ____ as he could before.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
( )3. The Kings have been in Beijing for three years, so they are familiar ____ the city.
A. to B. with C. for D. on
( )4. To invent a new kind of electric light, Thomas Edison did lots of ____.
A. research B. inventions C. experiments D. experiences
( )5. — Can you show me the _____ of your school on the map — Sure. It’s here, next to the park.
A. position B. shape C. direction D. height
( )6. The maths problem was so difficult that none of us could ____.
A. try it out B. work it out C. look it up D. work on it
( )7. As students, ____, we should study hard to be well prepared for the future.
A. at all B. in all C. after all D. above all
( )8. Playing computer games ____ the boy so much time that he doesn’t have enough time to study.
A. spends B. uses C. pays D. takes
( )9. — I hope you can ____ and see us next time you come to Shanghai. — Sure, I will.
A. drop in B. check in C. give in D. arrive in
( )10. Bill was ____ tired after a whole day’s work.
A. a kind of B. kind of C. bit of D. a bit of
( )11. There are lots of mistakes in my homework because I didn’t pay attention to ____ the teacher.
A. listen B. listening to C. listening D. listen to
( )12. _____ you work, _____ knowledge you’ll get.
A. The harder, more B. The harder, the more C. Harder, the more D. Harder, more
( )13. Again and again the doctor ___the crying girl, but he couldn’t find out what was wrong with her.
A. looked over B. looked after C. looked for D. looked out
( )14. Volleyball is _______ more popular than basketball in our school.
A. much B. little C.less D.more
( )15. The boy with____ unusual face said that he had____ useful machine at home.
A. a, a B. a, an C. an, a D. an, an
( )16. They________ home _________ the night of April 7, 2002.
A. got, in B. reached, on C. arrived, in D. arrived at, on
( )17. ______ care of the environment is very important.
A. Takes B. Take C. taken D. Taking
( )18. Watching too much TV can do harm ______ our eyes.
A. for B. at C. of D. to
( )19. Tom goes to school on foot ______ by bike.
A. instead of B. instead C. still of D. replace
( )20. _____ is necessary for us to get up early every day.
A. That B. This C. It D. He
二．用所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. Everyone is looking forward to______(go) to Beijing in 2008.
2. We aren’t allowed _______(eat) anything in the school library.
3. Did you see the sign “No _______(swim).
4. Look at the sign! There’s no _____(listen) to the music here.
5.The Great Wall is the _____________ (long) wall in the world, I think.
6. I think you can work out the math problem ___________. (care)
7. You try ___________(not buy) too many things from abroad.
8. __________ something means using it again and again. (use)
9. People’s action makes a ___________ to the environment. ( different)
10.The situation is __________. We can’t do anything about it.(hope)
11. Some of the books _________________(make) into films.
PAGE
- 1 -初三一轮复习七下Module1-3
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M1-3中出现的buy等单词、wait for 等短语，并灵活运用一般将来时。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会制定合理的计划；热爱传统文化， 享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M1-3词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M1-3重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. What about _______table tennis with me this afternoon A. playing B. play C. to play D. plays
( )2. She is going to stay in ______bed tomorrow morning A./ B. a C. an D. the
( )3. Look! Class One _____eye exercises.A. are to do B. do C. are doing D. are going to do
( )4. Daming is going to revise______ his test. A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )5. He _____have a field trip the day after tomorrow. A. is B. does C. is going D. is going to
( )6. Her parents____ for Beijing next Sunday. A. are leaving B. leave C. leaves D. is leaving
( )7. There will be____ rain and_____ winds next Monday.
A. heavy; strong B. strong; big C. strong; heavy D. big; strong
( )8. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. Playing D. play
( )9. In a few years’ time, there ______hundreds of trees on the mountain.
A. will have B. will be C. are have D. be have
( ) 10. Look! The students ______ the kites in the park. A. fly B. flying C. are flying D. Flies
( ) 11. Mary is a beautiful girl ______ long black hair. A. with B. has C. have D. to have
( ) 12. The boy _______ on the bed at the moment. A. is lying B. lie C. lies D.lying
( ) 13. ---What are your parents doing now
---They _____ cakes in the kitchen. A. making B. are making C. doing D. are doing
( ) 14. He _____ his homework in the classroom every day.
A. not do B. not doing C. doesn’t do D. isn’t doing
( ) 15. She often helps me ____ my homework. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( ) 16. ---Is Bob doing his homework ---No, he _________. He is _______ a letter.
A. doesn’t; write B. isn’t; is writing C. isn’t; writing D. doesn’t; writing
( ) 17. ---What is Tom doing ---He ______ in the river.
A. is swimming B. is swiming C.swims D. swimming
( ) 18. She can speak _______ Chinese now. A. a few B. few C. no D. a little
( ) 19. My parents are at _______ work. They are working. A. his B. their C. the D. /
( )20. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. playing D. play
二、单词的适当形式填空
1.There are many __________(foreign) in Beijing. 2.Please come __________(early) tomorrow than today.
3.What time do you __________(usual) get up 4.Our teacher are all very _________(friend) to us students.
5.Spring is the __________(good) time to plant trees. 6.Jim is going __________(fish) with Mr.Li tomorrow.
7. Let’s help him______________(mend) the machine. 8. I think he __________(visit) Qingdao next week.
9. They _________________(not use) paper and they will use computers.
10. No one __________(like) expensive things. 11. __________students_______(go) to school in the future
三、拓展训练（C层选做）
阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时，可加助动词或情态动词等。
A girl in Nepal
This picture shows eighteen-year-old Katy Ross in Nepal, a small country north of India. Katy 1.______ (leave) school eight months ago and soon she 2.________ (go) to university. She loves traveling and decided 3._____(visit) Asia before she goes to university.
Now Katy4._______ (stay) with a family in the capital of Nepal. The family 5.______ (have) two children but many uncles and cousins, live with them in their big house. They have taken Katy to many parties. Katy has learnt a lot about the country since she6._______ (arrive) four months ago.
Katy teaches for four hours a day at a small school. All the classes7._______ (teach)in English, because the pupils8._______ (speak) English since the age of six. The older children speak English very well. Katy teaches writing, grammar, and art, all in English.
Katy9._______ (not, get) a lot of time to see Nepal since she came to this country. But soon she will stop 10._______ (teach) and travel around Nepal with a friend. "After that," Katy says, "we’ll visit more countries’ in Asia. We’re not sure which ones yet. "
1.________ 2.___________ 3.__________ 4.__________ 5.___________
6._________ 7.__________ 8.___________ 9.___________ 10.__________


17
1、害羞时，大多数人脸发红，说话吞吞吐吐(结巴)
2、If shyness doesn’t stop you from doing what you want to do.
keep the things that you want to do
prevent
3、more, talk
4、There’s nothing for you be afraid of
5、首句
七年级下册M1-M6
Module1重点短语:
1.站在长城上stand on the Great Wall 2.和你讲话talk to you3.在一次学校旅游on a school trip4.玩得很高兴have a good time 5.拍很多照片take lots of pictures 6.买一些礼物和明信片buy some presents and postcards 7.躺在太阳底下lie in the sun 8.非常喜欢这次学校旅行enjoy the school trip a lot9.等候，等待wait for 10.现在，此刻at the moment11.不同的地方in different places 12.做不同的事do different things13.下班leave work 14.回家go home15.等公车wait for buses 16.赶火车run for trains17.开车drive cars/ a car 18.在家喝下午茶have afternoon tea at home19.走着去酒馆walk to pubs 20.喝一杯have a drink
21.吃晚饭have dinner 22. 在餐馆in restaurants 23.看（听）歌剧go to the opera24. 看芭蕾舞watch a ballet25.穿衣打扮get dressed 26. 开始上课start lessons27.喝咖啡或可乐drink coffee or Coke 28.看望朋友see friends29.给家里打电话call home 30.看…look at31.再见see you soon! 32.晚安good night
Module2重点短语：
33.春节Spring Festival 34.为….准备好get ready for…35.学习舞龙learn a dragon dance 36.制作灯笼make lanterns37.在春节前夕on New Year’s Eve 38.扫地sweep the floor39.做饭cook the meal 40.在工作at work 41.元宵节Lantern Festival 42.扫去sweep away43.有很多传统have lots of traditions 44.打扫房子clean the house 45.扫去霉运 sweep away bad luck 46.把门窗漆红paint doors and windows red 47.好运good luck 48.剪纸paper cuts 49.用……来装饰……decorate…with…50.理发have a haircut51.新年礼物New Year presents 52.舞龙和舞狮dragon and lion dancing 53.拜访家人和朋友visit family and friends 54.年糕sweet rice pudding 55.一种a kind of 56.在半夜at midnight 57.几天a few days 58.一年到头all the year round 59.庆祝….的诞生celebrate the birth of.. 60.对….感兴趣be interested in..
Module3重点短语：
1.在周末at the weekend 2.在周六早上on Saturday morning 3.查看我的邮件check my email 4.上钢琴课have a piano lesson 5.买一些新衣服buy some new clothes 6.去派对 go to a party 7.躺在床上，睡觉stay in bed 8.复习考试revise for the test 9.早起床get up early 10.吃野餐have a picnic 11.登上长城 walk up the Great Wall 12.期待 look forward to 13.乘飞机 take the/a plane 14.游览 do some sightseeing15.喜欢外国文化like foreign culture 16.参观紫禁城 visit the Forbidden City 17.交朋友 make friends ( with ) 18.躺在沙滩上lie on the beach 19.呆在宾馆里 stay in the/a hotel 20.龙舟节 Dragon Boat Festival 21.一位好厨师 a good cook 22.到达 get to / arrive in (at) 23.去观光 go sightseeing
Part2: Module1-3基础知识集锦：
Module1-2
1.for 为；为了1) 等待；等候wait for 2) 因为…而感谢某人thank sb. for sth. 3) 上学迟到be late for school 4) 为某人制作某物make sth for sb 5) 为我的课堂获取信息get information for my lessons
总结：for是介词，后跟动词ing形式、名词、代词宾格。
2.different adj. 不同的 构成短语be different from 与……不同
原句：At this moment, in different places of the world people are doing different things.
Your pen is different from mine.( 和我的不一样).
拓展：1) difference n. 不同点，差别，差异Eg. Can you find out four differences between the two pictures
2) different 反义词是same 例如：We are in the same class. (我们在同一个班)
3. dress n. 裙子，礼服 vt. （给某人）穿衣服, be/get dressed，意思是 “穿衣服”
原句：People aren’t getting up, washing or getting dressed.
put on 穿上，表示动作 原句:Put on your clothes.//wear 穿着，表示状态
①The woman is dressing her baby. (那位妇女正给她的孩子穿衣服)
② He put on his coat and left the house. (他穿上大衣离开了那间屋子)
③ Today she is wearing beautiful red dress.（今天她穿着一件漂亮的红裙子）
4.get ready for 为……做准备
原句：Are you getting ready for Spring Festival？
翻译：我们正在为期中考试做准备。We are getting ready for the mid-term exam.
be always ready to do sth. 乐于干某事We are ready to work for the 2010 EXPO in Shanghai.
5.paint vt. 给……上色 原句：We paint doors and windows red.
6. a few+可数名词复数， a little+不可数名词，两者都表示肯定，意为“一些”
few+可数名词复数, little+不可数名词, 两者都表示否定，意为“几乎没有”
7.take带走；bring带来 It is raining outside. Please take the raincoat with you. But remember to bring it back to me tomorrow.
too, either, also 也too置于句末，用逗号隔开;either置于否定句句末，用逗号隔开;also常置于句中，be动词之后，实义动词之前。
A re you learning a dragon dance, too 2) I don’t want to go there, either.
3) He is also a worker. 4) He also plays the piano.
9. be at work =be working 在上班 My parents are at work.. My parents are working.
10. help帮助 (1)He helps me( to )make a cake for my mother.他帮我为我妈妈制作蛋糕。
结构：帮助某人做某事 help sb. (to) do sth..
Computers can help us with our homework.电脑帮助我们做作业。help sb. with sth.帮助某人
11. decorate装饰We usually decorate the doors with paper cuts.我们通常用剪纸装饰门。
结构：用…装饰… decorate sth. with sth.
12. sweep away扫去 There is so much dust(尘土) on the floor. Sweep it away.
Module3
1. look forward to 期待，盼望. 其中to是介词，后跟名词或动名词.
原句：I’m looking forward to see my daughter and her daughter, my granddaughter.
eg. 1) I’m looking forward to your letter. 2) I’m looking forward to meeting you.
2. Would you like…. 你想要……吗 口语中常用来表示客气的邀请、请求、建议等。
肯定回答：Yes, I’d like to. / Yes, please. 否定：No, thanks. / I’d like to, but I…
原句：Would you like to come 【拓展】⑴表建议的句型：Let’s+v.= =What about+v.-ing
Eg. Let’s play basketball. =How about playing basketball
3. do some sightseeing 游览 原句：We’re going to do some sightseeing, because we like Chinese culture.
“do+v.-ing” 表示日常活动，在v-ing前还可以用some, the, all the, one’s等修饰。
（1）大明正在看书。Daming is doing some reading.
（2）短语拓展：跑步do some running 练字do some writing 买东西do some shopping洗衣服do some washing 做饭do some cooking 读书 do some reading 打扫卫生do some cleaning
【拓展】go+v-ing 往往表示去做某事。如：go cycling, go fishing, go shopping, go sightseeing。
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm 13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high 5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内） 10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内） 12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名 14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China 22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
Part2: Module4-6基础知识集锦：
1. no one表示“没有人、无人”。作主语时谓语动词用单数。 Eg.没有人在这。No one is here.
2. by 介词，含义有“用、通过、靠”等，表示方法、手段、或方式。
by后接交通工具，不加冠词。如：乘（飞机，火车，公交车….): by (plane, train, bus…).
【拓展】with 介词，“用（工具）” Eg. 用粉笔：with chalk 用手：with hands
in 介词，“用语言” Eg. 用英语：in English
3. use 动词，意为“使用，用，利用” e.g.我能用你的钢笔吗？can I use your pen？
use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事 e.g. We use the Internet to do our homework.
4. send v. send sth. to sb.=send sb. sth. （发）送给某人某物
类似词：give/ pass/bring sth. to sb.=== give/ pass/bring sb. sth.
make/buy/cook sth for sb === make/buy/cook sb sth
5. get It will get warm at the North Pole so the seas will be very rough.
get warm 意为变暖。在这get为系动词，意为变…，后面可以跟形容词， 常表示“状态变化”。
翻译：秋天天气变凉。 It will get cool in autumn.
另外我们还学过get的另一个含义得到，如：get presents(翻译) 得到礼物
6. flying 动词ing 形式作主语
Eg: Drinking milk is good for you. / Walking and swimming are good exercises.
7. lots of 许多的，大量的
【拓展】lots of, many 与much
lots of 既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。可与many，much互换。
many 修饰可数名词，表示数量，反义词是few。
much修饰不可数名词，表示数量，其反义词是little。
8.(对某人来说)做某事是…的 It’s + adj. +for sb.+ to do sth.
翻译: 回答这个问题对他来说很容易。It’s very easy for him to answer this question.
9.形容词比较等级、最高级的构成及用法：（见课本P147—149页）重点复习
10.形容词变为副词的方法 ：
1）一般在形容词的词尾加ly slow—slowly
2）以“辅音字母+y”结尾的形容词，变y为i加ly happy-- happily
3）以-ble或-le结尾的形容词，去e 加ly possible – possibly
4）以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时直接加ly careful-- carefully
5）部分形容词和副词同形。hard late early fast …
11.在表示事物的长度时用long, 高度用high，宽度用wide.
①The mountain is about 100 metres high. 这座山大约100米高。
②The room is about 50 metres long. 这个房间大约50米长。
③The river is about 30 metres wide. 这条河大约30米宽。
12.in, on, to 方位词与介词连用时，in表示在范围之内; on表示在范围之外但相连；to表示在范围之外并不相连。Qingdao is on the east of Weifang. Qingzhou is in the west of Weifang. Jinan is to the west of Weifang.
13.动身去某地leave for spl. 离开某地leave spl. 离开A地去B地leave A for B
1) I am leaving for Beijing. 我要动身去北京。 2) I am leaving Beijing. 我要离开北京。
3) I am leaving Shanghai for Beijing. 我要离开上海去北京。
14.population 意为“人口居民”，常与定冠词“the”连用。
①Hong Kong has seven million people.香港有七百万人口。（就划线部分提问）
→What’s the population of Hong Kong
②population作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。
The population of China is large.中国人口众多。
但是当主语是表示"人口的百分之几、几分之几"时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如:About seventy percent of the population in China are farmers.中国大约有百分之七十的人口是农民。
③表示人口的多或少时，要用“large”或 “small”。 The population of China is larger than that in Japan.
【复习提升】
一、单项选择.
( )1. What about __table tennis with me this afternoon A. playing B. play C to play D. plays
( )2. She is going to stay in ___bed tomorrow morning A./ B. a C. an D. the
( )3. Look! Class One ___eye exercises.A. are to do B. do C. are doing D. are going to do
( )4. Daming is going to revise____ his test. A. for B. on C. at D. in
( )5. He __have a field trip the day after tomorrow. A. is B. does C. is going D. is going to
( )6. Her parents____ for Beijing next Sunday. A. are leaving B. leave C. leaves D. is leaving
( )7. There will be____ rain and_____ winds next Monday.
A. heavy; strong B. strong; big C. strong; heavy D. big; strong
( )8. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it_____ computer games after school.A. to play B. play C. Playing D. play
( )9. In a few years’ time, there ______hundreds of trees on the mountain.
A. will have B. will be C. are have D. be have
( ) 10. Look! The students ______ the kites in the park. A. fly B. flying C. are flying D. Flies
( ) 11. Mary is a beautiful girl ___ long black hair. A. with B. has C. have D. to have
( ) 12. The boy _______ on the bed at the moment. A. is lying B. lie C. lies D.lying
( ) 13. ---What are your parents doing now
---They _____ cakes in the kitchen. A. making B. are making C. doing D. are doing
( ) 14. He _____ his homework in the classroom every day.
A. not do B. not doing C. doesn’t do D. isn’t doing
( ) 15. She often helps me __ my homework. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( ) 16. ---Is Bob doing his homework ---No, he _________. He is _______ a letter.
A. doesn’t; write B. isn’t; is writing C. isn’t; writing D. doesn’t; writing
( ) 17. ---What is Tom doing ---He ______ in the river.
A. is swimming B. is swiming C.swims D. swimming
( ) 18. She can speak _______ Chinese now. A. a few B. few C. no D. a little
( ) 19. My parents are at _______ work. They are working. A. his B. their C. the D. /
( )20. ---What will you use the computer for ---I will use it___computer games after school.
A. to play B. play C. playing D. play
二、单词的适当形式填空
1.There are many _____(foreign) in Beijing. 2.Please come ____(early) tomorrow than today.
3.What time do you ____(usual) get up 4.Our teacher are all very ____(friend) to us students.
5.Spring is the ___(good) time to plant trees. 6.Jim is going _____(fish) with Mr.Li tomorrow.
7. Let’s help him___(mend) the machine. 8. I think he __________(visit) Qingdao next week.
9. They _________________(not use) paper and they will use computers.
10. No one ________(like) expensive things. 11. ____students___(go) to school in the future
三、拓展训练
阅读短文，并用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时，可加助动词或情态动词等。
A girl in Nepal
This picture shows eighteen-year-old Katy Ross in Nepal, a small country north of India. Katy 1.______ (leave) school eight months ago and soon she 2.________ (go) to university. She loves traveling and decided 3._____(visit) Asia before she goes to university.
Now Katy4._______ (stay) with a family in the capital of Nepal. The family 5.______ (have) two children but many uncles and cousins, live with them in their big house. They have taken Katy to many parties. Katy has learnt a lot about the country since she6._______ (arrive) four months ago.
Katy teaches for four hours a day at a small school. All the classes7._______ (teach)in English, because the pupils8._______ (speak) English since the age of six. The older children speak English very well. Katy teaches writing, grammar, and art, all in English.
Katy9._______ (not, get) a lot of time to see Nepal since she came to this country. But soon she will stop 10._______ (teach) and travel around Nepal with a friend. "After that," Katy says, "we’ll visit more countries’ in Asia. We’re not sure which ones yet. "
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15___ long. And it’s a ___ river.A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million____in Hong Kong. A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a ___ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ___ the east coast ___ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think ___ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu __ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. isC. hasD. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. withB. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ____a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that cityA. itB. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister__the song together now A.singB. singing C.are singing D.is singing
( )18.Football is __than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__the same mistake again. A. makeB. is make C. makes D. is made二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher_____ (clear). 2. About 200 people ___ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s _________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother ___(write) a letter to my sister and I __ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.初三一轮复习七下Module4-6
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module4-6重点短语集锦：
Module4重点短语:
1.有线电视cable TV 2.移动电话cell phone 3.描述你的教室 describe your classroom
4.没有人no one 5.在将来in the future 6.用邮件（的方式）by email
7.发送他们的作业send their homework 8.使用网络use the Internet 9.未来的生活life in the future 10.在北极 at the North Pole 11.狂风暴雨heavy rain and strong winds 12.变暖get warm
13.全年 all year 14.在农场on farms/ on the/a farm 15.做单调的工作do dull jobs
16.很舒服be very comfortable 17.在网络上on the Internet 18.自由时间free time 19.做繁重的工作do heavy work 20.一周三次three times a week
21.用太阳能为住宅供暖use the sun to heat our homes
Module5-6重点短语：
1.华东East China 2.华南 South China 3.1.5千米长1.5 kilometres long 4.554米高 544 metres high
5.1300万人13 million people 6.700万人 7 million people 7.回答一些问题Answer some questions 8.一个更新的城市 a newer city 9.in the east of … 在…的东面部（范围内）
10.in the west of … 在…的西面部（范围内） 11.in the south of …在…的南面部（范围内）
12.in the north of …在…的北面部（范围内） 13.be famous for … 因…而著名
14.the capital of …的首都 15.have a population of… 有多少人口 16.on the coast 在沿海 17.比……宽wider than 18.在法国的北部 in the north of France 19.在沿海near the sea
20.在美国的西部 in the west of the USA 21. 在中国的南部in the south of China
22.在塞纳河畔 on the River Seine 23.在美国的东海岸on the east coast of the USA
24.擅长于做某事 be good at 25.做一张体育明信片 make a sports poster
26.对立观点 opposite opinions 27.体育版 sports pages 28.中国日报 China Daily 29.动身去… leave for 30.到晚了 arrive late 31.在后面 at the back 32.到这儿 get here 33.和…说话 speak to 34听清楚 hear clearly 35.多于 more than
36.需要干某事 need to do sth 37.努力工作 work hard 38.领..四处参观 take …around
Part2: Module4-6基础知识集锦：
1. no one表示“没有人、无人”。作主语时谓语动词用单数。 Eg.没有人在这。No one is here.
2. by 介词，含义有“用、通过、靠”等，表示方法、手段、或方式。
by后接交通工具，不加冠词。如：乘（飞机，火车，公交车….): by (plane, train, bus…).
【拓展】with 介词，“用（工具）” Eg. 用粉笔：with chalk 用手：with hands
in 介词，“用语言” Eg. 用英语：in English
3. use 动词，意为“使用，用，利用” e.g.我能用你的钢笔吗？can I use your pen？
use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事 e.g. We use the Internet to do our homework.
4. send v. send sth. to sb.=send sb. sth. （发）送给某人某物
类似词：give/ pass/bring sth. to sb.=== give/ pass/bring sb. sth.
make/buy/cook sth for sb === make/buy/cook sb sth
5. get It will get warm at the North Pole so the seas will be very rough.
get warm 意为变暖。在这get为系动词，意为变…，后面可以跟形容词， 常表示“状态变化”。
翻译：秋天天气变凉。 It will get cool in autumn.
另外我们还学过get的另一个含义得到，如：get presents(翻译) 得到礼物
6. flying 动词ing 形式作主语
Eg: Drinking milk is good for you. / Walking and swimming are good exercises.
7. lots of 许多的，大量的
【拓展】lots of, many 与much
lots of 既可修饰可数名词，也可修饰不可数名词。可与many，much互换。
many 修饰可数名词，表示数量，反义词是few。
much修饰不可数名词，表示数量，其反义词是little。
8.(对某人来说)做某事是…的 It’s + adj. +for sb.+ to do sth.
翻译: 回答这个问题对他来说很容易。It’s very easy for him to answer this question.
9.形容词比较等级、最高级的构成及用法：（见课本P147—149页）重点复习
10.形容词变为副词的方法 ：
1）一般在形容词的词尾加ly slow—slowly
2）以“辅音字母+y”结尾的形容词，变y为i加ly happy-- happily
3）以-ble或-le结尾的形容词，去e 加ly possible – possibly
4）以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时直接加ly careful-- carefully
5）部分形容词和副词同形。hard late early fast …
11.在表示事物的长度时用long, 高度用high，宽度用wide.
①The mountain is about 100 metres high. 这座山大约100米高。
②The room is about 50 metres long. 这个房间大约50米长。
③The river is about 30 metres wide. 这条河大约30米宽。
12.in, on, to 方位词与介词连用时，in表示在范围之内; on表示在范围之外但相连；to表示在范围之外并不相连。Qingdao is on the east of Weifang. Qingzhou is in the west of Weifang.
Jinan is to the west of Weifang.
13.动身去某地leave for spl. 离开某地leave spl. 离开A地去B地leave A for B
1) I am leaving for Beijing. 我要动身去北京。 2) I am leaving Beijing. 我要离开北京。
3) I am leaving Shanghai for Beijing. 我要离开上海去北京。
14.population 意为“人口居民”，常与定冠词“the”连用。
①Hong Kong has seven million people.香港有七百万人口。（就划线部分提问）
→What’s the population of Hong Kong
②population作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。
The population of China is large.中国人口众多。
但是当主语是表示"人口的百分之几、几分之几"时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如:About seventy percent of the population in China are farmers.中国大约有百分之七十的人口是农民。
③表示人口的多或少时，要用“large”或 “small”。 The population of China is larger than that in Japan.
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( )1.There are________desks but not __________chairs．
A. some，some B. any，any C．some. any D. any some
( )2.There are some trees________our classroom.
A. in front B. in the front of C. in front of D. front of
( )3.The teacher’s desk is__________the classroom．
A. behind 　B. in front C. in front of D. in the front of
( )4.Hainan is_____ island in the south of China. A. / B. an C. a D. the
( )5.The boy is busy ______his homework.. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
( )6.Taiwan is ________the south of China and ________the south of Fujian.
A .in; to B .in; on C. to; in D. on; to
( )7.This river is 15______ long. And it’s a ______ river.
A. kilometer; 200 years-old B. kilometer; 200-year-old
C.kilometers; 200-year-old D. kilometers; 200-year old
( )8.The population of Shanghai ______thirteen million and there are seven million ____in Hong Kong.
A. is, population B. are, people C. is, people D. are, population
( )9.China has a _______ population than Japan. A. more B. less C. smaller D. larger
( )10. Sydney is ____ the east coast ______ the sea. A. at , on B. on , by C. by , to D. at , in
( )11. Do you think _____ good to do some housework A. that B. that’s C. its D. it is
( )12.Chengdu ______ a population of more than 1000 thousand. A. are B. is C. has D. have
( )13.What’s the answer ______ the question A. with B. on C. of D. to
( )I4.There going to ______ a football match nest week A. have B. has C. be D. is
( )15.Tom looks ________ when I see him . He looks at me ________
A. sad , sad B. sadly , sadly C. sad , sadly D. sadly , sad
( )16.The population of this city is more than _____ of that city A. it B. this C. them D. that ( )17.Tom with his sister____the song together now A. sing B. singing C. are singing D. is singing
( )18.Football is than swimming. A. tiring B. tiringer C. more tiring D. much tiring
( )19.English is difficult. __________, it’s very useful. A. But B. However C. And D. So
( )20. No one__________the same mistake again. A. make B. is make C. makes D. is made
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. I can see and hear the teacher__________ (clear). 2. About 200 people __________ (learn) English now.
3. I don’t need________________ (speak) English.
4. The story is very ____________, it’s ________________ than any other story, I think. (interesting).
5. The children (have) a picnic at the moment.
6. Lingling (be) an English teacher in the future.
7. My friend would like (have) a piano lesson this Saturday afternoon.
8. The girl is looking forward to (see) her grandparents.
9. Of the cell phones, this one is ____________ (expensive).
10. It’s nine o'clock now. My mother _______ (write) a letter to my sister and I _________ (draw) a picture.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1. 剑桥是英格兰东部的一个小城市,有大约十万人口。
Cambridge is a small city_________ __________ __________ __________ England, and it _________ about 100,000 people.
2. 伦敦是英国首都,有七百万人,所以它比剑桥更大更拥
London is _______ ________ _______the UK, ________ seven ________ people, so it’s ________and __________ __________ Cambridge.
3. 那些山有大约一千米高。The mountains are __________ 1000 ____________ ___________.
4. 在海岸线上有许多小村庄。There are lots of small villages _________ __________ ____________.
5.中国人非常擅长体操。Chinese people _________very _________ __________ gymnastics.初三一轮复习八上Module7-8
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M7-8中出现的feeling等单词、have a try等短语，并灵活运用过去进行时态。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.学会在表达不同意见时照顾他人的感受；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M5-6词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M7-8重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一、单项选择:
( ) 1. It’s ________ to help others who are in trouble.
A. rude B. terrible C. impolite D. polite
( ) 2. They all feel very ________ at the _________ films.
exciting; excited B. excited; exciting C. exciting; exciting D. excited; excited
( ) 3. The Chinese parents always teach their children to be ________ to others.
A. carefully B. lonely C. friendly D. angrily
( ) 4. -- Have you heard the song “TAKE ME TO YOUR HEART” --Yes, it _______ terrible.
A. smells B. sounds C. looks D. tastes
( ) 5. What _________ interesting subject it is!
A. an B. the C. a D. /
( ) 6. Thanks for _________ my friend to your party.
A. invite B. to invite C. invites D. inviting
( ) 7. _________ the bridge , you can see the hospital on your right .
A．Go cross B．Go across C．Across Crossing
( ) 8. Tom, _________ afraid of speaking in public.
A. not be B. not to be C. be not D. don’t be
( ) 9. I _________very tired after running. A. felt B. tasted C. smelt D. sounded
( ) 10.This kind of apple _________ delicious. I want one more.
A. smells B. tastes C. looks D. seems
( ) 11. I like classical music, because it sounds ______________.
A. smart B. beautiful C. tight D. soft
( ) 12. -- What’s your granddaughter like --_____________.
A. She’s very well B. She’s thin C. She’s very nice D. She likes singing
( ) 13. Tony and Betty don’t like cheese, because it ____________ fresh.
A. don’t smell B. smells C. doesn’t smell D. smell
( ) 14. -- What does Tony look like -- _______________.
A. He looks very old. B. He looks at the picture
C. He looks careless D. He likes cycling
( ) 15. -- What do you think of the silk shirt -- _______________.
A. It feels delicious B. It feels smart C. It feels quite pretty D. It feels soft
( ) 16. Walk_______ the street and turn right into Chang’an Jie.
A. into B. over C. in D. along
( ) 17. Get _______ the boat and walk back, the bridge is _____ your left.
A. on; off B. off; on C. down; of D. up; in
( ) 18. The doctor not only saved their _______ but also made their _______ a new start.
A. lives; lives B. life; life C. lives; life D. life; lives
( ) 19. Italy _______ its pizza in the world.
A. is famous as B. is famous for C. is good for D. is good as
( ) 20. The teacher explain to them on how ________.
A. play piano B. to play the piano C. to play piano D. play the piano
( ) 21. Can you tell me how I can ________ to the cinema from here
A. got B. get C. take D. reach
( ) 22. Could you tell me how_____ I am from the square
A. near B. away C. far D. close
( ) 23. Is this ________ the Palace Museum
A. the way for B. the way to C. the way from D. going for
( ) 24. He took the wrong _______ in the street, so he asked the policeman for help.
A. turn B. turner C. turned D. turning
( ) 25. Look out! It’s too dangerous to go______ a street ________ the traffic.
A. across; in the front of B. across; in front of C. cross; before D. through; in the front of
二、动词的适当形式填空:
I’m looking forward to ____________(meet) my friends.
The best way ___________(improve) our English is saying and using it.
Mother always asks me ______________(not pick) flowers in the park.
It is great ___________(play) tennis with your friends.
I want _____________(hear) from my mother.
She _____________(visit) London next week.
He _________________(shake) hands with his new boss politely at that time.
In the last 2 months, they ______________(learn) about 6 lessons.
Our foreign teacher ____________(teach) English in our school since he came to China.
10. When the students saw their teacher come in, they stopped __________(talk) at once.
拓展训练：（C层选做）
汉语翻译英语：
1. 孩子们回家了吗？ Have the ___________ _____________ home
2. 这些鞋子看起来很可爱，可是它们有点紧。
These shoes look nice, but they feel __________ ___________ tight.
3. 他们何时从机场回来的？When did they ____________ ____________ from the airport
4. 你最好把我介绍给你的朋友。You’d better _________ me __________ your friend.
5. 我们打算去车站接我来自伦敦的朋友萨利。
We are going to the ___________ to meet my friend Sally ___________ London
.初三一轮复习七上Module1-6
Module1-3重点短语:1.来自于 be from / come from 2.读书 read books 3.坐下 sit sown 4.站起来 stand up 5.在黑板上 on the blackboard 6.名字 first name/ given name 7.姓 family name / last name 8. 打篮球 play basketball 9. 踢足球 play football 10. 打乒乓球 play table tennis 11. 弹钢琴 play the piano 12. 骑自行车 ride a bike 13. 骑马 ride a horse 14. 一张我家庭的照片 a photo of my family 15. 欢迎某人到某地 welcome sb. to sp. 17. 国际学校 international school 18. 说英语 speak English 19. 在医院 in / at the hospital 20. 工厂经理 factory manager 21.酒店经理 hotel manager 22.在我的教室里 in my classroom 23.在我的课桌上 on my desk 24.在我们的学校 in our school 25.在上学 at school 26.在…前面 in front of 27.紧挨着，在…旁边 next to 28.在墙上 on the wall 29.在…后面 at the back of 30.在床底下 under the bed 31.在科学实验室里 in the science lab32.在箱子里in the box
Module 4-6 重点短语1.谈论 talk about 2.在Betty的家里 in Betty’s home 3.一个大家庭 a big family 4.感谢…thanks for … 5.拥有 have got 6.给某人做某物make sth for sb 7. 健康食品healthy food 8.一些果汁 some juice 9.一些西红柿some tomatoes 10.一些甜瓜some melons 11.保持健康keep healthy 12.在瓶子里in the bottle 13.一些土豆some potatoes 14.最喜欢的水果favourite fruit 15.在冰箱里in the fridge 16.一些面条some noodles 17.为了健康to be healthy 18.一瓶果汁a bottle of juice 19.中国茶Chinese tea 20.美国食物American food 21.三个汉堡包 three hamburgers 22. 水果和蔬菜fruit and vegetables 23. 去看电影go to the cinema 24. 在星期天on Sunday 25. 美好的祝愿/ 祝福你best wishes 26. 在一个寒冷的冬天的早晨on a cold winter morning 27. 上课have classes 28.游泳课 swimming lessons 29. 在早上/下午/ 晚上in the morning/afternoon/evening 30. 我最喜爱的电影明星my favourite film star 31. 去看电影的邀请an invitation to the cinema 32. 在大连体育馆at Dalian Stadium 33. 在周一的下午on Monday afternoon 34. 看望奶奶visit grandmother 35. 待在家里stay at home
Part2: Module1-3基础知识集锦：1. practise 练习（动词） practise doing sth 练习干某事
和practise的用法一样的动词还有：finish, mind, suggest, enjoy, miss, feel like……..
2. class 班，班级（名词） class表示“几班”，Class One/ Class 1 （= the first class）一班
3. welcome adj. 受欢迎的; v. 欢迎 欢迎某人到某地welcome sb to sp
4. China-Chinese England-English Japan-Japanese India-Indian
Australia-Australian France-French German-Germany Canada-Canadian
5.在英语中，有些名词在其后加’s 来表示所属关系，名词的这种形式称为名词的所有格，译为“…的”。
(1) 一般情况下，在单数名词词尾加 “’s” (2) 单数名词以s结尾，变所有格加 “’s”
(3) 以-s 结尾的复数名词只加 “’s” ④ 不以-s结尾的复数名词在词尾加 “’s”
(4) 所有格为无生命的事物，一般用of 结构。
6. 询问职业的句型：你妈妈是干什么的？
（1）What’s your mother’s job （2）What’s your mother （3）What does your mother do
7. there be 句型：there be句型 通常用来表示 某地有某物或某人。
(1)There is a computer on Miss Li’s desk..
思考句型转换：① 写一般疑问句及肯定和否定回答:... ② 改为否定句:... ③ 改为复数形式：…
（2）there be句型中的be动词的确定根据就近原则。
8.some 一些 adj.
（1）.some可用作形容词，即可修饰可数名词复数又可修饰不可数名词
（2）. some & any: 一般情况下，some用于肯定句中，any用于否定句和疑问句中。但当表示 要求、请求或希望得到肯定回答 的疑问句中,要用some。
9. in front of , in the front of:的用法：
同：均表示“在…前面”
异：in front of表示“在某物范围之外的前面”， in the front of表示“在某物范围之内的前面”
at the back of (与 in/ at the front of 相对)，表示“在…后面”
Module4-6基础知识集锦
1. have got/ has got: 有… There be 句型表示在某地有某物，而 have got 表示某人拥有某物.
She has got a big family. 她有一个大的家庭. ①否定句：She hasn’t got a big family. 她没有一个大的家庭. ②一般疑问句：Has she got a big family 她有一个大的家庭吗？③肯否定回答：Yes, she has. No, she hasn’t.
2.选择疑问句：基本结构：一般疑问句 + or + 其它。
注意：选择疑问句回答时要根据实际情况来回答，而不能用Yes/No回答。
3. 因…感谢某人： Thank…for… thank sb. for sth. =thanks for sth. thank sb. for doing sth.=thanks for doing 如：Thank you for your coming.感谢你的到来。
4. and/ or的用法：and 一般用在肯定句中，or 一般用在否定及疑问句中.
5. There are some apples on the tree. There is a bird in the tree.
属于树本身的用on, 不属于树本身的用in.
6.Make a family tree for your family. 为你的家庭绘一张家谱。总结：给某人做某物 make sth. for sb.
7.drink n.饮料；v.喝 drink作名词时，表示“饮料”总称时为不可数名词;drink还可表示“饮料的一杯或一份”。Eg. Can I have a drink drink作动词时，译为喝，饮；喝酒。
8.healthy（反义词）unhealthy，是在healthy前加上了前缀un-构成的，前缀"un-"通常放在一些形容词前表否定。类似的还有：unhappy unlucky unfair unusual unpleasant unimportant
9. would like ⑴想干某事 would like to do sth ⑵想要某物 would like sth ⑶would you like …的常用答语：同意：Yes, I’d like to. / Yes, please. 拒绝：Sorry, I’m afraid not. / No, thanks.
10. Let’s do sth用于邀请或建议某人和说话人一起去做某事。
Let’s do sth.的常用答语有：①That’s a good idea. ②Sure. ③OK. ④All right.
11. 特殊疑问句. 提问“星期几”用：What day；提问“日期”用What date; 提问“明确而具体的某一时刻”用When 或 What time; 提问价格要用How much或What’s the price of…
12. invite 名词形式：invitation
邀请某人做某事invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人去某地 invite sb. to sp.
(1) Lily邀请我去她的生日聚会。 Lily invites me to go to her birthday party.
(2)Tony和Tom邀请我去剧院。Tony and Tom invite me to the theatre.
(3) 谢谢你的邀请。Thank you for your invitation.
一、单项选择.
( )1. _____ is before Thursday.A. Wednesday B. Friday C. Saturday D. Tuesday
( )2. Would you like _______ a football match
A. watch B. to watch C. watching D. watches
( )3. This is the twins’ bedroom. We can see ________beds .
A .May’ s and Joy’s B. May’ s and Joy C. May and Joy D. May and Joy’s
( ) 4. There is a red hat on the table .Please_____.
A put on it B put them on C put on mine D put it on
( ) 5. There _______ three desks and a computer in the room. A are B is C has D have
( ) 6. You can use the Internet ________ music.
A. downloads B. download C. downloading D. to download
( ) 7. —Hello! May I speak to Mr. Smith, please —Sorry, he’s not in. Who's ____, Please
—________is Jack. A this , this B that, That C that ,This D this, that
( ) 8. -- ______ do you play tennis -- I play it every day.
A. How many B. How much C. How often D. How old
( )9. Daming ______ any brothers.A. have got B. haven’t got C. has got D. hasn’t got
( )10. We often get together and ______stories.A. say B. tell C. talk D. speak
( )11. There are more than 50 _____ in our school.
A. woman teachers B. woman teacher C. women teachers D. women teacher
( )12. Look！There's a beautiful table ______three legs over there. A. have B. has C. with D. in
( )13. I have got a dog, _______ name is Zippy.A. it’s B. their C. its D. it is
( )14. I have two pictures, one is big, ______ is small.
A. other B. the other C. others D. another
( )15. There is a picture ______ Lucy’s family ______ the wall.
A. of, on B. at, in C. of, in D. in, on
( )16. There are some birds _______ the picture ____ the classroom.
A. in, on B. in, in C. on. On D. on, in
( )17. ---Where is my pen ---_______. A. Here they are. B. Here it is. C. Here are you.
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. There are some _____________(tomato) and ___________(potato) in the basket.
2. Are there any __________(juice) in the glass 3. We have got some _________(apple) juice.
4. “Have you got any _________(beef) ” “Yes, we have.”
5. Milk and water are healthy _______(drink).6. I want to have some _______(fish).
7.___________ (we) English teacher is Miss Li.8. Mike ____________ (not can) swim. He is too young.
9. My ____________ ( father) car is white.10. __________ ( I ) classroom is big and clean.
11. These _____________(America ) doctors ___________ (be ) in China now.
12. ____ (this) are ____( I ) friends. They are from America. 13. What’s the _____(girl) name
初三一轮复习七上Module7-10
Module 7
have Chinese 上语文课2.have an English lesson 上英语课3.What are your lessons today 你今天上什么课？4.at eight o’clock 在八点5.at half past ten 在十点半6.talk about one’s homework 谈论某人的作业7.What about you 你呢？/你怎么样啊？8.get up 起床9.have breakfast / lunch / dinner 吃早餐/午饭/晚饭10.go to school 上学11.have a break 休息12.talk with my friends 与我的朋友交谈/聊天13.have meat and rice 吃肉和米饭14.go home 回家15.get home到家16.finish school 放学17.study science / maths 学习科学/数学
Module 8
1.send him a card 送他一张卡片=send a card to him2.make him a cake 做一个蛋糕给他=make a cake for him3.give her a game 送一个游戏给她=give a game to her4.have a birthday party 举行生日晚会5.watch football 看足球比赛 =watch a football match6.go to one’s party 去某人的晚会7.a lot of 大量，很多 =lots of8.go to concerts 去听音乐会9.in / from the USA在/来自美国10.on television 通过电视11.CDs by Twins Twins的CD12.a box of chocolates 一盒巧克力13.a pair of trainers 一双软运动鞋14.a pair of jeans 一条牛仔裤15.in one’s home 在某人的家里16.at home 在家17.at once 马上，立即18.give flowers as presents 送花作为礼物
Module 9
Welcome to Beijing Zoo 欢迎到北京动物园 2.sixteen thousand 一万六千 3.in / from the Arctic 在/来自北极4.There she is. 她在那里。 5.in Europe / Africa / Asia 在欧洲/非洲/亚洲
be European / African / Asian是欧洲的/非洲的/亚洲的;是欧洲人/非洲人/亚洲人
7.European wolves欧洲的狼8.African monkeys 非洲的猴子9.in the wild 在野外in the forest 在森林in the jungle 在热带雨林in the desert 在沙漠in (the) grassland 在草原10.around the world 全世界，世界各地=all around the world=all over the world 11.for twelve hours 十二个小时 12.15 kilos of bamboo 15公斤竹子13.stay healthy 保持健康
Module 10
1.switch on the computer 开电脑 2.open a new document打开新文档 3.write a name for the document 为文档写个名字 4.download music from the Internet 从网上下载音乐 5.go online 上网6.make travel plans 做旅游计划 7.on the Internet 在互联网上 8.at the weekend 周末9.visit a website 浏览网页，访问网站 10.use my laptop for my lessons 用笔记本电脑备课//use the Internet to do their homework 用互联网来做作业 11.connect to the Internet 连接到互联网//connect the monitor to the computer 把显示器连接到主机 12.save a document 保存文档 13.print a document 打印文档 14.check the timetable 核对时间表 15.at work 在工作(at school 在学校at home 在家at break 休息时)
Part2: Module7-10基础知识集锦：
1.时间表达法在英语中表达时间可用直接表达法和间接表达法。
1).直接表达法 ①表达整点时间可用“基数词+o'clock”。其中o'clock 没有复数形式，也可省略。 one o'clock 1点钟 seven o'clock 七点钟 ②表达非整点时间可用“钟点+分钟”两个基数词连用，译为“几点几分”; eight five 8点5分
2).间接表达法 ①如果分钟数不超过30，可用“分钟+past+钟点”表达。其中past是介词，意为“超过”。 ten past six 6点10分 ighteen past eight 8点18分
②如果分钟数超过30，可用“（60-原分钟数）+ to +(原钟点数+1)”表达。其中to是介词，意为“差”，表示“还差多少分钟到下一个整点”。two to two1点50 fifteen to seven 6点45分
Ps:当分钟数是15时，可用a quarter 代替，意为“一刻钟”。当分钟数是30时，可用half代替，意为“半点”。【注意】如果表示时间的名词被this, that, tomorrow 或 yesterday修饰，它们的前面不需要用任何介词。
【拓展】at 还可以用at night(在晚上)，at last(最后), at weekends(在周末), at noon(在中午)
2.have 1) v. 吃 have breakfast/have lunch/have supper
2)“have+ a + 动词意义的名词” 表示短暂的动作。have a look/have a drink/have a walk
3.频度副词1).常见的频度副词有以下这些：always（总是）usually（通常）often（常常，经常） sometimes（有时候） never（从不, 是用来表示动作频率的，但程度上有别。一般说来可按频率大小排列：always＞usually＞often＞sometimes＞seldom（很少）＞hardly (几乎不)＞never（从不）
2).频度副词的位置：在be动词之后，第一个助动词或情态动词之后， 在行为动词之前。
对这些频度副词提问时，用how often。
【拓展】 sometime,sometimes,some time与some times
1).sometime是时间副词，指不确定的将来或过去某一点时间（某时候或任何时候），不指一段时间。2).sometimes是频度副词，指“有时”、“不时”的意思（=at times）。3).some time是名词词组，指一段时间（一些时间或若干时间）。4).some times指“几次”。
4. a pair of一对，一双 a pair of jeans //a pair of glasses注：This pair of shoes___is__ ( be) cheap.
5. thousand 意为“一千”，用法如下： 1.当前面有数词以及many，several等词修饰时，用单数形式，后面直接跟复数名词。如： two hundred students 200名学生 several thousand workers 几千工人2.当这词前面没有数词而后面有of 时，则一定要用复数形式，表示“数以千计，成千上万”，笼统的数目概念。如： thousands of dollars 数千美元 //hundred（百), million（百万）
6序数词：　序数词是指表示顺序的数词。(根据课本P127)
总结：①序数词一般由基数词在词尾加th构成。
②以ty结尾的基数词变为序数词时，要先把y变为ie，再加th。
③20以上的十位或百位的基数词，只将其个位上的基数词变为序数词就可以了。
注意：序数词前常用定冠词the或形容词性物主代词。
注：由基数词变序数词口诀：一，二，三，要全变，其余把th加后边．八减t，九去e，字母f代ve，ty变成tie。注释：one→first, two→second, three→third four→fourth six →sixth eight→eighth, nine→ninth, twelve→twelfth, twenty→twentieth
7. 常用方位介词的用法
1).on 表示“在……的上面”，通常只一个物体在另一个物体的上面，两者之间有接触。
2).in 表示“在……的里面”3).Under 表示“在……的下面”
4).behind 表示“在……的后面”5.next to 表示“紧挨着，在……的旁边”
8.send 发送 He sends me an email every day.他每天给我发封电子邮件。
Send for the doctor, please.请派人去请医生来。
My boss sends me to meet the foreigner. 我的老板派我去见外宾。
“send for”意思为________________send sb. to do sth.意思为______________________
一、单项选择( )1. There are five _________ story books on the bookshelf.
A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of
( )2. I met her ____a cold winter morning. A. on B. in C. at D. of
( )3. This pair of trainers _______to Mary. A. belong B. belongs C. is belong D. are belong
( )4. They have supper ____ half past six. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )5. He was born _______ March 4, 1997. A. in B. on C. at D. of
( )6. The glasses _____ broken by Tom yesterday. A.was B. were C. is D. are
( )7. He lives on _____floor. A. the third B.three C.thirds D. a thrid
8. _visitors come to China every year. A. Thousands of B. Ten thousands C. Ten thousand of D. Thousand of
( )9. Don’t drop it. Please try _____ time. A. the second B. second C. two D. a second
( )10. Would you like some coffee or tea ---- _______. Water is ok. A. Both B. Either C. Neither D. All
( )11. Do you know _____man in blue --Yes, he’s a professor( 教授) of____university.
A. the , an B. a, a C. /, the D. the, a
( )12. It’s ___nice day, isnt’ it --Yes, what ____fine weather! A. a, a B .the, the C. a, / D. the, /
( )13. How many students are there in the classroom --______. They are all in the lab.
A. Some B. All C. Neither D. None
( )14. What do you like, tea or coffee -- _________. I don’t mind.A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. All
( )15. How many ____are there in your family A. bus B. car C. bike D. people
( )16. It’s a fine day today. How about _____ ---Sounds great.
A. go hiking B. go to hike C. going hiking D. to go to hike
( )17. Would you like to play basketball with us this afternoon -- ____, but I have a lot of homework to do.
A. I’d love to B. I’m afraid not C. Sounds good. D. No problem
( )18. How far is your home from here --It’s about two______drive. A. hour’s B. hours C. hours’ D. hour
( )19. He is ____ unusual boy. A. a B.an C. /
( )20. He will go to America ____ next month.A. sometimes B. some times C. sometime D. some time
二、.单词适当形式填空3. There _______(be) a pen and some books on the desk.
1. This pair of glasses ______________(belong) to Tom. And those glasses___________(be)John’s.
2. Today is my friend Jim’s __________(twelve) birthday and it is my mother’s __________(forty) birthday.
4. There are two _________(wolf) , three_________(mouse) and two__________(tomato) in the picture.
5. The pen is my friend’s. And _________(her) is on her desk. ______(my) is in my pencil box.
6. The rain______________(last) for two days. 7. Don’t make the childrn __________(talk) there.
8. Has he finished ____________(draw) the horse 9. There are some _______________(different) between Lucy and Liy, although they are twins.10. Do the ___________(India) speak English as their first language 初三一轮复习八下Module1-2
Module1重点短语:
tidy up 收拾2.take up占用（时间或空间）3.a bit +adj. / a bit of +n. 一点儿… (区别于a little +adj. / n. ) 4.a collection of stamps / collect stamps 集邮5.play the violin / the piano / the drum / the flute 拉小提琴/弹钢琴/打鼓/吹笛子6.play football / tennis / volleyball 踢足球/打网球/打排球7.listen to music 听音乐8.all the time 一直, 总是9.be / show/ become interested in sth. 对…感兴趣/显示出/变得感兴趣10.next time 下一次11.at the end of … 在…末尾12.need to do sth. 需要做某事13.start doing sth./ to do sth. 开始做某事14.how often 多久一次(询问频率)15.grow vegetables 种菜16.look after…照顾, 照看17.such as…= for example 例如18.grow as a person 成长19.develop one’s interests 发展兴趣 .come out 出版; 出现; 结果是21.as a result 结果22.like doing sth. / to do sth. 喜欢做某事23.in the future 在将来24.try to do sth. / try doing sth. 尽力做某事/尝试做某事25.in one’s free/ spare time 在某人业余时间26.bring sb. great success 给某人带来成功{ 注意词性success n. successful adj.successfully adv. succeed (in doing sth.) v. } 27.be popular with …在…中受欢迎28.write to sb. 给某人写信29.all over the world 遍及全世界30.think about…考虑某事31.find out ( about )…查明有关某事32.dress in…穿着…衣服33.in the past在过去 34.not only…but also…不仅…而且…
Module2重点短语：
1. 一些私人问题 some personal questions 2. 在几个月后in a couple of months 3. 有些亲密的朋友some close friends 4. 顺便说一下 by the way 5. 可能下周的某个时间 maybe sometime next week 6. 与…不同be different from 7. 把你的回答录音record your answers 8.想念我的父母miss my parents 9. 祝音乐会好运 good luck with the concert 10. 带你所有的朋友到北京电台来参观bring all your friends for a visit to Radio Beijing 11. 给我一个重要的礼物give me an important gift 12.在一个初中at a junior school 13.遥远 far away 14.害怕跟任何人交朋友 be afraid to make friends with anyone 15.跟任何人谈论我的问题talk to anyone about my problem 16. 担心worry about 17. 坐在桌子边 sit at my desk 18,和往常 一样 as usual 19.在那时at that moment 20.回头turn back 21. 没有说话 without a word
22.一种明朗而 又友好的东西的触动the touch of something bright and friendly23.和其他学生交谈 talk with the other students 24.一天天地 day by day 25.那个带来幸运微笑的男孩 the boy with the lucky smile 26.朝某人微笑smile at 27.没有关系 It doesn’t matter
Part2: Module1-2基础知识集锦：
Module1 1. make sb interested 结构: make sb adj.（补充：使役动词let/have/make sb do sth.）
(1).interest (n.) 兴趣 have/show interest in / (v.) 使(人) 发生兴趣,主语为事物
(2) (adj.) interesting & interested be interested in “对…感兴趣”
2. listen to sb. do听某人做了某事（着重全过程）/ doing sth.（着重正在做某事）
相同用法的感官动词还有： hear/ watch/notice/find/see等。
3. What’s happening on Friday 周五将要发生什么事？
①.sth happen to sb. “某人发生某事” A traffic accident happened to him yesterday .
②.sb.+ happen+ to do sth. “某人碰巧做某事” I happened to meet a friend yesterday.
4. 辨析：such as 例如，一般列举同类人或事物中的几个例子，as后面不可有逗号。
for example一般只举同类中的一个为例，作插入语，可位于句首,句中或句末。
5. as well as 既…又…, 不仅..而且，用于肯定句中，起连接作用。
as well as 连接并列主语时，谓语动词与第一个主语的人称和数保持一致。
1) I as well as they am (be) ready to help you.
2) Tom and his parents go to the park once a week. (同义句)
Tom as well as his parents goes to the park once a week.
6. as a result 结果，因此 (as a result of sth 因为… 的原因)
1) He got up late, so he was late for school.=He got up late, as a result, he was late for school.
7. 表示“花费”的四个词及用法：
1). sb. spend (money/time) on sth.//(in) doing sth. 花费（金钱/时间）做某事
2). It takes/took sb time …to do sth. 花费（时间）做某事
3) sb. pay money for sth. 花费（金钱）做某事 4). sth. cost sb (money)花费（金钱）做某事
写过去式及分词：spend spent spent take took taken pay paid paid cost cost cost
8. tidy up “收拾”，如果宾语是名词，可置于tidy与up中间或后面；如果宾语是代词，须置于中间。相同用法的短语还有：pick up; look up; wake up等。
Module2 1. No one---- “ 没有人，无人” (否定含义)= nobody, 做主语时，谓语只用单数形式。No one knows (know) who I am. No one was (be) in the room when I entered.
None 可以指人也可以指物，表示三者或三者以上中“没有任何人或物”常与of 短语连用。作主语时谓语动词用单数或复数皆可，但of 后为不可数名词时，谓语动词只能用单.They were all very tired, but none of them would stop to rest.A.both B.allC.none D. neither
2. lonely adj.孤独的，寂寞的 alone adj. 单独一个人的adv.单独地
1）The old man lives alone, but he doesn’t feel lonely. 那个老人独自住着但是不感到孤独
2）-- Do you feel lonely_ when you are alone at home -- No, I always have lots of thing to do.
3. be afraid to do sth. “不敢做某事” （强调动作） be afraid that +宾语从句
be afraid of (doing) sth. “担心/害怕（做）某事” （强调出现某种后果）
1）The boy was afraid of speaking in public. 那个男孩害怕在大庭广众前讲话。
2）I am afraid that I can’t finish the work on time. 我恐怕不能按时完成工作。
5. hear sb. doing sth. 听见某人正在做某事 hear sb. do sth.听见某人做了或经常做某事
1）Every time I heard the other students talking and laughing.
2）--- Do you often hear Wei Hua read English in his room
-- Listen! Now we can hear him reading English in his room.
拓展： laugh n. v. 笑，大笑 laugh at …嘲笑… smile n. v. 微笑 smile at … 对…微笑
6. remember to do sth 记着要去做某事 remember doing sth 记着做过了某事
forget to do sth . 忘记要去做某事 forget doing sth 忘记做过了某事
7. What do you think of the film == How do you like the film 你认为这部电影怎么样？
8. worry about == be worried about 担心…， 为…而担心
1）I didn’t want my parents to worry about me.
9. 宾语从句注意事项: (1) 引导词的正确使用 （ that， if/whether， wh-疑问词）
(2) 在宾语从句中,一定要用陈述语序.
(3) 宾语从句中如果主句用一般过去时，从句根据需要用表示过去的一种时态，但客观真理除外（从句用一般现在时）。(4) 人称变化遵循：“一随主，二随宾，三不变”的原则。
一单项选择
( )1.–What happened ___Sarah –She fell down and hurt her leg. A. to B. with C. in D. on
( )2. Jack is good at playing ____ guitar but he is weak in playing ____ soccer.
His sister Lucy likes playing ____ chess. A. the; /; / B. the; the; / C. the; /; the D. /; the; /
( )3. I think _____is relaxing to go on a vacation. A. that B. this C. that D. it
( )4.My father is a pianist so I often hear him__ the piano A. to play B.play C. playing D. plays
( )5. My brother is very______ in this______ book. A. interesting; interested
　　B. interested; interest C. interest; interested D. interested; interesting
( )6. His smile made me_________. A. to feel happy and warm
　　B. feel warmly and happily C. felt happy and warm D. feel happy and warm
( )7.She_the piano for six years，but she doesn’t play now.A.have playedB.playedC.has played
( ) 8. We ____ the museum yesterday. A.visited B.visit C.have visited
( ) 9.I ___stamps since I was ten years old. A.collectedB.have collected C.am Dcollecting
( ) 10. I _____ to school yesterday because I was ill. A.wentB.haven’t gone C.didn’t go
( )11.I asked him __ he wants to go to the cinema with us. A.what B. if C.whether D. B and C
( ) 12. Look at my running nose. I think I feel like _______ a bad cold.
A. catch B. to catch C. caught D. catching
( ) 13.--- I am going to enter the English speech competition . ----______________.
A. Congratulations B. Good luck C. Sorry D. OK, thanks
( ) 14. Can you tell me ______ A. where is the supermarket B. how do you get there
C. where do you come from D. when the meeting will begin
( ) 15. ----____________ will your father come back --- In a couple of months.
A. How soon B. How often C. How long
( ) 16. I asked him ________ , but he didn’t answer me.
A.Why did he smile B. why he smiles C. why he smiled D. he why smiled
( ) 17. She told me that I posted the letter last week. But I didn’t remember ____ it.
A. post B. posting C. to post D. posted
( ) 18. I asked him ___ she would come or not. A. if B. that C. what D. Whether
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. No one ____(like) playing chess in our class. 2. Don’t be afraid _______(make) mistakes.
3. Alice saw the rabbit ____________(go) down the hole under the hedge.
4. It’s raining outside. Remember ___________(take) an umbrella.
5. It is fine today. Why not ________(go) out for a walk.
三、翻译句子
1.我很孤独,害怕和别人交朋友。 (be afraid to do ). _____________________________
2. 每当我听到其他同学在说着、笑着，我都感觉心都要碎了。(hear sb. doing)
____________________________________________________________________
3. 我问他为什么笑，但是他已经不记得朝我笑了。(remember doing … smile at …)
____________________________________________________________________
4.我不想让我的父母担心我。(want sb. to do worry about)___________________________
Module3重点短语:
1. 谢谢你带我们参观北京电台thank you for taking us around Radio Beijing 2. 不客气Don’t mention it. / You’re welcome. / That’s all right. 3. 喜欢带游客到处转 enjoy showing visitors around 4. 小心红色信号灯 look out for the red light 5. 这边走Come this way.6. 收集最新消息collect the latest news 7. 需要说好英语need to speak English well 8. 坚持学习 keep studying 9. 决定听什么和看谁decide what to listen to and who to see 10. 想当一名体育播音员would like to be a sports reporter 11. 准备天气预报 prepare the weather reports 12. 进两个球score two goals 13. 讨厌输球hate losing 14. 低头看着我 look down at me 15. 记得紧靠收音机坐着 remember sitting close to the radio16. 亲自和我交流speak to me in person 17. 在一个小电台找份工作 ask for a job in a small radio station 18. 了解网络电台 learn about Internet radio 19. 给听众播放我最喜欢的音乐 play my favourite music to the listeners 20. 关闭close down 21. 准备每周节目prepare the weekly programmes 22. 通过观察窗外的情况做这件事do this by looking out of the window 23. 跟我来come with me 24. 在另一个房间in another room 25. 告诉我你早饭吃的什么tell me what you had for breakfast 26. 以同一个问题开始工作begin work with the same question
Module4重点短语：
1.借给我他的CD 刻录机lend me his CD recorder 2. 让我们看看说明书Let’s look at the instructions3. 打开刻录机turn on the recorder 4. 回放play back 5. 等三十秒wait for 30 seconds6. 通过邮件 by email 7. 把刻录机连接到电脑上connect the recorder to the computer8. 选择复制键choose the ‘copy’ symbol 9. 挽救你的生命 save your life 10. 令人惊奇的建议the surprising advice 11. 咬到他的手 bite him on the hand 12. 几天以前a few days earlier13. 从箱子里爬出来climb out of the box 14. 藏在盘子底下hide under the dish 15. 捡起它 pick it up 16. 落在冰箱里 land in the fridge 17. 保持冷静 stay cool /keep cool 18. 开始疼痛 begin/start to ache 19. 给他对症下药 give him the right medicine 20. 出院leave hospital
Part2: Module3-4基础知识集锦： Module3
1. would like to do sth. “愿意做某事” I would like to speak a few words. 我想讲几句话。
would like sth. 愿意要某东西, 如: Would you like something to eat. feel like+_____
2. Thank you for (doing) sth. “因为…而感谢你” , Thank you for your invitation.
Thank you for inviting me. 感谢你邀请我。
3. take / show sb. around +地点 带某人参观某地
4. look out 意为当心，小心 其后接宾语时, 加介词for （look out for + sth）
Look out for the car. It’s dangerous to play football on the road.
牢固记住: look组成的常见短语: look for 寻找 look at 看 look after照看 look up 查阅
look down on轻视, 看不起 look forward to 期待 look through 浏览
5.keep 的用法：(1) keep doing sth 继续做某事，不停地做某事
They kept talking on the phone for half an hour.
(2) keep 常用语“keep +宾语+宾语补足语”复合结构中。宾语补足语可以由doing, 形容词充当。如：保持健康：keep healthy/fit, stay healthy/fit
6. decide 用法：
(1) decide to do sth 决定做某事 decide not to do sth决定不做某事
(2) decide +that 从句 she has decided that she will be a doctor.
(3) decide +(when/where/ how..) We decide what to listen to and who to see.
I can’t decide which one I should choose.=I can’t decide which one to choose.
7. explain v. 解释;讲解 ( n. explanation)
①explain sth to sb向…解释 e.g. Mr. white often explains questions to me carefully.
②explain that/why/what从句 e.g. He explained that he had never taken his dad’s money.
8. It seemed that they were speaking to me in person.
1）seem 后面可以加形容词，to do, that 从句
2）It seems that… “ 看起来似乎…” 可与 “主语+ seem +to do”互相转化。① It seems that Tony is unhappy today. = Tony seems to be unhappy today. = Tom seems unhappy today.② It seems that she knows what I will say. = She seems to know what I will say.
9. voice： 嗓音；多指的是人的说话声或唱歌声。
sound：声音；指人们听到的“声音” 可以指人和动物发出的声音，也可以指物体碰撞发出的声音或自然界的任何声音。
noise: 噪音,指人们不愿意听到的不悦耳的噪音，及嘈杂声、吵闹声。
10. to do不定式与doing作宾语
(1) 后跟to do不定式作宾语的动词： want, would like, hope, agree, decide...
(2)后跟doing作宾语的动词：巧妙记忆：
完成\练习\持续\忙 (finish, practice, keep, be busy )喜欢\介意\别放弃(enjoy, mind, give up)
(3) 后跟两者作宾语的动词：remember, forget, stop, try…
Module4
1. 把某物借给某人lend sth. to sb.=lend sb sth
辨析：borrow 和lend borrow：v. 借进 (borrow…from…) lend：v. 借出 (lend…to…)
2. If you want to send your recording by email, connect the recorder to your computer.
(1) send 发送;送给 把某物送给某人send sb. sth.=send sth to sb.
(2) connect在句中表示“连接、接通”， 短语：connect… to/with …
3. If the red light doesn’t come on, wait for 30 seconds.
(1) come on 在这里表示“打开、开动”
They heard a strange sound, and lights came on.他们听到一个奇怪的声音，接着灯亮了。
(2) come on 还以表示“鼓励、劝说、催促”等。
4. If you want to turn on the recorder, press the blue button. turn on 打开，反义短语turn off
其他关于turn的短语：turn up调大（高）； turn down调小（低）；拒绝
turn ove r翻转; 调转；返回； turn back往回走
5祈使句：
(1) 祈使句是简单句里一种特殊的句子形式，表示命令、请求等。
这类句子最显著的特点是省略主语，且动词在任何情况下都用原型。
注意：祈使句要与动词作主语的情况进行区分. 动词作主语时要用V-ing形式.
(2) 祈使句的否定形式是直接在动词前加Don’t。
大多数祈使句的反意疑问句是will you；Let’s…, shall we. Let us…, will you
6. bite 过去式bit,过去分词bitten bite “叮、咬”，根据咬的部位不同，要接不同的介词。
动词+宾语+介词 (in / on) +身体部位，类似的动词有hit,
7. suggest doing sth 建议做某事 ；advise sb. to do sth建议某人做某事。
8. if条件状语从句:
(1) 注意“主将从现”原则，即：当主句是一般现在时；祈使句；含情态动词，或当主句的谓语动词是hope, wish, want等动词时, 从句要用一般现在时表将来。
(2) 注意：要会区分宾语从句中的if 以及条件句中的if： 宾语从句中的if意思为“是否”，相当于whether；条件状语从句里的if 意思为 “如果”。
一、单项选择
1.You’d better_the riders when you drivea.A.look out forB.look downC.look upDlook through
2Remember_the red light when you goacross the streetAwatchingB.watchC.watchesDto watch
3. It seemed that they ______ to me in person.
A. are speaking B. were speaking C. speaking D. spoken
4. If you don’t have money, you should ______ your parents ______more.
A. ask; to B. ask; with C. ask; for D. ask; of
5. Let’s begin our great concert ______ dance music.A. use B. with C. of D. in
6. Most of my classmates enjoy _______ Jay Chou’s pop music.
A. listen B. listening C. listen to D. listening to
7.I asked _ for breakfast.A.what did he have B.what does he have C.what he hasD.what he had
8. The doctors were busy helping the patient. They even didn’t have time to stop_______..
A. having a rest B. to have a rest C. had a rest D. for have a rest
9. Listen! She has a nice ___, and she sings very well. A. sound B. noise C. voice D. shout
10. He practises _______English every day. A. saying B. speaking C. talking D. telling
11. I ___ my pen everywhere, and didn’t find it. A. looked downB. looked after C. looked forD. looked
12.Our teacheoften advise us __ computer games a lot.A. to playB. playingC. not to play D. not playing
13. Don’t forget ____ the lights when you leave.A. turning on B. turn off C. to turn off D. to turning off
14.Can you tell me _ English well A.how to learn B.what to learn C how can I learn D.what can I learn
15. The meeting didn’t start______ everyone was there. A. because B. until C. why D. if
二、单词的适当形式填空
1. Keep _________(study) English if you want to work on Radio Beijing.
2. People from all over the world make friends by ___________(write) letters.
3. If it ______(be) sunny tomorrow, I ___________(walk) to school.
4. We ________(not have) our sports meeting if the weather _______(not be ) fine.
5. If you __________(not know) the answer, please ________(ask) Mary.
6. Don’t talk! The students _________(have) a test.
7. ________(read) English books is good for us.
8. I don’t know which sweater _________(buy).
9. If there _______(be) fewer trees, there _________( be) more pollution.
10. I’m not sure if he ____ (come) tomorrow. If he __ (come), I ___ ( tell) you.
三、翻译句子
1. 如果你想成为一名记者，你需要英语说得很好。(want to be…; need to )
2. 他们还没有决定去哪里。(decide where …)
3. 这孩子不停的问我问题。( keep asking…)
4. 我记得今天早上我给老师打过电话了。(remember making a telephone call to…)
5. 我问莉莉昨天早饭吃了什么？(have for ) 6. 似乎要下雨了。(It seems that…)
Module5重点短语:
1. 告诉我关于音乐会的事tell me about the concert2. 一起演奏一些音乐play some music all together
3. 独奏一段爱尔兰舞曲play a solo of some Irish dance music 4. 在.. 快结束时 at the end of 5. 幸好是你不是我rather you than me 6. 在后台演奏 play in the background 7.在我们最后的排练中during our final practice8. 把你打败 beat you 9. 独奏 play the solo 10. 警告她关于她的功课 warn her about her schoolwork 11. 花太多时间和乐队在一起spend too much time with the orchestra 12. 惩罚她并且把她送去一所不同的学校punish her and send her to a different school 13. 以她为荣 be proud of her =take pride in her 14. 把她送走send her away 15. 拒绝演奏refuse to play 16. 那多可惜啊！Such a pity 17. 有另一次机会have another chance 18.留住我的好朋友keep my best friend19. 带来一个新的电脑游戏 bring him a new computer game 20. 警告我不要用他的电脑玩游戏warn me not to use his computer for playing games 21. 用它来工作use it for his job 22. 出故障go wrong23. 把它复制到电脑上copy it onto the computer24. 把它从电脑上卸载下来take it off the computer25. 十分确信make quite sure 26. 感觉糟糕极了feel terrible 27. 主动提出赔偿 offer to pay 28.犯了两个错误make two mistakes 29. 告诉他真相 tell him the truth 30. 生你的气be angry with you31. 在家周围做些事情do some jobs around the home32. 帮他做他的工作 help him with his work33. 真的抱歉 be truly sorry 34.在电脑上留下了病毒leave a virus on the computer35. 为……而付钱pay … for
Module6重点短语：
1 醒着的be awake 2太困了be sleepy 3亲密的朋友 close friends 4关于交朋友about making friends 5就这些吗？was that it 6采访的尾声the end of the interview 7鼓掌欢呼 clap and cheer 8在朋友中间among friends 9担心她be worried about her 10.照顾她look after her 11.谈论她的朋友talk about her friends 12.小提琴拉得十分好play the violin really well 13. 我今天的文化播报my culture report for today 14.在这部电影中演得很好act well in this film 15.使角色真实可信make their characters believable 16.关于 be about 17.环绕着加勒比海诸岛航行 sail around the Caribbean islands 18.试图找到一些丢失的黄金try to find some lost gold 19.遇到一些坏人come face to face with some terrible men 20.不得不和他们斗争have to fight them 21.有很多打斗镜头There’s lots of action 22.看起来十分危险 look really dangerous 23.反映现实生活be true to life 24.在我看来in my opinion 25.太多的打斗too much fighting 26.除此以外except for that 27.上映、出版come out 28.建议你去看advise you to go and see 29.上演一周 show all week
30.一个奇幻惊险电影a fantastic adventure 31.既很受欢迎也很出名both very popular and famous
Part2: Module5-6基础知识集锦：
1. warn 警告，用法：1) warn sb of/about sth 2) warn sb (not) to do sth 3) warn + that 从句 use…for…表示用...做，介词for后用动名词形式。
拓展：be used for doing / to do 被用来干…… get used to doing … 习惯于干某事
2. too much修饰不可数名词 ，too many修饰可数名词，两者意思为:太多。
much too 意思为太... 修饰形容词、副词。
3.such +（a/an) +（形容词）+ 名词, so +形容词或者副词
拓展：so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
4.decide 决定 1). decide (not ) to do 2). decide +(when/where/ how…)从句
5. take off : 1）脱下 2）（飞机）起飞 3）请假，休息 4) 拔掉，卸载
6. offer 提出；提供1). offer sb. sth. =offer sth. to sb.给某人提供某物2). offer to do sth. 主动提出做某事
7. at least 至少， 反义短语 at most 至多
8. after all 毕竟 He is good enough. After all, he is only a child.
9. make sure 弄清楚，查明 1). make sure of / about 2). make sure that 从句
拓展：be sure of/about sth 对某事有把握 be sure to do sth 务必做某事 be sure that 确定…..
10. go wrong 出毛病，出故障， go 为“变得，变成” 类似短语： go bad, go white
11. Rather you than me! 翻译：幸好是你不是我.
prefer to do sth. rather than do sth.=would rather do than do sth. 宁愿做…而不愿做…
12. beat & win 翻译下列句子总结beat和win的用法：
小结：beat通常用于游戏或比赛中击败对手，其宾语多是与之比赛、战斗的运动员或球队。 win 常跟类似a game，a war a prize等之类的名词连用，不可接表示人的名词作宾语。另外beat 还有“连续不断敲打”的意思
【M6知识点集锦】
1.awake adj. 醒着的（表示状态，不用进行时） be awake
wake v. 醒来 (woke, woken) wake up 叫醒，唤醒 代词放中间 wake him up
2.sleepy adj. 困乏的，打盹的 feel sleepy asleep adj. 入睡的 be asleep / fall asleep
sleep v. (slept, slept ) go to sleep 睡觉
3. among 在…中 （指三者或三者以上之间） between 在…中间 （指两者之间）
1). The teacher sits among the students.2). The girl sits between the twins.
4. look after 照顾，照看 = take care of 照顾，看管
look after…well === take good care of …好好照顾
1). He looked after his cat well. 同义句 He takes good care of his cat.
5. explain 解释 explanation n. explain to sb. sth 向某人解释… explain + that 从句
6. at the end of 在…末尾 at the end of April 在4月底， at the end of the street
in the end 最后,终于 == at last / finally
7. worry vt(及物动词) 使烦恼，使忧虑 不及物动词 常与about 连用
worry的形容词有两种形式: worrying和worried be worried about
8. be on 上映，上演 The film has been on for 20 minutes.
9. both 词组：both …and == not only…but also
both..and谓语动词 用复数 Both you and he are going to Shanghai tomorrow.
not only…but also 就近原则 Not only you but also he is going to Shanghia tomorrow否定：neither .做主语谓语动词用单数。
neither …nor 两者之中一个也不 ：连接主语谓语动词采用就近原则：
Neither he nor I am (be) wrong. Neither you nor he has (have) made some mistakes.
就进原则的其他短语：either…or not only… but also there be
10. make make sb +动词原形 ，make sb+形容词 make sb+ 名词
① Our teacher often makes us do (do) a lot of homework. .
② Our hard work can make our country beautiful (beautiful).
(3) The teacher made me monitor. 老师让我当班长
11. although (尽管) 与 but although不能与but同时出现在一个句子中.
Although in my opinion there is too much fighting, it’s an enjoyable film.
In my opinion there is too much fighting, but it’s an enjoyable film.
12. except 除…之外 (同类之间的比较)
I go to school every day except Sunday. (言外之意：周日不上学)
except for 表示"除..外" (指不同类比较).
Your composition is quite good except for some spelling mistakes.
你的作文除了几处拼写错误之外，非常好。 （对作文是肯定的）
13. advise 与suggest 建议…
1). 建议某人做某事：advise sb to do sth. 2). 建议做某事：suggest doing sth.
Ex ① Our teacher often advises us to practise (practise)our handwriting.
② The teacher suggested practising (practise) our handwriting
1.He lives in a poor place, so he has no _ to hear popular music.A.adviceB.text C.chanceD. information
( )2. I am busy. Can you help me ________ the housework A. forB. with C. in D. onto
( )3. All the people in the office believe Jack, because he is always a(n) ____ man.
A. friendly B. lonely C. poor D. honest
( )4. She is _______ good girl and we all like to play with her. A. so B. so a C. such D. such a
( )5. My father often warns me ______ with that bad boy.
A. not to play B. not playing C. don’t play C. not play
( )6. If there _______ no red light, you can press the blue button.A. are B. is C. will be D. were
( )7. It takes _______ practice to become a good swimmer.A. a lot ofB. manyC. a fewD. a little
( )8. Please _____ the computer games. I don’t want my computer to get a virus.
A. take on B. take off C. turn up D. turn down
( )9. The rich man gave me much money yesterday, but I _______ it.
A. received B. accepted C. borrowed D. refused
( )10. Finally I realized _____I was wrong, so I said sorry to him. A. who B. if C. that D. which
( )11. I don’t like playing with Jane. I’d rather _______ in the park alone.
A. playing B. play C. to play D. played
( )12. — Sally doesn’t feel well today, so she can’t see the film with us. — _______
A. What a shame! B. Why not C. That is great. D. Don’t mention it.
( )13. Who can tell me what happened _____ the story
A. to the end B. by the end of C. at the end of D. in the end
( )14. — I want to be a zookeeper in the future. — _________ I’m afraid of animals.
A. Sounds nice. B. That’s lovely! C. Look out! D. Rather you than me.
( )15. The boy won first place in the race. His parents ______ him.
A. are interested in B. are worried about C. are proud of D. are busy with
( )16. All the children like Mr White very much because he often makes them_____.
A. laughed B. laugh C. laughing D. to laugh
( )17. My teacher said ______ I was hard-working. A. when B. who C. which D. that
( )18. Did you have anyone _____ the trees？ ---- Yes. I had them ______.
A. to water, water B. to water, watered C. water, to be watered D. water, watered
( )19. It’s a good habit______ breakfast every day. A. had B. have C. has D. to have
( )20. He is creative enough _____ so many nice toys for his daughter.
A. buying B. making C. to buy D. to make
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。
1. He is hungry. He would like something ______________(eat)
2.There are twelve ____________ (month) in a year.
3. If he ________(pass) the exam, his father ________ (buy) him a computer.
4. As he _________(read) the newspaper, his mother came in.
5. Don’t forget _________(water) my flowers while I’m away.
6. If the photo isn’t good, __________ (not/save).
7. Please teach me how___________ ( play ) the computer games.
8. Will you please ____________( not talk ) in class any more
9. They keep __________ (watch ) the beautiful scenery out of the window.
10. Do you think English is as __________ ( important ) as maths
11. Jim, ____________ ( not swim ) here. It’s dangerous.
三、拓展训练
1.他们饰演的角色真实可信。 They __________the character ___________.
2.他们与一些坏人面对面的相遇，不得不与他们交战。
They come ______ ______ _______with some terrible men and have to ________them.
3在我看来，尽管作文中的错误太多，但这还是一篇不错的文章。
______ _____ _______，It’s an excellent composition, __________ there is ______ ______ mistakes.
4.他们绕着加勒比海诸岛环行。 They ______ ______the Caribbean islands.
5. She is very happy，because she is always __________ _______(在朋友中间)。
四、拓展训练 （C层选做）
Shyness means feeling frightened when you’re around other people. Some children are born shy. Some become very shy later because of their life experience. In fact , everybody gets a little shy sometimes. It’s just how much they feel shy.
①Most people have red faces and talk in broken sentences when they are shy. But some become so shy that they won’t go to a restaurant because they are too nervous to order and pay for their food. Some are afraid of meeting new people, so they seldom go outside. This kind of shyness can be bad for a person.
②如果害羞并没有让你不能去做你想做的事, being shy isn’t a big problem. Some experts say shy people are good at working because they think __③__ and __③__ less. But remember not to let good opportunities (机会) pass you by just because of it. If you have to sing a song at a birthday party or give some performances in front of others, just do it. There’s nothing for you to be afraid of.
1.将①句翻译成中文。_____________________________________________________________
2.将②句翻译成英文。_____________________________________________________________
3.在③空格处填上适当的词。 __________　__________
4.You have nothing to be frightened.(同义句)_____________________________________
5. Find out the main idea of the message.________________________________________________初三一轮复习八上Module11-12
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
【学习目标】
1.熟记M11-12中出现的cloud等单词、wash up等短语，并灵活运用情态动词。
2.通过自主梳理，合作探究，学会构建模块知识树，并对复习效果自我评估。
3.了解不同国家的风俗，学会尊重习俗；激情投入,挑战自我,享受在复习中自我提升的快乐。
使用说明：1、15’激情背诵M11-12词汇和知识点，语法知识，自主构建知识体系。
2、15’独立完成学案，标记好疑难问题，准备讨论质疑。
【自主梳理】
温馨提示: 自主梳理M11-12重点内容，不能照搬导学案，形式不限，可大胆创新、拓展，可运用双色笔；动手动脑，增强自主学习力。
【复习提升】
一单项选择
( ) 1. Mrs Li often helps others. She is very_______. A. careful B. grateful C. useful D. helpful
( ) 2. I’ve heard of the story. It ____funny. A. looks B. seems C. feels D. sounds
( ) 3.It’s raining heavily______ the farmers keep on working in the field.
A. but B. though C. so D. because
( ) 4._______ is wrong to copy other students’ homework. A. It B. That C. There
( ) 5. He is__________short __________ reach the apple.
A. too；too B.enough ；to C. so；that D. too； to
( ) 6. The best time ____ China is Spring Festival because it’s an important festival in China.
A. of coming B. to visit C. on holiday D. about talking
( ) 7. It’s ____. You should be careful on the road. A. cloudy B. sunny C. windy D. snowy
( ) 8. It’s going to get dark. He _____ go home. A. may B. maybe C. may be
( ) 9._____winter it is very cold_____Alaska． A．In：in B．In；at C．On：in D．In；of
( ) 10. ________the weather like today A．What’s B．What C．How’s D．How
( ) 11.What will the weather______in February A.1ike B.is like C.be D.be like
( ) 12.If you can’t get to sleep, get up and try to do something _____ lying in bed.
A. and B. or C. instead of D. because of
( ) 13.When Maria __________ home, it was late. A. arrived B. reached to C. got to D. arrive at
( ) 14. I’m ________ tired, so I can walk on. A. a bit B. a little C. not a little D. not a bit
( ) 15.If you want to learn English well. You must use it as ______ as possible.
A. often B. long C. hard D. soon
( ) 16. –What is the weather like today –It’s a ________day. A. wind B. dry C. rain D. sun
( ) 17. As the season changes, the day _______ longer and the night shorter.
A. is becoming B. get C. has turned D. is growing to
( ) 18. Please give me _______ about my math subject.
A. an advice B. a advice C. some advice D. some advices
( ) 19.We need ____ help, not just promises. A. really B. real C. truly D. reality
( ) 20.Excuse me for breaking in, ______ I have some good news for telling you.
A. so B. and C. but D. yet
二．用所给词的正确形式填空
1. –When did you learn to swim --I ______ (can) swim at the age of 6.
2. –What’s the weather like today –It’s __________ (sun).
3. The sun _______ (shine) and there was no wind yesterday morning.
4. The best time __________ (visit) China is Spring Festival because it’s an important festival in China.
5. The days get longer in summer and the weather ________ (start) to get hotter.
6. It’s a good idea ___________ (bring) your swimsuit when you visit Hainan.
7. Remember ___________ (take) your pen because you might want to write something.
8. –It is great fun to go __________ (swim) , isn’t it --Yes, I enjoy it very much.
9.What about ________ (go）to the town with us
10. When he_______ (arrive）there, I’ll call you.
三、拓展训练 （C层选做）
1.接到鲜花的姑娘将预兆快要结婚了。The girl who catches the flowers will be next to _______________.
2.在公共场合大声说话是不礼貌的。 ________________________to speak loudly in public
3在中国你必须靠右行。 You_________________________ in China.
4.冰箱里有喝的吗 Is there ________________________in your fridge
5.妈，有人打电话找你。 Mum, _____________________on the phone for you.一轮复习初三上册Part1: Module1-2重点短语集锦：
Module1: 1. 开会___________ 2. 写下来____________ 3. 写作文_____________
4. 一个世界奇迹_______ 5.一个叫…的报刊__________ 6.没什么可见_____________
7. 5分钟之后到那里___________8. 仔细观察它们_______9. 太黑什么也看不见_________
10. 自然世界的奇观之一____________________ 11. 在…的底端___________________
12. 在…的边缘_____________ 13.到达顶部________________________
14.向另一端望去_______________ 15. 消失在远方___________________
Module2: 1. 凭我记忆___________2.考虑做某事________3.不再有校刊了______________4. 有点儿难度_____________5. 受他的思想的影响__________________ 6. 像孔子一样作为伟大的思想家出名____________________
7.同意某人_________________ 8. 去寻宝_______________ 9.在山洞里迷了路__________________10.决定去参加他自己的葬礼___________________ 11. 看见他很惊讶______________ 12.很高兴看见他活着__________________13. 惧怕他___________________ 14与成长中的孩子有关____________________15. 变得更加成熟稳重_____________________16. 因做坏事受惩罚____________________________17. 谈论自由、社会规则 ________________________________
Part2: Module1-2重点句子集锦
1.我仔细地看了看，但是天太黑了，什么也看不到.
2.我在世界自然奇观之一大峡谷的边缘上.
3.如果你把世界上三座最高的建筑物叠加起来放到底部，仍然够不到顶.
4. 我向左向右看了看，在两侧大峡谷消失在远方.
5. 他是一个活泼聪明的男孩子，并且他发现自己经历了很多惊心动魄的冒险.
6. 每个人看到他都很吃惊，但看到他或者都很高兴.
7.故事的主题与成长以及变得更加成熟有关.
8.它描述了在美国的小城镇里陌生人是如何被看待的.
9.马克吐温在1876年写了这部小说，但是它现在仍然被全世界的人们所阅读和喜爱着.
10.它被认为是美国文学史上最伟大的著作之一.
Part3: Module1-2重要知识点集锦
1.被动语态谓语动词的基本结构：be done
2. happen: 发生，等于______________. (1) 某人发生某事 sth happened to sb.
(2) 碰巧做某事 __________________.
3.through/ across/ past: through指的是从___________穿过，across指的是从_________穿过，而past指的是从旁边经过.例：穿过大门___________________, 穿过马路_____________.
4.too…to..: 意为________________， 可以与______________句式进行同义句转化.
例：I was too tired to walk. _______________________________________________.
5 .I saw that the ground fell away and down to a river.(同义句-----改为简单句)
I saw the ground _________ __________ and down to a river.
在这个句子中，see为__________动词，用____________和_____________两种用法，类似的感官动词还有_______________________________等.
6.有关look的几个短语：寻找______________ 小心_____________ 看____________
浏览________________ 查找(单词、号码)_________________________
7. not …any more: 表示“ 不再…”.可与“ no more” 转换。no more 在句中放于 be / 助动词/情态动词之后、实义动词之前。
例：我不会再相信你了. I will ____ believe you ______ ______.= I will believe you _____ _____.
8. a bit 表示“ 一点儿” 修饰动词、形容词、比较级，可以与a little 互换。
a little= a bit of, 可直接修饰不可数名词.
9. be known as... 表示“作为......知名/闻名". 等于be famous as. 联系：be famous for
如：(1)Weifang is _________________for kites. (2) Langlang is ______________a pianist.
【能力训练】
( ) 1. ---How far do they live
---_________I know, they live in the same town.
A. As long as B.As far as C.As well as D.As often as
( )2. _______this kind of question often ______in your class, Ann
A.does; ask B. is ;asked C.has; asked D.are; asked
( )3. Accidents ______here sometimes.A.happen B. is happened C.happenedD.is happening
( )4. --I want to teach in Tibet when I graduate from the college.
--Me, too. Teachers _____very much there.A.need B.are needing C.are needed D.needed
( )5. He promised that he will ________make his teacher angry ________.
A.not; at all B. not; more and more C. not; more or less D.not; any more
( )6 . Personal computers _______ in 1976. it has changed the whole world.
A. has been invented B. are invented C. were invented D. invented
( )7. We were all _________ with the ______trip.
A. pleased, pleasant B. pleasant, pleased C. pleasing, pleased D. pleasant, pleased
( )8. We will have a field trip this afternoon. The news makes everyone ________.
A. excited B.frighted C.happily D. luckily
( )9. --Sorry , I can't work out this problem.
--Try again, please. it’s only _______difficult.A. a bit B. a lot C. very D. much too
( )10.--Who was Harry Potter written ____ -- J.K.Rowling.A.with B.for C.by D.to
( )11.---Excuse me, Look at the sign NO PHOTOS! ---Sorry, I it.
A don’t see B didn’t see C haven’t seen D won’t see
( )12. -Where is Peter --He’s in his room.He a book.A reads B read C is reading Dwas reading
( )13. ---Why couldn’t you the correct spelling of the word ---Err…I hadn’t got a Chinese-English dictionary at hand. A look for B look down C look up D look at
（ ）14. I _________to tell you I _______my homework at home this morning.
A. forgot; forgot B. forget ; leave C. left; forgot D. forgot; left
（ ）15. Hurry up! The play for ten minutes.A began B has been on C has begun D had begun
二、单词的适当形式填空:
1.Kobe is ______________(know) as a great basketball player.
2.Now the computers __________________(use) widely in daily life.
3. I _______(write) to you if I have time. 5. I’d like a ______(month) article called Times.
4. My mother _________________(cook) in the kitchen when I came back.
6. Let’s hope our troubles ___________________(disappear) soon.
7.When he arrived, it _______ (rain) 8. __ anyone ____（watch）television yesterday evening
9. ---___ you ___ our school magazine --- Yes, it looks great! I ________ it just now. ( read )
10. The man _________ (call ) peter has ever been to the Grand Canyon.
11. If you ____(see) him tomorrow, please ask him if he______(go) to work on the farm with us.
12. A lot of water_____________(waste) every year. It’s a serious problem.
Part1: Module3-4重点短语集锦：
Module3:
与…对抗_____________2. 代表，象征__________ 3. 打败某人_________
赢得比赛_______ 4.一场艰苦的比赛_____________5. 看某人打几次比赛______________
6. 没有机会______________7. 让某人感到烦恼、困扰_____________
8. 对某人很生气___________________9. 被选派代表中国________________
10. 首先_______________ 最重要的是___________________ 毕竟________________
11.邀请某人参加比赛_____________ 被邀请参加比赛_________________
12. 中国在世界体坛成功的标志______________________13. 确保，保证_______________ 14. 一夜成名___________________15. 建立， 创立 __________
16. （1）和…比较_____________（2）把...比作________________
17.用这些信息来调整他的训练计划____________ 18. 赢得第一块奥运金牌_____________
19. 努力争取更多奖牌_______________20.鼓励某人做某事__________________________
Module4:
1.在去博物馆的参观中__________________2.在去博物馆的路上__________________
3..从现在开始____________________ 4.从书上获取信息____________________
5.普通杂志网络杂志_________________ 6. 意味着用纸____________________
7.好多年_____________8.被…取代,被…替换 _______________9.几个月_______________
10.用手工_________________ 11.我保证！_______________ 12.能帮我一个忙吗 ___________________13.关灯_______ 打开________ 调大 ________调低______
14. 浏览杂志 ___________ 15.学会在纸张上写字__________________
16. 由…制成 ( 看出原材料)_____________ (看不出原材料)__________________
17.一次__________ 18.因此,所以___________19.通过将墨涂在木板上_______________
20.在11世纪初期 ______________ 21.喜欢做..而不做____________
22. 以便;所以_______________ 23.网上阅读_____________________
Part2: Module3-4重点句子集锦
Module3
1. 你怎样认为？（2）
2. 他们对我们是如此的生气，以至于会尽最大的努力去获胜，仅仅来向我们表明我们是错误的。
3. 不要让别人的坏习惯影响到你。（get to）
4. 我认为我们这么出色，我想我们会被邀请参加奥运会。（so…that）
5.刘翔的教练将会建议他怎样成为一名优秀运动员，他的经纪人会建议他怎样成为一个明星
6.他发现生活中不仅仅是训练了吗？
7.他会被鼓励离开体育吗？
Module4
1.书可能被电脑取代吗？(be replaced by)
2.自从你妈妈生日聚会以来它就一直关着。（turn off）
3.我想在下周全校学生参观博物馆的时候拍些照片。
4.计算机已用于教室，报纸和杂志也可在网上阅读。
5.这些设备与书比起来有小又轻便以至携带很方便。
6.第一本印刷书籍是将墨涂在木板上，把纸铺在上面把字拓下来而制成的。
7.当印刷术在11世纪初有很大发展时，书能印刷得（较以前 ）更快，更便宜。
8.从那之后，知识和思想传播迅速，从某种程度上说可与20世纪因特网的引入相媲美。
9.但在那时，书依靠手工一次只能制作一本。
Part3: Module3-4重要知识点集锦
1. 感官系动词： look, feel, sound, taste, smell 后加形容词
感官动词：watch, notice, hear, find 后跟do和doing
2. so…that 与too…to 和enough to的转化
He is so young that he can’t join the army. = He is _______ young _______ ________ the army.
He is so old that he can join the army.= He is _______ ________ _______ ________ the army。
3. invite意为“邀请，招待” invite sb to do sth 类似用法的动词：encourage、advise
4. make sure of sth. 确定某事 make sure to do sth.确信，务必去做某事
5. make sure+that 从句
Be sure of /about…对…有把握，确信be not sure if/ whether…对…不能确定 be (not) sure + 从句
(1) 务必准时到达这里。 ______ _____ _____ _____ here on time.
(2) 保证拿到金牌。 ______ ______ that you will _______ the _______ _________
(3 )我确定他明天会来。 I _______ ________ he ________ _________tomorrow.
(4) 我不确定他明天是否会来。I’m ____ _____ _____ he _____ ________ tomorrow
6. be /get used for +n //be used to do “被应用” be/get used to + n/doing”习惯于
used to do sth..”过去常常做
(1) 它是被用来喝酒的.It _____ ________ _______ drinking. It ____ ______ _____ drink.
(2) 我过去晚饭后常常散步,但是现在我习惯于呆在家里看书.
I______ ____ take a walk after dinner, but now I ____ _____ _____ _____ at home and reading
6. (1)prefer to do… rather than do… (2) would rather do than do
例：我宁愿出去也不呆在家里.(2种句式).
(1) I prefer to go out rather than stay at home. (2) I would rather go out than stay at home.
7.在某人去某地的路上 on one’s way to … 做某事的方式、方法 the way to do/ of doing sth
我不知道做这个数学题的方法. ________________________________________________
【能力训练】一、单项选择
( ) 1. The 30th Olympic Games __________ in England in 2012.
A. is held B. will hold C. will be held D. was held
( ) 2. The story books________ by the writer in the 1960s.
A. are written B. were written C. wrote D. will be written
( ) 3. He often makes his sister _____, but this time he was made ______ by his sister.
A. laugh, to laugh B. laugh, laugh C. to laugh, to laugh D. laugh, laughing
( ) 4. Either you or he __the chance to give your speech at the meeting.A.have B. has C is D. are
( ) 5. The yellow sweater looks________ and it sells________.
A .well , good B . good, good C . good , well D. well, well
( ) 6. She always has the same excuse. Can you __________that she is honest？
A. be sure B. sure C. be sure of D. make sure to
()7.Oh,the milk_strange.Do you think it’s OK to drink A.wastasted B.is tastingCtastesDis tasted
( ) 8. --What does VOA ___ --Voice of America.A .look for B. ask forC. stand forD. wait for
( ) 9. ---Did your school _________the basketball match ---No, we were ___________.
A. win; defeated B. win; lost C. lose; won D. lose; defeated
( )10. I hope you don’t compare me ______my sister.A. to B. with C. for D. at
( )11. --Why are you so ________with Mary --She watched TV the whole night!
A. mad B. pleased C. worried D. sad
( )12. It’s nice _____you to __________ so much time showing me around your school.
A. of; take B. for; spend C. of; spend D. for; take
( )13. We use a big knife 　 the watermelon.A. cut B. cutting C. to cut D. to cutting
( )14. — This dress feels soft. Is it made __ silk — Yes, it is. A. in B. by C. forD. of
( )15.— Is everything OK -- No, we still need __ wood. A. littleB. a fewC. some D. man
( )16. This afternoon our team will play __ your team. A. again B. against C. to D. with
( )17.This is a _difficult problem that few students can work it out.A. so B.so a C. such D. such a
( )18. – Who won the match –Their team ___ our team and their team ___ the game.
A. defeated ; won B. lost ; defeated C. lost to ; won D. won ; defeated
( )19. – Where are the book -- Don’t worry. They ___ here in no time .
A. have sent B. will be sent C. are sending D. have been sent
()20A number of new houses _inWenchuan last yearA.builtBare builtC.were built D.will be built
二、用所给词的正确形式填空
1. A piano concert __(give) in the hall last Friday.2. The flowers __(water) by Daming already.
3. Stars can’t __(see) in the daytime.4. My father always encourages me ______(tell) the truth.
5. So far, many man-made satellites ______________(send) up into space.
6. She won’t go out in the evening until she ____________(allow)
7. The hard task can’t ________(finish) in two months.8. Knives _____(use) for cutting things.
9. Lingling ________________(ask) Betty to attend her birthday party yesterday.
10. Can the magazine ______(take) out of the library 11.Great changes ______ (take) place in the last ten years.12.We ________(not allow) to talk loudly in the reading room.
Part1: Module5--6重点短语集锦：
Module5: <短语与习惯用语> ：Unit1
1. 不得不回家 2. 等一下 3.必须完成一个报告上交作业
4. 独自离开 5. 注意你在说什么 6. 这是违反规定的
7. 不要喧哗 8. 怎么了？ 9.不许进入
10. 快点吧！ 11. 难怪它看上去很逼真
unit two 1.谈论所能看到的talk about what they can see and do
2.了解科学的一个好方法 3.弄懂，解决，计算
4.尝试，实验 5.做物理实验 8.首先，最重要的是
6.在一个袋子里装满下落的沙子 7.同动物比速度
Module6: unit one 1.收到读者的一封邮件
2.做关于最喜欢书的家庭作业 3.谨慎对待环境
4.数千所绿色学校 5.扔掉玻璃，纸张和金属
6.卖掉它可再循环使用 7.募集来的钱可以帮助贫困地区的学生
8.考虑污染和回收利用 9.帮助拯救地球
unit two 1.介意保护环境 2.当地产的东西
3.把它们扔掉之前 4.对我们的环境有害处
5.有用的事情 6.对…产生影响 7.时间尽可能长
8.花费能量把东西变成其它的东西take energy to change something into something else
9 查明什么能被循环使用 10. 参加再循环活动
Part2: Module5--6重点句子集锦
1.我想回家之前到楼上看看。
2.我和同学们要在星期五前完成一个报告作业。
3.他已经自己走了。
4.我刚才没有注意你在说什么。
5.在大部分博物馆里，没有人喧哗和奔跑，而且不允许你触摸展品。
6.人们谈论他们在那儿能看到什么，能做什么，有些机器还发出响声。
7.参观博物馆很有趣并且这也是了解科学的一个好方法，因为你能寻求答案，尝试想法。
8.例如，如果你想在一个袋子里装满下落的沙子，你就得将一种装有轮子的卡车移至合适的位置。
9. 那就意味着你可以顺便进去看一会，愿意停多久就多久—它每天都开放，从上午10点到下午6点。
10.你会不会买当地生产的东西而不买国外生产的？
11.虽然我们年龄小，但仍然可以做一些事情来保护环境。
12. 即使是最简单的日常小事也能对保护环境产生很大影响。这里有一些好主意供你参考。
13.当我们买东西的时候，如可能的话，要选择当地的产品，尽量不买很多国外产品。
14.我们应该保养物品，以便能用更长时间；修理后能使用的物品还应该修理，而不该把东西扔掉再买新的。
15. 虽然把一种东西变成另一种东西也回消耗能源，但是还是比扔掉或烧掉好。
Part3: Module5---6重要知识点集锦
1.“也” too，as well用于肯定句中，also 用于句中，either 用于否定句句尾。
另：either 还指（两者之中任意一个。作主语谓语动词用单数：Either of you is ok.
either…or…意为“或者…,或者…” 连接两个并列的句子成分，若连接两个并列的主语时，谓语动词与其最近的主语保持一致，即就近原则。neither 指两者之中一个也不，作主语谓语动词用单数：
Neither of you is right. neither…nor “既不..也不..”连接主语采用就近原则。思考：采用就近原则的还有哪些：___________________________________________.
Either you or he __________(be) right. Neither he nor I ___________(have) a pen for you now.
2.take,spend, pay ,cost 的区别：1）take表示“花费时间、精力energy”。
如：①The journey took us a long time because of the bad weather.
②It takes me half an hour to get to school from home by bike.
2）spend 句型：sb +spend time/money on sth sb +spend time/money (in) doing sth.
I spend half an hour getting to school from home by bike.
3)pay 句型：sb +pay +money +for sth / sb +pay + for + sth
I paid 5 dollars for the book. My parents pay for my education.
4)cost 句型：sth+cost sb +money . sth + cost + money .
The book cost me five dollars. The house cost a lot of money.
3. allow sb to do sth允许某人干某事，被动：某人被允许干某事__________________,
My parents don’t allow me to go out at night.变被动____________________________.
同类短语：1. advise sb. to do 2. encourage sb. to do 3. want sb. to do
4. tell sb. to do 5. ask sb. to do
4. as well as也，还有，而且 用来连接两个相同的成分，强调的重点在前面，意为“不但……而且……”通常不位于句首。 Living things need air and light as well as water.
当as well as 连接并列的主语时，谓语动词与前者保持一致,就远原则：
He as well as his parents _____________(like) playing football.
思考：He with his parents ____________(go) to the park every week.
5. fill… with…用…装满…(表动作) be filled with….充满；装满…
He fills the bottle with sand. The bottle _____ ______ ______sand.
【联系】be full of….充满,装满 (表状态) The bottle is full of water.
6. drop in顺便拜访，造访 drop in on + 某人（顺便拜访某人）拜访某地drop in at +地点。
They _____________ us as they were passing . They _____________ Beijing once a year.
思考：这两个空都能用visit 吗？
7. above all 首先，最重要的是（在句中作状语，可置于句首或句中）
first of all首先 after all毕竟；终究；到底 in all意为“总共；总计”。
8.句式： It’s +adj. + for sb. to do sth.
It’s +adj. + of sb. to do sth. 当形容词形容人时，用of sb.，常见词：kind /nice, clever/foolish
1).保护环境对我们说是重要的。 ________________________________
2).你帮助我太好了。 ______________________________________
9. It’s also at home that we save energy and recycle..
此句为强调句式，其结构为 It +is / was +被强调部分+that(物)/ who（指人）, 强调部分常译为…是… It was he who read English in the garden yesterday.
翻译： 昨天是在街上我碰到他父亲。
It _____ _____ ____ __________ that I met her father yesterday.
10. stop ….from doing // prevent…from doing // keep…from doing（from 可以省略）
如：We should stop the factories from polluting the air. 我们应阻止工厂污染空气。
We must stop the water from being polluted. 我们必须阻止水被污染。
11. instead of和instead 的用法
We should repair them if we can instead of throwing them away and buying new ones,
instead of : 用A 来代替B of 是介词，后跟名词或者动词ing 形式。
eg. I like swimming instead of playing basketball. I like apples instead of bananas.
I stayed at home instead of going out to play.
instead :相反的，通常放在句末。上句可以转换_____________________________________
12.When we do buy things,choose local products if possible ,and try not to buy too many things from abroad.
1) .do 用于肯定句表示强调。I do like eating fish.我确实喜欢吃鱼。
2).try to do sth 试图做某事，否定：try not to do sth. try doing sth 试着做某事。
3) too many things .too many 后加名词复数。too much 后加不可数名词。意思是太多 much too 后加副词或者形容词，意思是太….
13. make a difference to..对…产生影响。这里的 to 是介词 后加名词或者动词ing形式.类似这样的词组还有：look forward to , pay attention to ,do harm to ,be used to ,give one’s life to.
Your behaviour made a real difference to ______________(protect ) the environment .
(eat) __________too much does harm to _________(keep) healthy.
【能力提升】
一、单项选择。
( )1. There are many shops on ____ side of the street. We can buy everything we want.
A. both B. all C. either D. every
( )2. My father is getting older and cannot jump as ____ as he could before.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
( )3. The Kings have been in Beijing for three years, so they are familiar ____ the city.
A. to B. with C. for D. on
( )4. To invent a new kind of electric light, Thomas Edison did lots of ____.
A. research B. inventions C. experiments D. experiences
( )5. Can you show me the ___ of your school on the map — Sure. It’s here, next to the park.
A. position B. shape C. direction D. height
( )6. The maths problem was so difficult that none of us could ____.
A. try it out B. work it out C. look it up D. work on it
( )7. As students, __, we should study hard to be well prepared for the future.
A. at all B. in all C. after all D. above all
( )8. Playing computer games ___ the boy so much time that he doesn’t have enough time to study. A. spends B. uses C. pays D. takes
( )9. — I hope you can ____ and see us next time you come to Shanghai. — Sure, I will.
A. drop in B. check in C. give in D. arrive in
( )10. Bill was ____ tired after a whole day’s work. A. a kind ofB. kind ofC. bit of D. a bit of
( )11. There are lots of mistakes in my homework because I didn’t pay attention to ____ the teacher. A. listen B. listening to C. listening D. listen to
( )12. _____ you work, _____ knowledge you’ll get.
A. The harder, more B. The harder, the more C. Harder, the more D. Harder, more
( )13. Again and again the doctor ___the crying girl, but he couldn’t find out what was wrong with her.A. looked over B. looked after C. looked for D. looked out
()14. Volleyball is __ more popular than basketball in our school.A. muchB. little C.less D.more
( )15. The boy with____ unusual face said that he had____ useful machine at home.
A. a, a B. a, an C. an, a D. an, an
( )16. They________ home _________ the night of April 7, 2002.
A. got, in B. reached, on C. arrived, in D. arrived at, on
( )17. ______ care of the environment is very important.A. TakesB. TakeC. taken D. Taking
( )18. Watching too much TV can do harm ______ our eyes.A. for B. at C. of D. to
( )19. Tom goes to school on foot _____ by bike.A. instead of B. instead C. still of D. replace
( )20. _____ is necessary for us to get up early every day.A. That B. This C. It D. He
二．用所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. Everyone is looking forward to______(go) to Beijing in 2008.
2. We aren’t allowed _______(eat) anything in the school library.
3. Did you see the sign “No _______(swim).
4. Look at the sign! There’s no _____(listen) to the music here.
5.The Great Wall is the _____________ (long) wall in the world, I think.
6. I think you can work out the math problem ___________. (care)
7. You try ___________(not buy) too many things from abroad.
8. __________ something means using it again and again. (use)
9. People’s action makes a ___________ to the environment. ( different)
10.The situation is __________. We can’t do anything about it.(hope)
11. Some of the books _________________(make) into films.
Part1: Module7--8重点短语集锦：
Module7重点短语：
1.你在忙什么？What are you up to 2.你需要帮忙去找到它们吗？Would you like a hand to find them 3.在…中心in the center of.. 4.在我们回来的路上on our way back 5.在许多方面in many ways6.像一个三面环水的巨大的帆船be like a huge sailing boat with water on three sides 7.做关于澳大利亚的课题研究do a project on Australia 8.看…一眼 have a look at9.最大的说英语的国家the largest English-speaking country 10.对…感到惊讶be surprised at ..11.乘直升机飞过岩石上空take the helicopter tour over the rock 12. 与我们的相似be similar to ours13.在地里in the fields 在农场上on the farm 14. 脾气不好have a bad temper15.更像是一片沙漠be more like a desert 16.每个其他人everyone else 17.不断趴下keep lying down
Module8 重点短语:
1.参加摄影比赛enter the photo competition 2.因..向..表祝贺congratulations to sb on sth 3. 找出find out4.让某人一直做某事get sb doing 5.进行的怎么样？How do you get on 6.即使even though7.拍了几张…的好的照片take some great shots/photos of… 8.对..很满意be pleased with.9.多亏thanks to10.某物出故障了。There is something wrong with sth. 11.从事于work on 12.玩的开心have fun (doing)13.有机会赢be in with a chance to win 14. 离他家远far from his home 15.设法完成某事manage to do16.与..其他年相比compared with other years 17.收到了更多的照片receive many more photos
Part2: Module7--8重点句子集锦
Module7重点句子集锦
1.我正在寻找你在澳大利亚拍的照片。
2.我们正在做一个关于想去参观的国家的项目。
3.这是我在大堡礁看到的一条鲨鱼的照片。
4.在我们从Uluru 回来的路上，有跟着我们的车跳来跳去的袋鼠。
5.有一个我想赢的摄影比赛。
6. 澳大利亚人最喜欢的食品和饮料有葡萄、羊肉，火腿，尤其是澳大利亚南部产的酒.
7.他们喜欢所有的体育运动，但是他们最喜欢的运动是足球，板球和橄榄球。
8.第二天我们骑了一次骆驼。我骑的骆驼脾气不好，并且我很累.
9.它是一个能让每个人都跳舞的乐队。
10.我们对这次摄影比赛十分满意。
11.与往年相比，这次我们收到的照片多了很多。
12.何忠很好地展现了这支很棒的新乐队的动作和音乐，
..
13.祝贺我们的获奖者，并感谢所有参与者。
Part3: Module7---8重要知识点集锦
1.对…感到惊讶：be surprised at sth / that 从句; 对做某事感到惊讶：be surprised to do
使某人惊讶的是to one’s surprise 惊讶地in surprise 联系：surprised & surprising
练习：(1) 他很惊讶听到这个消息。He the news.
(2) 使我惊讶的是，我通过了这个考试。 ,I passed the exam.
(3) 这个男孩惊讶地望着我。 The boy looked me ______ _________.
(4) We were ____________ at the _______________ news.
2. be similar to“与…相似”, 相当于be like. 例：She is similar to her elder sister.
be similar in”在…方面相似” 例：They are similar in habits.他们在习惯上相似。
联系：be the same as…“与…相同”如：Tony’s age is the same as Lingling’s.
be different from 与..不同 be familiar with 对..熟悉 如：She is familiar with this area.
3. Everyone else thought it was very funny that my camel kept lying down…
1). else adj. （用在疑问代词、疑问副词、不定代词或不定副词等的后面）别的；其他的
你还想要说些什么吗？What else do you want to say
没有其他的事情发生。Nothing else happened.
2). keep doing 继续做某事。 keep后可接动名词或复合宾语，但不可接不定式。
keep +宾语+doing 例： I’m very sorry to keep you waiting for so long a time.
keep +adj. 保持…状态 例: keep healthy保持健康; I like keeping busy我喜欢保持忙碌
keep +宾语+介词短语 例: What food can keep me in good health
练习：他又继续走了5千米。He ________ __________ for_______ 5 kilometers.
别让你妈妈一直等着！_____________________________________！
4. way短语：on the way to..在去..的路上 by the way顺便问一下in a ...way以…方式
in many ways在许多方面 lose one’s way迷路 no way没门，绝不
做某事的方法the way to do/ of doing/ that 定语从句
5. expect V. 期望，预期①expect sth② expect to do sth ③expect sb to do ④expect +that 从句
我期待很快见到你。I expect ____________(see) you soon.
我期待你回信。I expect you _____________(write) back.
我希望他会准时来。I expect that he will come on time.
It is expected that the report will suggest some major reforms.
预计这个报告会提出一些重大的改革。
pick up ①捡起 ② (开车)接人My father will pick me up.③接收(信号、声音等)We were able to pick up the BBC World Service.我们能收到英国广播公司国际广播节目。
④(偶然)得到，学会She picked up Spanish when she was living in Mexico.
【巩固提升】
一、单项选择:
( )1.Two places of interest in Beijing are well-known to people from home and abroad. One is the Great Wall; ______ is the Summer Palace. A. the other B. anotherC. other D. others
( )2.___, they were very happy.A. Though they have no money B. Though they had got fine clothes C. Although they were very poor D. Although they were rich
( )3.The weather in Nanjing is ____ ours. A. same as B. same of C. similar to D. similar with
( )4.You’ll make progress if you keep ___ hard. A. work B. works C. worked D. working
( )5.We have two rooms _____, but I can’t decide ________.
A. to live; to choose which one B. lived; choose which one
C. to live in; which one to choose D. live; which one
( )6.Unlike Chinese, Americans ___ their meals with knives and forks.
A. used to taking B. are used to taking C. used to take D. are used to take
( )7.Chen Yibing won the gold medal for China so we take pride _ him. A. in B. on C. of D. for
( )8. The young man ___ is a friend of mine.A. who I had a word B. whom I had a word with
C. which I had a word with D. whom I had a word
( )9.---Do you mind opening the window --- ________. Go ahead please.
A. Certainly B. Yes, I do C. No, not at all D. All right
( )10.He ran faster than ___ runner in the race. A. the other B. any other C. the others D. any
( )11.—Can I ____ the book ---Yes, here you are, but you can only ___ it for 5 days.
A. lend; keep B. borrow; lend C. lend; borrow D. borrow; keep
( )12.--Have you found the information about the famous people ___ you can use for the report
--Not yet. I’ll search some on the Internet. A. who B. what C. whom D. which
( )13.I’ve never got any letter from her ____ she left home.
A. because of B. even though C. ever since D. and then
( )14.—Are you pleased ___ the food here ---Yes, I have got used ____ the life here.
A. by; for B. with; to C. at; with D. to; in
( )15.---Where is my watch I can’t find it. ---Don’t worry. It must be ____ in your room.
A. somewhere B. anywhere C. everywhere D. nowhere
二、用单词的适当形式填空:
1.You can’t let him help you. It’s ___________________(hope).
2.Do you care about the ____________________ (environment) problems
3.Do you know what the _________________(pollute) is
4.It’s _______________(waste) not to turn off the lights when you sleep.
5.This envelope is made of ___________________(recycle) paper.
6. More and more people begin to use _____________ (reuse) bags in order to save our world.
6.The clothes are the ____________(late) fashion, I think.
7.There is boy ____________(call) Tony _______________(live) in a small village.
8.The Australian girl has got used to ___________(eat) Chinese food.
9.It’s much cheaper and ____________(quick) to use email than send normal mail.
10. Tom finishes it __________________(quick) than John.
11. He went back to Beijing hurriedly(匆忙地) ___________(see) his uncle who was in hospital.
12. When Mike _________________(ask) why he was late, he gave the answer.
13. I _________________(try) to get a bottle of milk from the fridge when I lost the bottle.
14. Instead of ________________(punish) him, she explained the matter carefully.
15. I ____________________(not see) such a hamburger before.
Part1: Module9-10重点短语集锦：
Module9: 1.知道结局会怎样know what the ending will be 2.不是好笑的事，严肃问题It’s no laughing matter.3.寻找look for 4.在那边over there 5.与…谈话have a word with sb.
6.这是好消息。That’s good news. 7.我可以转交给他吗？Shall I give it to him
8.到那边跟他说话go over to speak to him 9.遇到大麻烦be in deep trouble
10.有快乐结局的卡通片a cartoon which has a happy ending 11.扮演角色play a part/role in
12.赢得了年轻人的心win the hearts of young people 13.讲了一个…故事tell the story of
14.飞进桃园fly into a peach garden 15.想吃多少桃子就吃多少eat as many peaches as he likes
16.搞得乱七八糟make a mess 17.成为常用语become a common expression
18.回到某地return to sp. 19.去丛林旅行travel to the jungles 20.自从ever since
21.被翻译成50多种语言be translated into more than 50 languages
22…的整套系列the whole series of… 23.开始被出版begin to be published
24.生活在自己的梦幻世界中live in his own private dream world
25.经历过生活的成年人adults who have experienced life
Module10: 1.有点累a bit tired 2.放弃give up 3.保持健康Keep/stay healthy/fit
4.为奥运会训练train for the Olympics 5.去上一个体校go to a sports school
6.需要大量运动need to take a lot of exercise 7.跑步go running
8.举重训练do weight training 9.照相机怎么了？What happened about the camera
10.遇到某人bump into sb 11.看上去像look like 12.使他很感兴趣interest him very much 13.对…不好be bad for 14.很难做…be difficult to do 15.表现欠佳behave badly
16.了解know about 17.有很多钱花费have very much money to spend 18.决定干…decide to do19.拒绝干…refuse to do 20.最后in the end 21.说服某人干某事persuade sb to do
22.在学校禁止垃圾食品ban junk food from schools 23.在…方面花钱spend money on sth
24.赞成某人的想法agree with sb 25.展示他参观学校的情境show his visits to the school
Part2: Module9-10重点句子集锦
1.我喜欢的卡通片里有许多笑话。
2.这不是让你可笑的那些卡通片之一。
3.我喜欢的角色是像超人或者蜘蛛侠一样的英雄。
4.我们需要一个像超人能拯救Tony的人。
5.我有一个上面写着他的名字的相机。
6.如果Tony告诉他爸爸他丢了那部他借的相机，他将….
7.但是可能它将会是有美好结局的卡通片。
8.它讲述的是一只猴子带领群猴对抗玉皇大帝统治的故事。
9.大闹天宫成为父母回到家或老板回到办公室后看到一片狼藉时的常用语。
10.杰米.奥利弗返回学校来了解孩子们在吃什么。
11.他发现那些孩子很难教。
12.最后，杰米说服他们，让他们品尝一下他做的饭菜，大家都很喜欢吃。
13.他告诉他们需要在学校禁止垃圾食品，培训厨师，教育孩子并在学校伙食方面投入更多资金.
14.Jamie 是一位厨师，他的观念正在改变着英国学校的饮食.
Part3: Module9-10重要知识点集锦
1. have a joke with sb. 和某人开玩笑→Don’t be so serious, he _________________________.
2).play jokes on sb. 拿某人开玩笑Mark Twain always likes to __________________.
2. Imagine用法: (1) imagine sth (2) imagine doing sth. (3) imagine +that从句
→我不能想象没有水的生活。___________________________________________________
3. word n. 1) 单词 例：A child asks his or her parent how to spell a word.
2) 语言 ①have a word with sb. 和某人说几句话 ②have words with sb. 同某人争吵→
我能和你聊一下吗？__________________ _→昨晚我同女朋友争吵了。____________________
③in a (或one) word 一句话，总而言之 ④in other words 换句话说，
5. 1）be in (deep) trouble 处于困境中 2）get into trouble 陷入困境
3）have trouble doing sth .做某事有麻烦 4) trouble sb to do sth 麻烦某人做某事
6. win the heart of... “赢得……的心”,What he did has _______________ (赢得了朋友们的心).
7. ever since 是since 的强调形式，“自从...以来”常与现在完成时连用。ever放在since之前用来表达说话人强调主句或状态持续之长的口气。如果要表达主句的动作
或状态的持续时间之短，就不能使用ever。比较：
8. (1)50th birthday fiftieth为 ______ (序/基）数词，译为________________________,
(2) have/get sth done “让/叫/使/请别人做某事”。sth 与done表示的动作之间是被动关系。
联系：have sb do sth / get sb to do“让/叫/使某人做某事”sb与do表示的动作之间是主动关系。
拓展: have/get sb doing“叫 / 让 / 使某人做某事”。sb与doing表示的动作之间为主动关系，
且动作正在进行或一直在进行。
9. give up 意为___________, 相当于stop doing sth ; (1) give up sth; (2) give up doing sth
stay fit 意为：_______________, stay 在此为系动词，一般接______词作表语，表示保持某种状态。 保持健康：stay/keep fit/healthy
10. interest 动词，意为______________. 使某人感兴趣_________________
interested. adj.感兴趣的. 对…感兴趣_________________ interesting. adj.令人感兴趣的
interest 还可做名词，表示“兴趣；感兴趣的事”，have/ show (an) interest in…对… 感兴趣
This ________(interest) book ________(interest)him a lot, so he read it all day.
11. prefer v.(preferred, preferred) 更喜欢，更喜爱. 主要用法有以下四种：
(1) prefer to do sth 更喜欢做某事 (2) prefer A to B: 相比起B来，更喜欢A.
(3) prefer doing sth to doing sth 比起干…来更喜欢干…
(4) prefer to do rather than do= would rather do than do 宁愿做…而不愿做…
12. (1) ① in the end 表示“最后、最终”的意思，等于__________或_____________.
② at the end of…是“在…的末尾/尽头”，后必须要加名词.
(2) persuade : v. 说服、劝说，主要的用法有：
①说服某人做某事：persuade sb to do sth == persuade sb into doing sth
②说服某人不做某事：persuade sb not to do sth== persuade sb out of doing sth
③ persuade (sb) + that从句
13. ⑴need: ①需要做某事 need to do sth. 例：为了取得好成绩，你需要努力学习.
②拓展：need doing… 表被动. 例：你的头发需要洗了. Your hair needs washing.
⑵ ban v. (banned, banned) 禁止 ①ban sth ② ban doing sth ③ ban sb/sth from doing sth
14. agree: v. 同意，主要用法有：⑴ agree with sb. 同意某人的意见.
⑵ agree to do sth. 同意做某事. 联想：拒绝/决定做某事 refuse/decide ___________ sth.
拓展：agree to：主要用来表示一方提出一项建议、安排、计划等，另一方同意协作
　 agree on：主要指双方通过协商而取得一致意见或达成协议：
【能力训练】
( ) 1. -----How is the weather tomorrow -----I don’t know if it tomorrow.
----Well, if it , I won’t go for a picnic with you.
A. will rain; will rain B. will rain ;rains C. rains ;will rain D. rains; rains
( ) 2. I want to have a with you about the problem. A. fun B. word C. play D. rest
( ) 3. If you see the cartoon film, it will make you .A. laughB.to laugh C.laughing D. laughed
()4 Miss Green is the only person_can help you with your English.A.sheB.whomC.whichD. who
( ) 5. This is Tony’s camera. Could you
A. give it to him B. give him it C. give it him D. give for him
( ) 6. I’ve read sports news about the F1 race today.
A. two B. two pieces C. two piece D. two pieces of
( ) 7. --Can you translate this sentence Chinese for me I’ m poor in English.
--sure A. to B. into C. with D. for
( ) 8. The heroes of the cartoons are , on bags, office desks and so on.
A. anywhere B. nowhere C. somewhere D. everywhere
( ) 9. -----Here is a present for you, Jack. --- Wow! It looks nice.
A. truly B. nearly C. really D. hardly
( ) 10. Let the children go away. They’re making too much ______.
A. noise B. voice C. words D. sounds
( ) 11. It is impossible ______ her ______ the work in half an hour.
A. for; finish B. of; finish C. for; to finish D. of; to finish
( ) 12. The man made such a____speech that all the audience at the meeting felt____.A. boring; boring B. boring; bored C. bored; boring D. bored; bored
( )13. My uncle is one of the best　 in that restaurant. A. cook B. cooks C. cooker D. cookers
( ) 14. — let’s make a plan first. Do you agree 　　　me —Of course.
A. to B. with C. about D. on
( )15. —　　 exercise do you take every day —I run 2 kilometres and swim 3.2 kilometres.
A. How many B. How much C. How long D. How often
( )16. What will happen　 you after you exercise for the first time A.with B. about C. to D. on
( )17. Mum, take it easy. You know we are 　　　 to look after ourselves.
A. enough old B. old enough C. young enough D. enough young
( )18. After the accident, Tom was 　　　 from driving.
A. freed B. asked C. wanted D. banned
( )19. — It’s 　　　 cold. Would you mind my closing all the windows —Not at all.
A. a kind B. a few C. a lot D. a bit
( )20. Tomatoes 　　　 me most. I enjoy eating them.
A. interest B. to interest C. interests D. interesting
Part1: Module11-12重点短语集锦：
Module11:
1.太多的人们too many people 2.太多的车辆，噪音，污染too much traffic, noise and pollution3.足够的空间enough space4.我们所处的位置正好适合谈论这个话题be in the right place to talk about it5.日益增长的人口an increasing population
6.很多国家的环境问题an environmental problem in many countries
7.伴随着人口，烟雾以及交通问题along with the crowds, smoke and the transport problems
8.看一些事实look up some facts 9.和校长的见面an appointment with the head teacher
10.进行，举行，发生come up 11.幸亏，由于thanks to 12.真不敢相信I don’t believe it .
13.世界人口的百分之二十20 percent of the world’s population
14.一个位于镇中心的非常静谧的村庄a quiet country village in the center of the country
15.在那时at that time 16.在城镇的边缘on the edge of town
17.远处有一些田野和山丘with some field and the hills in the distance
18.离着大城市很近close to a big city 19.开始到达Arnwick begin to arrive in Arnwick
20.为了找到工作，过上好的生活to find jobs and have a better life
21.需要居住的地方…_ Need somewhere to live
22.决定在城市边缘建造公寓decide to build flats around the edge of the city
23.有一百多万人口have over a million people 24.关闭close down
25.增加了交通和污染add to the traffic and pollution 26.更少的私家车fewer private cars
27.管理一个大城市run a big city 28.阻止人们犯罪protect people from crime
29.更多的税来支付每样东西more taxes to pay for everything 30.事实上in fact
31.和…. 有着一样的问题 the same problems as…
Module12:
1.有点儿紧a bit tight=kind of…=a little… 3.热烈欢迎…. give a warm welcome to …
2.欢迎到我们学校的颁奖典礼welcome to our school prize-giving 4.作为一名学生as a pupil
5.很高兴颁奖be pleased to present the prizes 6.进行一次英语课程do an English course
7.每人100美元100 dollars each 8.在机场接你meet you at the airport
9.看Crazy Feet录制它的最新CD watch Crazy Feet record its latest CD
10.没有可穿的东西haven’t got anything to wear 11.别傻了Don’t be silly.
12.提供暑期英语课程provide summer English courses 13.与此同时at the same time
14.持续四周last for four weeks 15.在…的开始at the beginning of 16.多达15 up to 15
17.取得进步make progress 18.不仅是学习英语as well as learning English19.体验生活experience life 20.参加（活动take part in .. 21.和...建立友谊create friendship with..
22选择去…旅游choose to take trips to.. 23.旅游胜地place(s) of interest
24.填写我们的申请表fill in the application form 25.为..付钱pay for
Part2: Module11-12重点句子集锦
1.管理一个大城市是很困难的。
2.现在越来越多的家庭都拥有私家车。
3.这家商店三年前就倒闭了。
4.需要有更多的学校和医院。
5.那只会增加我们的困难。
6.经营一个城市阻止犯罪时很困难的。
7.这不是她的错。
8.你的城镇有着和Arnwick 同样的问题么？
Part3: Module11-12重要知识点集锦
1. too many+可数n 太多 too much+不可数n :太多 much too+形容词
2. percent of... “百分之……的……”。
注：百分数的动词单复数主要由其所代替的名词决定。如果代替的是不可数名词或可数名词单数，谓语动词用单数；如果代替的是复数名词，则谓语动词也用复数形式。
3. population 集合名词，意思是“人口；人数”，注意以下几种用法：
（1）population作主语时，谓语动词多用_____形式。
（2）表示拥有多少人口时，可用 have a population of...结构。（3）对人口进行提问，应用_____________（4）人口的多少用____, ____或_____修饰。
4.总结“花费”的单词 1) sb spend …on sth / sb spend… (in )doing…
2) sb pay …for… 3) sth cost sb… 4) It takes sb…to do…
5. 阻止某人做某事：protect…from + doing sth
6. with 用法总结 1）.与...一起,偕同,和... 2)带着...;有...的 T 3)以(手段、材料),用(工具) 4)伴随，随着 5)在...身边,在...身上
7. room有两层含义，一为“房间”，是可数名词；二表示人或物体所占的“空间或场所”、处事的“余地”等意思，是不可数名词，可用little，much，no等词修饰。
make room for给……让出地方； take up room占地方
8. 1) add用作及物动词，表示"加；增加",常与介词to连用,即" add ... to ...","把......加到......中去2) add to（add 作不及物动词用）表示"增加；增添",其中to是介词,后接名词或代词
3) add up to 加起来等于，合计达，总计达，总共；
9. You are flying .. to Los Angeles! 有些表示位移的动词可以用进行时表将来。 这些词有：
fly, come, go, leave, start等。
10. up to 15...“（数目）多达…，一直到…” make progress（with）“（在…方面）取得进步” 注: progress是不可数名词。,可用much, (a) little, great, no等词修饰。
11. provide sb with sth=provide sth for sb 为某人提供某物
拓展：offer sb sth=offer sth to sb 提供给某人某物
一、单项选择
( ) 1. It’s a good habit ___ breakfast every day. A. had B. have C. has D. to have
( ) 2. It was ___ hard work to teach the children about healthy food. A. a B./ C. an D. the
( ) 3. I have got a friend ___ sister is a doctor. A. who B. who’s C. which D. whose
( ) 4. The English teacher said angrily that children behaved very _____ in the class.
A. well B. good C. bad D. badly
( ) 5. --Is your stomach ache getting __ --- No, it’s worse. A. better B. bad C. less D. well
( ) 6. Which boy is ___, Jim or Mike A. taller B. the most tall C. the tallest D. the taller
( ) 7. Does your sister walk_____ up with you
A. fast enough to catch B. enough fast catching C. enough fast catch D. fast enough catching
( ) 8._____ friends you have, _____ you will be.
A. More, happier B. The more, The happier C. More, more happy D. The more, the more happy
( ) 9. I hope our life will be _____ in the future.
A. good and good B. well and well C. better and better D. good and well
( ) 10. Can you tell me _____about your friends
A. something different B. different anything C. different something D. nothing different
( ) 11.The people _ searching the thief in the forest at the moment.A. is B. are C.was D. were
( ) 12.Several ______ volunteers in the city are getting ready for the 2008 Beijing Olympics.
A. hundreds B. hundreds of C. hundred D. hundred of
( ) 13.-- _____ the population of China ---______ over 1,300,000,000.
A. How many are, They are B. How’s, It’s C. What’s, It’s D.How much is , It’s
( ) 14.The population of India is larger than __of America. A. that B. ones C. those D. it
( ) 15.How much the jeans over there A. is B. are C. was D.am
( ) 16. ---Which is river in china ---The Changjiang River.
A. longer B. the longest C. longest D. the longer
( ) 17.The heavy snow stopped us from _____ to meet them at the station.
A. go B. to go C. going D. went
( ) 18.Uncle Li came in and he looked . A. worry B. worring C. worried D. worries
( ) 19.Ten hours a very long time. A. is B. are C. were D. was
( ) 20.Some of the money given to him. A. is B. are C. was D.were
二、完形填空
Once upon a time there lived a handsome prince—Prince Jack. One day , his mum, the Queen Bella, said “we must find you a 21 ” so day 22 day, the Queen asked all the princesses to _23_ her son.“I don’t want to marry any of them!”said Jake.“I want to marry a real princess!”Later, the Prince and the Queen thought of a(n) 24 .They made a 25 . Jake said,“ 26 a princess can’t feel this one little pea(豌豆) on it, she isn’t a real princess.”One stormy night, there was a knock at the door. A young lady stood there, wet and 27 . The Queen said, “Come in and rest!”“Did you sleep well ”asked Jake the next day.“No!”she said.“And my name is Fizz by the way.”“Oh dear, what was wrong ”asked the Prince.“There was a terrible bump(凸起) in the bed,”replied Fizz.“I 28 sleep all night long.”“Oh, this princess is not fake(假的)!”cried Jake.“Oh please, Princess Fizz, will you 29 me ”So, after a feast of joy and great laughter, they lived 30 ever after!.
( ) 21. A. girlfriend B. person C. wife D. servant
( ) 22. A. and B. or C. before D. after
( ) 23. A. meet B. see C. notice D. look at
( ) 24. A. try B. idea C. opinion D. advice
( ) 25. A. door B. house C. chair D. bed
( ) 26. A. Because B. If C. Unless D. As
( ) 27. A. sad B. tired C. excited D. angry
( ) 28. A. have to B. might C. couldn’t D. mustn’t
( ) 29. A. hate B. leave C. marry to D. marry
( ) 30. A. happily B. sadly C. quietly D. noisily
三、任务型阅读
Jane Austen(简.奥斯汀) is one of Britain’s female writers. She was the seventh of eight children and never lived apart from her family. To entertain(娱乐) themselves, the children wrote and performed plays. ①Even as a little girl, Jane was encouraged to write by her parents.
As a young woman, Jane enjoyed dancing, and she went to many parties that were held in the great houses of the neighbourhood. She loved the country(乡村) and enjoyed long country walks.
In her early twenties she began to write her most famous works—Sense and Sensebility(理智与情感), Pride and Prejudice(傲慢与偏见), Northanger Abbey(诺桑觉寺). ②Yet these books were not published until many years later. She died in her sister’s arms on 18 July, 1817. She was 42 years old. None of the books that were published in Janes Austen’s lifetime had her name on them—They were described as being written “ By a lady.”
As a result, Jane Austen was not very famous in her lifetime, and her books only became popular after death. Her books are now some of the most read and studied books in the world.
When and where was Jane Austen born
将句子①改为主动语态________________________________________________
What did Jane enjoy as a young woman ____________________________________
将划线句子②翻译为汉语______________________________________________
Why was Jane Austen not very famous in her lifetime ________________________
PAGE
9初三一轮复习八下Module7-8
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module7-8重点短语集锦：
Module7重点短语:
1、欢迎到北海公园welcome to Beihai Park 2.几乎不能听到街上的车辆 hardly hear the traffic in the streets 3.甚至能听到鸟在唱歌 can even hear the birds singing 4. 想保护全国公园的环境want to protect the environment of parks all over China 5. 沿湖边走一走walk around the lake 6. 爬上白塔climb up to Baita 7.音乐会你打算怎么办？What are you going to do about the concert 8. 从上面能看到公园的全貌see the whole park from up there 9.我的手和胳膊疼 my hand and arm hurt 10.与乐队去其他人一起表演play with the rest of the orchestra 11. 告诉她真相tell her the truth 12. 练习的太多practice too much 13. 告诉她不要担心tell her not to worry 14. 告诉我照顾好自己tell me to look after myself
15. 叫我休息，尽快好起来tell me to rest and get better soon 16. 去国家公园放松放松go to one of our national parks to relax 17.度假spend some time off 18.以怪石著称be famous for the strange shape of rocks 19.看上去像look like 20.很少有人few people 21.在一个小湖边露营camp by a small lake 22.在深夜during the night 23.好象as if=as though 24.问他们是什么声响asked them what the noise was
25.出了帐篷看看怎么回事left /leave the tent to find out what it was/is 26.告诉我们悄悄的出去tell us to come out quietly 27.指着森林point into the forest 28.跳到树上jump up into the trees 29.通过云端through the clouds 30.从树上揪下一片叶子pull a leaf off a plant 31.摘树叶是不对的. It is wrong to pull leaves 32.中国的第二大淡水湖the second largest fresh water lake in China
Module8重点短语：
1、五.一节计划 plans for May Day holiday 2、和他们呆在一起 stay with them 3、在青岛度过几天 spend a few days in Qingdao 4、呆在那儿直到5月5号stay there until 5th May 5、在五.一节 on May Day / on Labour Day / on 1st May 6、离五.一最近的星期一 the closest Monday to 1st May 7、休一天的假 have one day off 8、在一个不同的日期 on a different date 9、在九月份的第一个星期一 on the first Monday in September 10、做特别的事情 do something special 11、去野营 go camping
12、在好的地方野餐 have a picnic somewhere nice 13、假期的结束 the end of the vacation 14、开始变得更加凉爽 start to get cooler 15、回到学校去 go back to school 16、五一节一结束就as soon as the May Day holiday is over 17、在暑假开始以前 before the start of the summer holidays
18、玩得开心点 enjoy ourselves =have a good time=have fun 19.全世界的人们 people all over the world 20.庆祝新年 celebrate the new year 21.依靠;根据 depend on 22.开始干某事 start doing
23.时代广场Times Square 24.等待wait for 25.听音乐、唱老歌、玩儿listen to music, sing traditional songs and have fun 26.临近12点 just before 12 o’clock 27.倒数 count down
28.一…就 as soon as 29.唱起一首名为《友谊地久天长》的古老歌曲 sing a song called Auld Lang Syne
30.相聚 get together 31.到户外走一走 go out for a walk 32.下决心 make resolutions
33.写下来列个单子 write down a list of things 34.帮..克服困难help out
35.许诺要实现这些决心 promise to follow their resolutions 36.向..告别say goodbye to
Part2: Module7-8基础知识集锦：
Module7
1. I can hardly hear the traffic in the streets and no one is shouting.
hardly表示否定，意为：几乎不I haven’t seen him for years but he has hardly changed at all.
表示否定的副词还有：seldom , rarely ,never（ 注，含有这些副词的句子表示否定）
2. It’s so quiet. 这里如此安静。 She is such a pretty girl. 她是如此漂亮的女孩。
such是形容词修饰名词或名词词组，such +（a/an) +（形容词）+名词。
so是副词，只能修饰形容词或副词。so +形容词或者副词。so 还可以与表示数量的形容词many, few, much, little连用后加名词。so many books, so much water, so few people, so little money
拓展： so…that 和such…that ,引起结果状语从句
He works so hard that he can get good grade. 他学习如此努力，他肯定能得到好的成绩。
He is such a clever boy that he can work out the difficult problem.
他是如此聪明的一个男孩，他能解决这个难题。
3.We are spending some time off in Hunan Province.
(1) spend 此处为“度过”， 例:Will you spend a long time next time
(2) spend “花费” 总结take, cost, pay，spend的用法区别
4. I heard a loud noise, as if someone was singing. 我听到好大的噪音，好像有人在唱歌. as if 意为“好像，似乎”，后加句子。如：You look as if you’ve had a good time.
5. hope与wish：两个都可以表示“希望”，动词用法如下：
(1). hope的用法：①.hope for+名词； ②. hope to do sth； ③. hope +that 从句
Ex：I hope that I can see you one day.(同义句转化) I hope to see you one day.
(2).wish的用法：①.wish to do sth； ②. wish sb to do sth； ③.wish + that从句
【拓展】： 课文原句Wish you were here! 译为：如果你们在这就好了。此句只是表示一种主观的愿望，与事实不符，所以从句用过去时态表示虚拟。例：我希望我可以飞。 I wish I could fly.
6. We are going to the second largest fresh water lake in China. “the +序数词+形容词或副词最高级+单数名词”，表示“第几最…” Ex: Wang Lin is the second tallest boy in our class.
Module8
1. depend on 依靠，依赖，取决于 independent adj. 独立的
It can depend on the seasons, the moon or the sun.
2. count down 倒数，倒计时 Just before 12 o’clock,everyone counts down from 10: 10,9,8…
3. get together聚会 get常见短语：get back归还get to到达get there 到那里 get home 到家
get along/on well with和……相处融洽 get on/ off 上/下车
4. help out帮助…克服困难 help sb out 帮助某人解决难题 I will help more at home.
1）help的具体用法：help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事 help sb. with sth.在某方面帮助某人 help oneself to...随便吃(喝/用)些……
2）名词help的相关短语： ask for help求助 without one’s help没有某人的帮助
with one’s help = with the help of sb在某人的帮助下
5. promise v. 保证;发誓
1）promise to do sth. 承诺做某事 promise not to do sth.承诺不做某事 promise（sb.）that...允诺……
2）promise作名词时的相关短语： break a promise违背诺言 give a promise给予保证
keep a promise遵守诺言 make a promise to sb.(对某人)作出允诺
6. 时间状语从句：通常由以下连词连接：when ,while, after, before, as soon as ,since, till /until
1). 由when, while引导的时间状语从句；它们都表示当…时候，但有不同：when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词，又可以是瞬间动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”：
While引导的从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的，
2). 由before和after引导的时间状语从句。before ,after可以作介词，后加动词ing或者名词，代词
3). 由till或until引导的时间状语从句。till和until做连词时一般情况下两者可以互换，直到…才：如果主句中的谓语动词是瞬时动词时，必须用否定形式；如果主句中的谓语动词是延续性动词 ( http: / / baike. / view / 238104.htm" \t "_blank )时，用肯定形式。例如：I didn't go to bed until（till）my father came back.直到我父亲回来我才上床睡觉。 Please wait until I arrive.在我到达之前请等我。 I worked until he came back.我工作到他回来为止。
4). 由since引导的时间状语从句。一般情况下，从句谓语动词用一般过去时，而主句的谓语动词用现在完成时。但在It is ＋时间＋since从句的句型中，主句多用一般现在时。
5). 由as soon as表示“一……就”。例如： I will go there as soon as I finish my breakfast.。
注意：时间状语从句和if 条件句有共同的特征：主句如果表示一般将来时态，从句需要用一般现在时态来表示.初三一轮复习八上Module11-12
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module11-12重点短语集锦：
Module11重点短语:
1.不要忘记玲玲的生日. Don’t forget Lingling’s birthday 2.去给她买礼物go shopping for her present
3.春节打算干什么 What are you doing for Spring Festival 4.你一定在开玩笑吧! You must be joking!
5.听起来太棒了! Sounds great! 6.天气将会怎么样 What will the weather be like
7.天气有可能炎热和晴朗It’ll probably be hot and sunny=It may be hot and sunny
8.我们要去香港. We are off to Hong Kong,
9.什么时候去美国最好When’s the best time to visit the USA
10.天气既不很热也不很冷的时候. When it’s not too cold or too hot
11.赶快走吧! Come on, better get going! 12.可以保暖的东西Something warm to wear!
13.我们还没有确定We are not sure 14.四处走走travel around
15.在冬天下雪很多There is a lot of snow in winter. 16.变的更凉爽get cooler
17.给…拍照take photos of 18.四千公里远4000 kilometres away 19.在西北in the northwest
20.全年all year 21.全天all day 22.时不时的from time to time
23.和…相比较compared to /with 24.任何时候都可以any time you like
Module12重点短语：
1.别聊了。Stop chatting. 2.她来了。Here she comes. 3.快点呀！Get a move on. 4. 等等。Hang on.
5.接受礼物accept a present 6.用双手use both hands 7.错不了。That’s right.
8.用红纸包红包wrap hongbao in red paper 9.在..的第一天on the first day of
10.扫除do some cleaning 11.这不吉利。It’s bad luck. 12.不管怎样，放松Anyway, relax.
13.问候人们 greet people 14.举行一个茶话会 have a tea party 15.发出噪音make noise
16.给旅行者的建议 advice for visitors 17.很多不同的风俗习惯so many different traditions
18.例如 for example 19.和某人握手 shake hands with sb. 20.第一次 for the first time 21.喝茶 have tea/drink tea 22.一顿简单的加餐 a light meal 23.四点钟左右 at around 4 pm
24.倒茶 pour the tea 25.你一定不要大声喧哗. You mustn’t talk too loudly.
26.与…不同 be different from
27.在街上你不常听到人们大声喊叫。You don’t often hear people shouting in the street.
28.准时到达教堂 arrive at the church on time
29.把她的花扔向身后 throw her flowers over her shoulder 30.结婚 be/get married
Part2: Module11-12基础知识集锦：
Module11
1. Hey, you lot! 嗨,你们这群人。lot 在文中是表示一群人的意思。
2. be off to 出发去, 动身去 明天我们动身去上海。We are off to Shanghai tomorrow.
3. Come on, better get going. Better get going 相当于had better go 最好现在走/去
4.情态动词may ,might表示可能 eg. It may be warm in February.
5.天气将会怎么样 ---What will the weather be like --- It will be ……
天气怎么样？ What’s the weather like today =How is the weather
6. possible/possibly/probably常用于下列句型：
It is possible that.... It is possible to do sth. 主语+ will probably/possibly + do sth.
例如：It's possible that he will not accept the invitation.他有可能不接受邀请。
7.动词不定式做主语，多采用句型：It be …to do sth.其中，it 为形式主语,动词不定式为真正主语.做表语的可以是形容词 也可以是名词.当然也可以直接用动词不定式作主语.
带上你的相机是个好主意 。It is a good idea to bring your camera.
Module12
1. Here she comes. 她来了。
在英语中，陈述句的语序通常是主语在前，谓语在后。反之，如果将谓语放在主语前面，就是倒装句。以here，there等副词开头的句子，当其主语是名词时，该句通常使用倒装结构。当其主语是代词时，一般不倒装。
例：Look! Here are my father and mother.看，我父母过来了。 There he goes.他走了。
2.on the first day of … 在……的第一天 本短语是一个介词短语，on 用于表示在具体的某一天。
翻译：我在新年的第一天出生的。I was born on the first day of the new year.
3.receive 与accept的区别。由例句可得出receive表示客观收到, 而accept表示主观接受.
例：I received his invitation but did not accept it. 我收到了他的请帖，但并没有接受他的邀请。
4.听见某人正在做某事：hear sb. doing sth. 听见某人做了某事hear sb. do sth.
类似用法的单词我们还学过：find/see/watch/notice（感官动词）
5. The girl who catches them will be next to get married. 接住花的女孩将是下一个要结婚的人。
“who catches them”为定语从句，修饰the girl. catch 词性为动词，意为“抓住，接住”。
catch 构成的短语：catch a cold 感冒 catch a fever 发烧 catch fire 着火
6. not …but… 意思是“不是…而是…”。如：The book is not Tony’s but Betty’s.
7.情态动词must的用法
⑴must表示主观义务，意思是“必须” eg：I must finish my homework today.
由must引起的疑问句，肯定回答要用must, 否定回答要用needn’t “不必”。
--Must I finish the work before nine --Yes, you must. No, you needn’t.
⑵mustn’t表示禁止，意思是“不可以，不要”
由may引起的疑问句，肯定回答要用may, 否定回答要用mustn’t 。
⑶must表示肯定的猜测，意思是“一定”,否定猜测必须用can’t. You must be a doctor!
8.情态动词can的用法， 后加动词原形
⑴can表示允许，意思是“可以” You can go there at 9:00.
⑵can表示能力，意思是“会，能够” He can drive a car.
(3)否定形式can’t A: can’t 表示不允许、不可以. Eg: You can’t do that.
B: can’t表示不能够 Eg.He can’t speak English well.
C: can’t表示推测时，意为“不可能”. Eg.He can’t be at home.初三一轮复习八上Module9-10
组别___________姓名______________等级_____________
使用说明：20分钟自主复习学案，标注出有疑问的地方，准备上课讨论质疑。
【基础知识梳理】
Part1: Module9-10重点短语集锦：
Module9重点短语:
1. 对做某事感到激动be excited to do sth / be excited about doing sth 2. 最后；终于at last/finally/ in the end 3. 在危险中 in danger 4. 做…是不对的 It just isn’t right to do sth 5. 无处可住have no place to live in 6. 拿走；占据 take away 7. 需要做某事need to do sth 8. 决定做某事decide to do sth 9. 到底；究竟on earth 10. 发现；找出；查明 find out 11.它太让我气愤了It makes me mad！12.真是太糟糕了。It’s really awful！ 13.了解learn about 14. 想到think about/of 15. 阻止捕杀是很难的 It’s hard to stop the killing 16. 使它变脏make it dirty 17.帮助动物生活在安宁的环境里help the animals live in peace
Module10重点短语：
1.最大的爱好 main interest 2.提出带我们去那里offer to take us there 3.想要做某事 want to do sth
4.同意做某事 agree to do sth 5. 尽力做某事 try to do sth 6.几乎不可能的almost impossible
7.计划做某事plan to do sth 8. 决定（不）做某事decide（not）to do sth 9.玩的开心have a good time
10.希望做某事hope to do sth 11. 不知道 no idea 12. 因为/作为…出名 be famous for/as
13.向观众展现了中国人的生活show the audience life in China 14. 发生 take place
15.关于王利发和他的顾客们的故事the story of Wang Lifa and his ustomers 16.将…看成是 see…as…17. 向…告别say goodbye to …18. 送他去… send him to… 19. 学会教书 learn to teach
20. 教英国人学中文 teach Chinese to the English 21. 被称作/被誉为 be named 22. 20世纪中国最伟大作家之一 one of the greatest Chinese writers of the 20th century 23. 端茶给顾客bring tea to the customers 24. 欢迎 give a welcome to… 25. 每一位国内外的朋友 everyone from China and from all over the world
Part2: Module9-10语法集锦
动词不定式的语法功能：动词不定式常可以用做：主语、宾语、表语、宾语补足语、状语、定语
1）动词不定式作主语常采用it做形式主语，不定式后置的方式：It +be +形容词/名词+ (for sb) +to do sth 例：1. 学好英语是困难的. It is hard/difficult to learn English well
2）不定式在及物动词后作宾语。常见的动词+to do动词有：want、hope、wish、like、begin、try、need、 forget、learn、agree、help 例：Mary decides to work harder than Amy
3）补语：常见的动词有invite、ask、tell、allow、encourage sb. to do sth.
用不带to 的不定式作宾语补足语的动词主要有感官动词see、watch、hear、notice和使役性动词have、let、make 例：My parents asked me not to speak with strangers.
His words made me feel bad. I want to work harder.
4）不定式作表语主要是跟在系动词be, seem之后。 例: Our task is to study hard at school.
5) 状语：修饰句子和动词的不定式为状语，可以表示目的、原因和结果等.
例：Use both hands to catch the ball. He is excited to see me.
He hurried to the station only to find the train had left.
【拓展】：当用作程度、结果状语时常与副词enough或too连用。 He is old enough to go to school.
too…to…太…而不能…He is too young to go to school. 他太年轻不能去上学
6）定语：不定式修饰名词或代词起形容词的作用，放在被修饰对象的后面。而单个的形容词作定语则要放在修饰对象的前面。例：There is a lot of work to do today. We’d better finish it quickly.
The pandas will have enough places to live in.
Part3：Module9-10重点单词用法：
1. danger n. 危险 dangerous adj. 危险的 dangerously adv. 危险地；不安全
safety n. 安全；保险 safe adj.安全的 safely adv. 安全地
2. protect vt. 保护，防卫 protection n. 保护；防卫 protect…from
橘子汁
橙皮；橘皮皱
[化]甲基橙；甲橙
甜橙
脐橙
橙黄
橘子；蜜橘
橙黄；桔黄
香橙花；橙花鸡尾酒
橙油；橙皮油
[医]吖啶橙，四甲吖啶
酸橙，臭橙；苦酸橙
橙红色
二甲酚橙
枳壳粉末
红橙
桔子酱；苦橙；橙皮马末兰果酱
甜橙油；甜橙皮油；橙皮油
n. 橙色素；橙黄色 adj. 橙色的
橙剂；橘剂
更多收起词组短语
adj.橙色的；橘色的
n.[园艺]橙；橙色；桔子
橘子汁
橙皮；橘皮皱
[化]甲基橙；甲橙
甜橙
脐橙
橙黄
橘子；蜜橘
橙黄；桔黄
香橙花；橙花鸡尾酒
橙油；橙皮油
[医]吖啶橙，四甲吖啶
酸橙，臭橙；苦酸橙
橙红色
二甲酚橙
枳壳粉末
红橙
桔子酱；苦橙；橙皮马末兰果酱
甜橙油；甜橙皮油；橙皮油
n. 橙色素；橙黄色 adj. 橙色的
橙剂；橘剂
更多收起词组短语
adj.橙色的；橘色的
n.[园艺]橙；橙色；桔子
3. mad adj. 极度激动的；发狂的 be mad about/at 对…狂热、迷恋
我非常着迷这儿的生活。I'm crazy/mad about the life here.
4. surprise n. 惊奇，诧异vt. 使惊奇 surprising令某人惊讶的 surprised感到惊讶的
be surprised to do sth \令某人惊奇的是to one’s surprise \ be surprised at
他的到来令我感诧异。 His coming surprised me.
他去世的消息令我感到震惊。 I was surprised at the news about his death.
5. hardly adv. 几乎不，简直不 hard adj. 努力的；硬的；困难的；辛苦的 adv. 努力地；困难地
可是你整个晚上几乎没说一句话。 You hardly said a word all evening. ( file: / / / D:\\Program%20Files\\Dict4\\resultui\\queryresult.html" \o "点击发音 )
我们彼此允诺要努力用功。We promised each other to work hard.
6. awful adj. 可怕的 awfully adv. 可怕地；十分 今天非常酷热难耐。 It's awfully hot today.
7. reason n. 理由；理性 reasonable adj. 合理的，公道的；通情达理的
现在价格比较划算. The price is reasonable at present.
8. pollute vt. 污染 polluted adj. 受污染的 pollution n. 污染
被污染的水对身体有害。 The polluted water is dangerous to health. ( file: / / / D:\\Program%20Files\\Dict4\\resultui\\queryresult.html" \o "点击发音 )
Module 10
1. main adj.主要的，最大的，mainly .adv What is the main idea of the text. Pandas mainly live on bamboo.
2. interest n.兴趣 ，爱好 interesting ,interested adj have/take interest in sth . be interested in
Many people have interest in watching films,but I am interested in watching TV.
3.offer v .提议，主动给予 offer to do sth He offered to help me with my English.
4.agree v 同意 agree with sb agree to do sth disagree v .不同意
I agreed with you ,but our teacher disagreed with you .
5.possible adj 可能的， impossible adj 不可能的，impossibly adv possibly adv .
Nothing is impossible . It is possibly going to rain tomorrow .
6.special adj .特别的，特殊的 specially adv especially adv 尤其是，特别是
I have got a special gift . I like fruit ,especially bananas .
7.wait v 等待，wait for sb /sth waiter n , 男服务员，waitress n 女服务员
can’t wait to do sth 迫不及待的做某事 I couldn’t wait to open the parcel to see what was in it .
8.enjoy v . 享受，喜欢 enjoyable 让人感到快乐的。enjoy doing sth This film is enjoyable ,I like it
9.full adj .满的，饱的， be full of fill v 盛满 fill sth with sth ,be filled with
The classroom is filled with students .=The classroom is full of students.
Part4：Module9-10必背知识：
1.计划做某事make a plan to do sth == plan to do sth. \ 使某人如何make sb + adj make sb do/ done
2. enough. 用作形容词，修饰名词时，要放在名词之前。用作副词，修饰形容词或副词时，必须放形容词和副词之后。
3.有某人/某物在做某事There are …doing….
4. provide sb with sth=provide sth for sb 向某人提供某物
5.offer to do sth 主动提出干某事 \ offer sb. sth. = offer sth. to sb.给某人提供某物
6.take place 表示发生，一般指按计划，事先安排好的事件的发生。happen作“发生，碰巧”讲时，一般用于偶然事件。
7. fall in love with … 意为 “爱上……”
8. marry sb. 娶某人、跟某人结婚= be\ get married to sb.
9. continue to do/doing sth. 继续做某事
10. send sb. sth. == send sth. to sb. to同类短语: offer/show/give sb. sth. =offer/show/give sth. to sb.
for同类短语: get/ make/ buy/cook sb. sth.= get/ make/ buy/cook sth. for sb.
11. send sb. to do sth. 派某人做某事 send up发射 send for 派人去请